CHAPTER 2 VALUE PROPOSITION - library.binus.ac.idlibrary.binus.ac.id/eColls/eThesisdoc/Bab2/CHAPTER...
Transcript of CHAPTER 2 VALUE PROPOSITION - library.binus.ac.idlibrary.binus.ac.id/eColls/eThesisdoc/Bab2/CHAPTER...
15
CHAPTER 2
VALUE PROPOSITION
The idea of Value proposition is how the company can create a value for the
customer and to distinguish our position within another competitor and what kind of
service that the organizations try to provide The company should add a better value
for customers therefore customers convinced to use the product and service that the
organization offer This Chapter will be explains about the value proposition of the
business by describing the theory that will provide for the business
21 Understanding Different Types of Research
In the world of research there are two general approaches to gathering and
reporting information qualitative and quantitative approaches The qualitative
approach to research is focused on understanding a phenomenon from a closer
perspective The quantitative approach tends to approximate phenomena from a larger
number of individuals using survey methods In this research corner I describe
methods that are generally used in each strand of research Each approach has its
benefits and detriments and is more suitable to answering certain kinds of questions
16
211 QUALITATIVE APPROACH
The qualitative approach to gathering information focuses on describing a
phenomenon in a deep comprehensive manner This is generally done in interviews
open-ended questions or focus groups In most cases a small number of participants
participate in this type of research because to carry out such a research endeavor
requires many resources and much time
Benefits of the qualitative approach
Using open-ended questions and interviews allows researchers and practitioners to
understand how individuals are doing what their experiences are and recognize
important antecedents and outcomes of interest that might not surface when surveyed
with pre-determined questions Although qualitative research can be thought of as
anecdotal when pooled across a number of participants it provides a conceptual
understanding and evidence that certain phenomena are occurring with particular
groups or individuals
Allows identification of new and untouched phenomena
Can provide a deeper understanding of mechanisms
Gives a one-on-one and anecdotal information
Provides verbal information that may sometimes be converted to numerical form
May reveal information that would not be identified through pre-determined
survey questions
17
Limitations
Cannot generalize to the general population
Challenges in applying statistical methods
Difficulty in assessing relations between characteristics
212 QUANTITATIVE APPROACH
The quantitative approach to gathering information focuses on describing a
phenomenon across a larger number of participants thereby providing the possibility
of summarizing characteristics across groups or relationships This approach surveys
a large number of individuals and applies statistical techniques to recognize overall
patterns in the relations of processes
Benefits of the quantitative approach
Using survey methods across a large group of individuals enables generalization For
example if policy makers wanted to instantiate a policy about mentor training they
would likely require some evidence that this training actually works Interviewing a
few individuals or conducting a focus group with forty matches might be reflective
of specific cases in which the mentoring training worked however it would not
provide strong evidence that such training is beneficial overall Stronger support for
successful training would be evident if using quantitative methods
Enables gathering information from a relatively large number of participant
18
Can conduct in a number of groups allowing for comparison
Allows generalizing to broader population
Provides numerical or rating information
Informative for instantiating policy or guidelines
Lends to statistical techniques that allow determining relations between variables
(think of better word)
Limitations
Difficulty in recognizing new and untouched phenomena
Caution in interpretation without a control group
In summary the qualitative and quantitative approaches to research allow a different
perspective of situations or phenomena These two main approaches to research are
highly informative especially if used in combination Each approach has its benefits
and detriments and being aware of the methods used to gather information can help
practitioners and policy-makers understand the extent to which research findings can
be applied
22 FOOD HYGIENE THEORY
Good food hygiene is all about controlling harmful bacteria which can cause
serious illness The four main important aspects to remember for good hygiene are
Cross-contamination Cross-contamination is when bacteria are spread between food
surfaces or equipment It is most likely to happen when raw food touches (or drips
19
onto) ready-to-eat food equipment or surfaces To avoid cross- contamination try to
do the following use different equipment (including chopping boards and knives) for
raw meatpoultry and ready-to-eat food and make sure to wash your hands before
preparing food
Cleaning Effective cleaning gets rid of bacteria on hands equipment and surfaces
So it helps to stop harmful bacteria from spreading onto food
Chilling Chilling food properly helps to stop harmful bacteria from growing Some
food needs to be kept chilled to keep it safe for example food with a lsquouse byrsquo date
cooked dishes and other ready-to-eat food such as prepared salads and desserts It is
very important not to leave these types of food standing around at room temperature
Cooking Through cooking kills harmful bacteria in food So it is extremely
important to make sure that food is cooked properly When cooking or reheating
food always check that it is steaming hot all the way through
23 NUTRITION THEORY
The term is derived from the Arabic nutritional ldquogizardquo which means food
substances in English is well known as nutrition which means the material foods or
nutrients or often defined as the science of nutrition Other definition nutrient is
defined as a process that organisms use normally consumed food through the
digestive process absorption transport storage metabolism and spending substance
nutrition to sustain life growth and normal function organs as well as to generate
power (Irianto 2006 2)
20
231 UNDERSTANDING NUTRITION PARENTING
Manage the Nutrition in additional food for baby itrsquos for sustain the growth
and development of the physical and biological toddlers appropriately and impartial
(EvelineampNanang D 2010 11)
Figure 21 Kerangka TeoriSource Depkes RI 2007
According to (LIPI 2000123) a key aspect of nutrition parenting
a Care and protection from the mother to her baby
b The practice of breastfeeding and complementary feeding administration
c Parenting psychosocial
d Preparation of food
21
e Personal hygiene and environmental sanitation
Nutritional problems one of which is influenced by the mother to their baby
do not get enough information and ability to provide parenting from the mothers or
families will result in the incidence of malnutrition in their baby
232 THE PURPOSE OF SUPPLEMENTARY FEEDING
The purpose of supplementary feeding for baby more than 6 months of age is
to increase the energy and nutrients necessary that canrsquot provide from ASI because
the growing of the baby and with increasing the ages and weight Disorders on the
growth and development of normal children can happen when the energy and nutrient
needs of infants not fulfilled It can be caused by the food of the baby only ASI or the
additional food less qualified for the babys (Waryana 2010 p85)
Indonesia Government also issued a decision from Ministry of Health
represent the code etics form WHO In the decision ministry of health included
giving the ASI exclusive for the babys (permenkes nomer 450MenkesSKIV2004)
Also describe food for babys beside ASI (MP-ASI) in the regulation number
2371997 In this regulation the mean of food for babys beside ASI itrsquos not replacing
the ASI from the mother but the food beside the ASIrdquo said Rachmi Untoro Directors
of Social Nutritions Ministry of Health (httpdepkesstatus-gizigoid)
22
24 BUSINESS MODEL (NINE BUILDING BLOCKS)
The aim for this business model is to give visualization about how the
business wills works The idea it is included the purpose of the business operational
process and the business strategy therefore the model will give a specific concept to
be succeed in the future
Figure 22 Nine Building Blocks
Source Osterwalder amp Pigneur 2010
The canvas business model contain of nine important points it is define as nine
building blocks This model management strategic tools that could be develop for
new business or existing business The nine building blocks is cover as the following
23
1 Customer segments Target of the customers that define as a group of people
to reach and served
2 Value propositions It is the product and service that being offered to the
customer
3 Channels Defines how the business able to communicate and reach the
customer segment
4 Customer relationship Describes how to maintain the relationship between
the company and customers
5 Revenue streams Represent the cash that the company generate from the
customers
6 Key resources the assets and important source that the business need to
required thus the business will works
7 Key activities It s describe what the company activity do to run the business
8 Key partnership it is explains relationship networking between the suppliers
and partners that can support the company
9 Cost structure Expenses that the company must take in order to
manufacturing the product
Before going further into the innovation first a business need to create the
business model idea This is important to generate the idea of business and make into
a successful one (Osterwalder amp Pigneur 2010136)
24
25 PORTER FIVE FORCES MODEL
To analyze the structure of the business Five Forces Model is one of the
suggested frameworks to define the industry advantage and competitive advantage
with industry structure as the key to determinant it (Grimm Curtis M et al 200651)
Figure 23 Five Forces Model
Source Grimm Curtis Met al 2006
1 Threat new entrant
There are several factors that affect the threat of the new entry as the
following
a Entry barriers This is the ability of the product to enter the market If
the entry barriers are high it means the threat of the new entrant are
low and if the entry barriers are low the threat of new entrant are high
25
b Customer demand When the customer demand of product and service
are high threat of the possibility of new entrant is high since the
industry not be able to handle
c Product or service differentiation If the product can make
differentiation with new innovation then the threat is high
2 Threat of substitute products or service
The threat of substitute increased if there is competitor that can offer
better competitive price to the market
3 Bargaining power of customer
There are several factors that affect the bargaining power of customer as
the following
a Reputation When the product or service has a good reputation the
bargaining power of supplier will be low since the customer will have
no choice to select other product
b Switching cost High switching cost means the customer not easy to
switch to other competitor
c Quality of product and service Customers will buy the better quality
of the product even though the price is the same
d The number of the other industry competitor If the numbers of the
competitor are low the bargaining power of the customer also low
When the numbers of the competitors are high then the bargaining
power of the customer will be high
26
e Dependency to the product or service The bargaining power of the
customer will be low if a product have the ability to create a
dependency to the customer
4 Bargaining power of suppliers
There are some factors that affect the bargaining power of suppliers as the
following
a The number of supplier If the number of the supplier of the industry
are low then the bargaining power of the supplier are high and if the
number of the supplier are high then the bargaining power of supplier
are low
b Switching cost High switching cost in the product and service then it
is hard to change to another supplier
c Quality of the product serviceIt is very common to switch to another
supplier once the quality of product and service are low on the other
hand if the quality of the product and service are high there is not a n
option to change to other supplier
d Product or service availability The bargaining power of supplier will
be low if the availability of the product is high
e Image of the supplier If the supplier has a great image and status in
the industry then it will follow by the higher bargaining power
5 Intensity of competitive rivalry
Intensity of the industry will be high when there is other service and
products operate that involve many players which can be dominant or similar
27
26 SWOT ANALYSIS
A Way to monitoring the external and internal marketing environment is by using
SWOT analysis (Kotler Keller 2012 70) In their book Osterwalder and Pigneur
(2010 224) mentioned that a SWOT analysis in the business model yields two
results
1 Provides a snapshot of where is our business are (strength and weakness as
internal environment)
2 Suggest some future trajectories (opportunities and threats as external
environment)
SWOT analysis is such an important part in the process of designing business model
prototypes
A business unit must monitor key macro environment forces and significant
micro environment factors that affect is ability to earn profits An opportunity is the
are of buyer need an interest that a company has a high probability of profitability
satisfying Meanwhile a threat is a challenge posed by an unfavorable trend or
development that in the absence of defensive marketing action would led to lower
sales or profit (Kotler Keller 2012 71)
Meanwhile as an evaluation the business itself has to looking to its strength
and weaknesses By looking on these points the business could consider whether it
should limit itself to those opportunities for which it possesses the required strength
or consider those that might require it to find or develop new strength
28
261 TOWS MATRIX
Based on the journal from Heinz Weihrich (1982) Tows Matrix is a variant of
the classic business tool SWOT Analysis TOWS and SWOT are acronyms for
different arrangements of the words Strengths Weaknesses Opportunities and
Threats
Here are four basic strategies depending on the prevalence of the analyzed
group of factors (positive or negative) in the environment and within the company
SO situation - maxi-maxi strategy This situation applies to the company for
which dominates strengths in the environment and opportunities within This
situation corresponds to the maxi-maxi strategy strong expansion and
diversified development
WO situation - mini-maxi strategy In this situation company has the more
vulnerabilities - weaknesses but its environment gives more opportunities
The strategy should include the use of these opportunities while reducing or
correcting weaknesses within the organization
ST situation - maxi-mini strategy The source of development difficulties for
the company are unfavorable external conditions (prevalence of threats) The
company may use large internal strengths in attempt to overcome threats from
environment
WT situation - mini-mini strategy The company in this case is devoid of any
development opportunities It operates in hostile environments and its
29
potential for change is small It does not have significant strengths which
could withstand threats Mini-mini strategy boils down to a pessimistic
version of the liquidation or in optimistic situation - to strive for survival or
merger with another organization
Figure 24 TOWS Matrix Source Weihrich (1982)
27 MARKETING THEORY
The American Marketing Association define marketing as the activity set of
institutions and process for creating communication delivering and exchanging
offerings that have value for customers clients partners and society at large (Kotler
Keller 2012 27) Peter Drucker a leading management theorist said that the aim of
marketing is to make selling superfluous Successful marketing need and
30
understanding creating delivering capturing and sustaining customer value The
marketing plan is the central instrument for directing and coordinating the marketing
effort
271 Marketing Management
Based on (Kotler amp Amstrong 2010) the marketing management is analysis
planning implementation and programs control that made for created developed
and maintenance the transaction for gain the benefit based on the company purposed
Company management consist of demand that relationship with the customers
272 Segmenting Targeting Positioning
Based on (Kotler 2001) there are many consumers with differential needs so
the company must share the market choose good segmentation and also made some
appropriate strategy to gain a big benefit than other competitors Those strategies
process consist of there point which are
1 Market Segmentation
Segmentation is the share consumer activity into a more homogenous group m
hopes of a response is obtained such as buy wear accept and believe On the
practice segmentation market is the process share market into group
consumer based on their needs characteristic behavior and differentiation
mix market (Kasali 203) Based on (Kotler 2003) there are 3 main
segmentations of variable which are
31
a Geographic segmentation
Dividing market into different geographical units such as nations
states regions countries cities and neighborhoods
b Demographic segmentation
Dividing market into groups based on demographic variables such as
age gender family size family life cycle income occupation
education religion race and nationality
c Psychographic segmentation
Dividing a market into different groups based on social class lifestyle
or personality characteristic
Based on (Kotler 2003) that the market segment can drive so the
segment of the market must have 5 characteristics which are
Measurable size of the segment purchasing power of the
segment we want to reach and the last one is characteristic of
the segment can be measurable
Substantial a segment becomes the unity of homogeny group
that have a power to gain benefit if the program and marketing
drive by these groups
Accessible the segment that must be reach and served
effectively
32
Differentiable that the segments can be separate by conceptual
and respond differently to the program and the different
elements of the marketing mix
Actionable the program have made effectively that must be
implemented to attract and serve the segments
2 Market Targeting
These methods purpose to establish target market evaluation process begins
with the attractiveness of each market segment and has one or more segments
most benefit to be entered Based on (Kotler 2003) these are 5 patterns that
we can used to enter the market which are
a Single segment concentration
Concentrate with one segment the company get the knowledge
about what the market needs that to be the reach target market
and get a strong minded of consumers in that segment This
pattern have a high risk if there are saturation occurs in this
segment the company faces the risk of losing the entire market
b Selective specialization
On this pattern the company can choose the segment market
that where segment must gain the benefit The advantage of
this pattern are the ability of the company to reduce the risk
lower
c Product specialization
33
This pattern showed the company produced the goods which
will be sold in some segments
d Market specialization
The market showed that company produced the goods and sell
to the one segment the advantages if this pattern the company
have a high reputation from the consumer that segment market
have been entered
e Full market coverage
On this pattern the company try to reach whole market with
produced what consumer needs with the differential product to
gain the whole market the entered
3 Market Positioning
Market positioning is the activity of the company to place their product on the
market so their product get a clear position distinguishable as well as more
expected than competing production the minds of the target consumers that
will provide huge benefits in the target market
Based on (Kotler 2003) the company must avoid the four main errors in
placing market position which are
a Under positioning
It is mean the placement too low that causing superficial
picture of the product so consumer have a low response to the
product
b Over positioning
34
The placement is too high so it can cause the false perception
from consumers on the price of the product so consumers are
reluctant to buy because they think price is too high
c Confused positioning
Confusing placement of the product because the company too
often change their market position
d Doubtful positioning
Dubious product placement the effect of this position the
consumers distrust of the product
273 Marketing Mix
Based on (Kotler ampAmstrong 2010) marketing mix is a unity of the tools of
marketing that the tactical as well as directed and used by the company to produce the
desired response target market Marketing mix is a modern marketing theory
Marketing mix defined as the set of marketing tools that the form use to pursue its
marketing objective in the target market (Kotler 1994 98) Based on the Journal
Marketing by Chai Lee Goi Marketing mix is not scientific theory but a conceptual
framework that identifies the principal decision making manager make in configuring
their offerings to suit consumersrsquo needs (Lee Chai Goi 2009 1) To gain the benefit
for the company marketing mix is the weapon that company usually used to get the
change on the market That changed was grouped by four strategies named ldquo4Psrdquo
that consist of product price place and promotion
35
Product
Product is goods or services that company offered to the market
Price
Price is the several money that consumer must pay to buy a product
Place
Place (distribution) not only represent that the product can achieve or known
but also activity that company do for the product the produced easy to get at
the market and consumers
Promotion
Is the activity that company do to communicate their product and get the
consumer to reach their product Consist of advertising events sponsorship
and other activity are summarized in the Integrated Marketing
Communication (IMC)
Booms and Bitner is suggested 3 other elements beides the traditional 4Prsquos by
Kotler for service business which are (wwwlenamarketingnet 2013)
Physical Evidence
Is about where the service is being delivered from This element will
differentiate the company with other
Process
This element of the marketing mix looks at the used to deliver the service
36
People
People are essential ingredients in service provision recruiting and training
the right staff is required to create a competitive advantage
28 OPERATIONAL MANAGEMENT 281 THE SERVICE DESIGN PROCESS Service design is more comprehensive and occurs more often than product
design The inherent variability of service processes requires that the service system
be carefully designed The service concept defines the target customer and the desired
customer experience The service design process must be different and unique from
others to make the product selling point It also defines how onersquos service is
different from others and how it will compete in the marketplace Sometimes
services are successful because their service concept fills a previously unoccupied
niche or differs from the generally accepted mode of operation (Rusell amp Taylor
2011 193)
37
Figure 25 The Service Design Process Source Rusell amp Taylor2011
From the service concept a service package is created to meet customer
needs The package consists of a mixture of physical items sensual
benefits and psychological benefits Effective service design recognizes and
defines all the components of a service package Finding the appropriate mix of
physical items and sensual and psychological benefits and designing them to be
consistent with each other and the service concept is also important (Rusell amp
Taylor 2011 194) From the service package service specifications are developed
for performance design and delivery Performance specifications outline
expectations and requirements for general and specific customers
Performance specifications are converted into design specifications and finally
delivery specifications Design specifications must describe the service in
sufficient detail for the desired service experience to be replicated for different
individuals at numerous locations The specifications typically consist of
38
activities to be performed skill requirements and guidelines for service
providers and cost and time estimates Facility size location and layoutas well
as equipment needs are also included
29 FINANCIAL THEORY 291 BALANCE SHEET
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 62) The balance sheet presents a
summary statement of the firmrsquos financial position at a given time The statement
balances the firmrsquos assets (what it owns) against its financing which can be either
debt (what it owes) or equity (what was provided by owners) Below is the example
of balance sheet from Bartlettrsquos Company
Figure 26 Bartlett Company Balance Sheets Source Gitman amp Zitter 2012
39
The assets are listed from the most liquid (cash) ndash down to the least liquid
Marketable securities are very liquid short-term investments held by the firm
Because they are highly liquid marketable securities are viewed as a form of cash
(ldquonear cashrdquo) Accounts receivable represent the total monies owed the firm by its
customers on credit sales Inventories include raw materials work in process
(partially finished goods) and finished goods held by the firm The entry for gross
fixed assets is the original cost of all fixed (long-term) assets owned by the firm Net
fixed assets represent the difference between gross fixed assets and accumulated
depreciation ndash the total expense recorded for the depreciation of fixed assets The net
value of fixed assets is called their book value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
The liabilities and equity accounts are listed from short-term to long-
term Current liabilities include accounts payable amounts owed for credit
purchases by the firm notes payable outstanding short-term loans typically
from commercial banks and accruals amounts owed for services for which a bill
may not or will not be received Examples of accruals include taxes due the
government and wages due employees Long-term debt represents debt for which
payment is not due in the current year Stockholdersrsquo equity represents the
ownersrsquo claims on the firm The preferred stock entry shows the historical
proceeds from the sale of preferred stock(Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
40
292 INCOME STATEMENT
The income statement provides a financial summary of the firmrsquos operating
results during a specified period Most common are income statements covering a 1-
year period ending at a specified date ordinarily December 31 of the calendar year
Many large firms however operate on a 12-month financial cycle or fiscal year that
ends at a time other than December 31 In addition monthly income statements are
typically prepared for use by management and quarterly statements must be made
available to the stockholders of publicly owned corporations (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 59-60) The example of income statement is shown below
Figure 27 Bartlett Company Income
Statement Source GitmanampZitter2012
293 CASH FLOW ANALYSIS
A cash flow statement is one of the most important financial statements for a
project or business The statement can be as simple as a one page analysis or may
41
involve several schedules that feed information into a central statement A cash flow
statement is a listing of the flows of cash into and out of the business or project
Many cash flows are constructed with multiple time periods
For example it may list monthly cash inflows and outflows over a yearrsquos time
It not only projects the cash balance remaining at the end of the year but also
the cash balance for each month (wwwextensioniastateedu 2013) Some cash
flow budgets are constructed so that we can monitor the accuracy of our projections
These budgets allow us to make monthly cash flow projections for the coming year
and also enter actual inflows and outflows as we progress through the year This
will allow us to compare your projections to your actual cash flows and make
adjustments to the projections for the remainder of the year
Figure 28 Example of
Cash Flow Source
Gitman ampZitter 2012
Even though cash flow and profitability are closely related they are different
42
A cash flow statement lists cash inflows and cash outflows while the income
statement lists income and expenses A cash flow statement shows liquidity while an
income statement shows profitability
294 PAYBACK PERIOD
Payback periods are commonly used to evaluate proposed investments The
payback period is the amount of time required for the firm to recover its initial
investment in a project as calculated from cash inflows The payback period can be
found by dividing the initial investment by the annual cash inflow When the
payback period is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the following decision
criteria apply
If the payback period is less than the maximum acceptable payback
period accept the project
If the payback period is greater than the maximum acceptable payback
period reject the project
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 393) the length of the maximum
acceptable payback period is determined by management This value is set
subjectively on the basis of a number of factors including the type of project
(expansion replacement or renewal other) the perceived risk of the project and the
perceived relationship between the payback period and the share value It is simply a
value that management feels on average will result in value-creating investment
decisions
43
By measuring how quickly the firm recovers its initial investment the
payback period also gives implicit consideration to the timing of cash flows and
therefore to the time value of money Because it can be viewed as a measure of
risk exposure many firms use the payback period as a decision criterion or as a
supplement to other decision techniques The longer the firm must wait to recover
its invested funds the greater the possibility of a calamity Hence the shorter the
payback period the lower the firmrsquos risk exposure A second weakness is that this
approach fails to take fully into account the time factor in the value of money A
third weakness of payback is its failure to recognize cash flows that occur after the
payback period (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 394-396)
Figure 29 Calculation of
Payback Period Source
Gitman amp Zitter 2012
44
295 NET PRESENT VALUE (NPV)
The method used by most large companies to evaluate investment projects is
called net present value (NPV) The intuition behind the NPV method is simple
When firms make investments they are spending money that they obtained in one
form or another from investors Investors expect a return on the money that they give
to firms so a firm should undertake an investment only if the present value of the
cash flow that the investment generates is greater than the cost of making the
investment in the first place
Because the NPV method takes into account the time value of investorsrsquo
money it is a more sophisticated capital budgeting technique than the payback rule
The NPV method discounts the firmrsquos cash flows at the firmrsquos cost of capital This
rate is the minimum return that must be earned on a project to satisfy the firmrsquos
investors Projects with lower returns fail to meet investorsrsquo expectations and
therefore decrease firm value and projects with higher returns increase firm
value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
The net present value (NPV) is found by subtracting a projectrsquos initial
investment (CF0) from the present value of its cash inflows (CFt) discounted at a
rate equal to the firmrsquos cost of capital (r) as shown below
NPV = Present value of cash inflows - Initial investment
When NPV is used both inflows and outflows are measured in terms of
45
present dollars For a project that has cash outflows beyond the initial investment the
net present value of a project would be found by subtracting the present value of
outflows from the present value of inflows When NPV is used to make accept reject
decisions the decision criteria are as follows
If the NPV is greater than $0 accept the project
If the NPV is less than $0 reject the project
If the NPV is greater than $0 the firm will earn a return greater than its cost of
capital Such action should increase the market value of the firm and therefore the
wealth of its owners by an amount equal to the NPV (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
296 INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN (IRR)
The internal rate of return (IRR) is one of the most widely used capital
budgeting techniques The internal rate of return (IRR) is the discount rate that
equates the NPV of an investment opportunity with $0 (because the present value of
cash inflows equals the initial investment) It is the rate of return that the firm will
earn if it invests in the project and receives the given cash inflows (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 401)
When IRR is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the decision criteria are as
follows
If the IRR is greater than the cost of capital accept the project
46
If the IRR is less than the cost of capital reject the project
To calculate IRR Most financial calculators have a pre-programmed IRR
function that can be used to simplify the IRR calculation With these calculators you
merely punch in all cash flows just as if to calculate NPV and then depress IRR to
find the internal rate of return Computer software including spreadsheets is also
available for simplifying these calculations All NPV and IRR values presented in
this and subsequent chapters are obtained by using these functions on a popular
financial calculator (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 402)
297 COST OF GOOD SOLD (COGS)
Cost of goods sold is the direct costs attributable to the production of the
goods sold by a company This amount includes the cost of the materials used in
creating the good along with the direct labor costs used to produce the good It
excludes indirect expenses such as distribution costs and sales force costs
COGS is the costs that go into creating the products that a company sells
therefore the only costs included in the measure are those that are directly tied to the
production of the products For example the COGS for an automaker would include
the material costs for the parts that go into making the car along with the labor costs
used to put the car together The cost of sending the cars to dealerships and the cost of
the labor used to sell the car would be excluded
The exact costs included in the COGS calculation will differ from one type
of business to another The cost of goods attributed to a companys products are
47
expensed as the company sells these goods In summary for manufacturers COGS is
the cost of buying raw materials and manufacturing finished products For retailers
itrsquos the cost of obtaining or buying the products sold to customers If the company is
in a service industry COGS is the cost of the service it offers
48
49
50
16
211 QUALITATIVE APPROACH
The qualitative approach to gathering information focuses on describing a
phenomenon in a deep comprehensive manner This is generally done in interviews
open-ended questions or focus groups In most cases a small number of participants
participate in this type of research because to carry out such a research endeavor
requires many resources and much time
Benefits of the qualitative approach
Using open-ended questions and interviews allows researchers and practitioners to
understand how individuals are doing what their experiences are and recognize
important antecedents and outcomes of interest that might not surface when surveyed
with pre-determined questions Although qualitative research can be thought of as
anecdotal when pooled across a number of participants it provides a conceptual
understanding and evidence that certain phenomena are occurring with particular
groups or individuals
Allows identification of new and untouched phenomena
Can provide a deeper understanding of mechanisms
Gives a one-on-one and anecdotal information
Provides verbal information that may sometimes be converted to numerical form
May reveal information that would not be identified through pre-determined
survey questions
17
Limitations
Cannot generalize to the general population
Challenges in applying statistical methods
Difficulty in assessing relations between characteristics
212 QUANTITATIVE APPROACH
The quantitative approach to gathering information focuses on describing a
phenomenon across a larger number of participants thereby providing the possibility
of summarizing characteristics across groups or relationships This approach surveys
a large number of individuals and applies statistical techniques to recognize overall
patterns in the relations of processes
Benefits of the quantitative approach
Using survey methods across a large group of individuals enables generalization For
example if policy makers wanted to instantiate a policy about mentor training they
would likely require some evidence that this training actually works Interviewing a
few individuals or conducting a focus group with forty matches might be reflective
of specific cases in which the mentoring training worked however it would not
provide strong evidence that such training is beneficial overall Stronger support for
successful training would be evident if using quantitative methods
Enables gathering information from a relatively large number of participant
18
Can conduct in a number of groups allowing for comparison
Allows generalizing to broader population
Provides numerical or rating information
Informative for instantiating policy or guidelines
Lends to statistical techniques that allow determining relations between variables
(think of better word)
Limitations
Difficulty in recognizing new and untouched phenomena
Caution in interpretation without a control group
In summary the qualitative and quantitative approaches to research allow a different
perspective of situations or phenomena These two main approaches to research are
highly informative especially if used in combination Each approach has its benefits
and detriments and being aware of the methods used to gather information can help
practitioners and policy-makers understand the extent to which research findings can
be applied
22 FOOD HYGIENE THEORY
Good food hygiene is all about controlling harmful bacteria which can cause
serious illness The four main important aspects to remember for good hygiene are
Cross-contamination Cross-contamination is when bacteria are spread between food
surfaces or equipment It is most likely to happen when raw food touches (or drips
19
onto) ready-to-eat food equipment or surfaces To avoid cross- contamination try to
do the following use different equipment (including chopping boards and knives) for
raw meatpoultry and ready-to-eat food and make sure to wash your hands before
preparing food
Cleaning Effective cleaning gets rid of bacteria on hands equipment and surfaces
So it helps to stop harmful bacteria from spreading onto food
Chilling Chilling food properly helps to stop harmful bacteria from growing Some
food needs to be kept chilled to keep it safe for example food with a lsquouse byrsquo date
cooked dishes and other ready-to-eat food such as prepared salads and desserts It is
very important not to leave these types of food standing around at room temperature
Cooking Through cooking kills harmful bacteria in food So it is extremely
important to make sure that food is cooked properly When cooking or reheating
food always check that it is steaming hot all the way through
23 NUTRITION THEORY
The term is derived from the Arabic nutritional ldquogizardquo which means food
substances in English is well known as nutrition which means the material foods or
nutrients or often defined as the science of nutrition Other definition nutrient is
defined as a process that organisms use normally consumed food through the
digestive process absorption transport storage metabolism and spending substance
nutrition to sustain life growth and normal function organs as well as to generate
power (Irianto 2006 2)
20
231 UNDERSTANDING NUTRITION PARENTING
Manage the Nutrition in additional food for baby itrsquos for sustain the growth
and development of the physical and biological toddlers appropriately and impartial
(EvelineampNanang D 2010 11)
Figure 21 Kerangka TeoriSource Depkes RI 2007
According to (LIPI 2000123) a key aspect of nutrition parenting
a Care and protection from the mother to her baby
b The practice of breastfeeding and complementary feeding administration
c Parenting psychosocial
d Preparation of food
21
e Personal hygiene and environmental sanitation
Nutritional problems one of which is influenced by the mother to their baby
do not get enough information and ability to provide parenting from the mothers or
families will result in the incidence of malnutrition in their baby
232 THE PURPOSE OF SUPPLEMENTARY FEEDING
The purpose of supplementary feeding for baby more than 6 months of age is
to increase the energy and nutrients necessary that canrsquot provide from ASI because
the growing of the baby and with increasing the ages and weight Disorders on the
growth and development of normal children can happen when the energy and nutrient
needs of infants not fulfilled It can be caused by the food of the baby only ASI or the
additional food less qualified for the babys (Waryana 2010 p85)
Indonesia Government also issued a decision from Ministry of Health
represent the code etics form WHO In the decision ministry of health included
giving the ASI exclusive for the babys (permenkes nomer 450MenkesSKIV2004)
Also describe food for babys beside ASI (MP-ASI) in the regulation number
2371997 In this regulation the mean of food for babys beside ASI itrsquos not replacing
the ASI from the mother but the food beside the ASIrdquo said Rachmi Untoro Directors
of Social Nutritions Ministry of Health (httpdepkesstatus-gizigoid)
22
24 BUSINESS MODEL (NINE BUILDING BLOCKS)
The aim for this business model is to give visualization about how the
business wills works The idea it is included the purpose of the business operational
process and the business strategy therefore the model will give a specific concept to
be succeed in the future
Figure 22 Nine Building Blocks
Source Osterwalder amp Pigneur 2010
The canvas business model contain of nine important points it is define as nine
building blocks This model management strategic tools that could be develop for
new business or existing business The nine building blocks is cover as the following
23
1 Customer segments Target of the customers that define as a group of people
to reach and served
2 Value propositions It is the product and service that being offered to the
customer
3 Channels Defines how the business able to communicate and reach the
customer segment
4 Customer relationship Describes how to maintain the relationship between
the company and customers
5 Revenue streams Represent the cash that the company generate from the
customers
6 Key resources the assets and important source that the business need to
required thus the business will works
7 Key activities It s describe what the company activity do to run the business
8 Key partnership it is explains relationship networking between the suppliers
and partners that can support the company
9 Cost structure Expenses that the company must take in order to
manufacturing the product
Before going further into the innovation first a business need to create the
business model idea This is important to generate the idea of business and make into
a successful one (Osterwalder amp Pigneur 2010136)
24
25 PORTER FIVE FORCES MODEL
To analyze the structure of the business Five Forces Model is one of the
suggested frameworks to define the industry advantage and competitive advantage
with industry structure as the key to determinant it (Grimm Curtis M et al 200651)
Figure 23 Five Forces Model
Source Grimm Curtis Met al 2006
1 Threat new entrant
There are several factors that affect the threat of the new entry as the
following
a Entry barriers This is the ability of the product to enter the market If
the entry barriers are high it means the threat of the new entrant are
low and if the entry barriers are low the threat of new entrant are high
25
b Customer demand When the customer demand of product and service
are high threat of the possibility of new entrant is high since the
industry not be able to handle
c Product or service differentiation If the product can make
differentiation with new innovation then the threat is high
2 Threat of substitute products or service
The threat of substitute increased if there is competitor that can offer
better competitive price to the market
3 Bargaining power of customer
There are several factors that affect the bargaining power of customer as
the following
a Reputation When the product or service has a good reputation the
bargaining power of supplier will be low since the customer will have
no choice to select other product
b Switching cost High switching cost means the customer not easy to
switch to other competitor
c Quality of product and service Customers will buy the better quality
of the product even though the price is the same
d The number of the other industry competitor If the numbers of the
competitor are low the bargaining power of the customer also low
When the numbers of the competitors are high then the bargaining
power of the customer will be high
26
e Dependency to the product or service The bargaining power of the
customer will be low if a product have the ability to create a
dependency to the customer
4 Bargaining power of suppliers
There are some factors that affect the bargaining power of suppliers as the
following
a The number of supplier If the number of the supplier of the industry
are low then the bargaining power of the supplier are high and if the
number of the supplier are high then the bargaining power of supplier
are low
b Switching cost High switching cost in the product and service then it
is hard to change to another supplier
c Quality of the product serviceIt is very common to switch to another
supplier once the quality of product and service are low on the other
hand if the quality of the product and service are high there is not a n
option to change to other supplier
d Product or service availability The bargaining power of supplier will
be low if the availability of the product is high
e Image of the supplier If the supplier has a great image and status in
the industry then it will follow by the higher bargaining power
5 Intensity of competitive rivalry
Intensity of the industry will be high when there is other service and
products operate that involve many players which can be dominant or similar
27
26 SWOT ANALYSIS
A Way to monitoring the external and internal marketing environment is by using
SWOT analysis (Kotler Keller 2012 70) In their book Osterwalder and Pigneur
(2010 224) mentioned that a SWOT analysis in the business model yields two
results
1 Provides a snapshot of where is our business are (strength and weakness as
internal environment)
2 Suggest some future trajectories (opportunities and threats as external
environment)
SWOT analysis is such an important part in the process of designing business model
prototypes
A business unit must monitor key macro environment forces and significant
micro environment factors that affect is ability to earn profits An opportunity is the
are of buyer need an interest that a company has a high probability of profitability
satisfying Meanwhile a threat is a challenge posed by an unfavorable trend or
development that in the absence of defensive marketing action would led to lower
sales or profit (Kotler Keller 2012 71)
Meanwhile as an evaluation the business itself has to looking to its strength
and weaknesses By looking on these points the business could consider whether it
should limit itself to those opportunities for which it possesses the required strength
or consider those that might require it to find or develop new strength
28
261 TOWS MATRIX
Based on the journal from Heinz Weihrich (1982) Tows Matrix is a variant of
the classic business tool SWOT Analysis TOWS and SWOT are acronyms for
different arrangements of the words Strengths Weaknesses Opportunities and
Threats
Here are four basic strategies depending on the prevalence of the analyzed
group of factors (positive or negative) in the environment and within the company
SO situation - maxi-maxi strategy This situation applies to the company for
which dominates strengths in the environment and opportunities within This
situation corresponds to the maxi-maxi strategy strong expansion and
diversified development
WO situation - mini-maxi strategy In this situation company has the more
vulnerabilities - weaknesses but its environment gives more opportunities
The strategy should include the use of these opportunities while reducing or
correcting weaknesses within the organization
ST situation - maxi-mini strategy The source of development difficulties for
the company are unfavorable external conditions (prevalence of threats) The
company may use large internal strengths in attempt to overcome threats from
environment
WT situation - mini-mini strategy The company in this case is devoid of any
development opportunities It operates in hostile environments and its
29
potential for change is small It does not have significant strengths which
could withstand threats Mini-mini strategy boils down to a pessimistic
version of the liquidation or in optimistic situation - to strive for survival or
merger with another organization
Figure 24 TOWS Matrix Source Weihrich (1982)
27 MARKETING THEORY
The American Marketing Association define marketing as the activity set of
institutions and process for creating communication delivering and exchanging
offerings that have value for customers clients partners and society at large (Kotler
Keller 2012 27) Peter Drucker a leading management theorist said that the aim of
marketing is to make selling superfluous Successful marketing need and
30
understanding creating delivering capturing and sustaining customer value The
marketing plan is the central instrument for directing and coordinating the marketing
effort
271 Marketing Management
Based on (Kotler amp Amstrong 2010) the marketing management is analysis
planning implementation and programs control that made for created developed
and maintenance the transaction for gain the benefit based on the company purposed
Company management consist of demand that relationship with the customers
272 Segmenting Targeting Positioning
Based on (Kotler 2001) there are many consumers with differential needs so
the company must share the market choose good segmentation and also made some
appropriate strategy to gain a big benefit than other competitors Those strategies
process consist of there point which are
1 Market Segmentation
Segmentation is the share consumer activity into a more homogenous group m
hopes of a response is obtained such as buy wear accept and believe On the
practice segmentation market is the process share market into group
consumer based on their needs characteristic behavior and differentiation
mix market (Kasali 203) Based on (Kotler 2003) there are 3 main
segmentations of variable which are
31
a Geographic segmentation
Dividing market into different geographical units such as nations
states regions countries cities and neighborhoods
b Demographic segmentation
Dividing market into groups based on demographic variables such as
age gender family size family life cycle income occupation
education religion race and nationality
c Psychographic segmentation
Dividing a market into different groups based on social class lifestyle
or personality characteristic
Based on (Kotler 2003) that the market segment can drive so the
segment of the market must have 5 characteristics which are
Measurable size of the segment purchasing power of the
segment we want to reach and the last one is characteristic of
the segment can be measurable
Substantial a segment becomes the unity of homogeny group
that have a power to gain benefit if the program and marketing
drive by these groups
Accessible the segment that must be reach and served
effectively
32
Differentiable that the segments can be separate by conceptual
and respond differently to the program and the different
elements of the marketing mix
Actionable the program have made effectively that must be
implemented to attract and serve the segments
2 Market Targeting
These methods purpose to establish target market evaluation process begins
with the attractiveness of each market segment and has one or more segments
most benefit to be entered Based on (Kotler 2003) these are 5 patterns that
we can used to enter the market which are
a Single segment concentration
Concentrate with one segment the company get the knowledge
about what the market needs that to be the reach target market
and get a strong minded of consumers in that segment This
pattern have a high risk if there are saturation occurs in this
segment the company faces the risk of losing the entire market
b Selective specialization
On this pattern the company can choose the segment market
that where segment must gain the benefit The advantage of
this pattern are the ability of the company to reduce the risk
lower
c Product specialization
33
This pattern showed the company produced the goods which
will be sold in some segments
d Market specialization
The market showed that company produced the goods and sell
to the one segment the advantages if this pattern the company
have a high reputation from the consumer that segment market
have been entered
e Full market coverage
On this pattern the company try to reach whole market with
produced what consumer needs with the differential product to
gain the whole market the entered
3 Market Positioning
Market positioning is the activity of the company to place their product on the
market so their product get a clear position distinguishable as well as more
expected than competing production the minds of the target consumers that
will provide huge benefits in the target market
Based on (Kotler 2003) the company must avoid the four main errors in
placing market position which are
a Under positioning
It is mean the placement too low that causing superficial
picture of the product so consumer have a low response to the
product
b Over positioning
34
The placement is too high so it can cause the false perception
from consumers on the price of the product so consumers are
reluctant to buy because they think price is too high
c Confused positioning
Confusing placement of the product because the company too
often change their market position
d Doubtful positioning
Dubious product placement the effect of this position the
consumers distrust of the product
273 Marketing Mix
Based on (Kotler ampAmstrong 2010) marketing mix is a unity of the tools of
marketing that the tactical as well as directed and used by the company to produce the
desired response target market Marketing mix is a modern marketing theory
Marketing mix defined as the set of marketing tools that the form use to pursue its
marketing objective in the target market (Kotler 1994 98) Based on the Journal
Marketing by Chai Lee Goi Marketing mix is not scientific theory but a conceptual
framework that identifies the principal decision making manager make in configuring
their offerings to suit consumersrsquo needs (Lee Chai Goi 2009 1) To gain the benefit
for the company marketing mix is the weapon that company usually used to get the
change on the market That changed was grouped by four strategies named ldquo4Psrdquo
that consist of product price place and promotion
35
Product
Product is goods or services that company offered to the market
Price
Price is the several money that consumer must pay to buy a product
Place
Place (distribution) not only represent that the product can achieve or known
but also activity that company do for the product the produced easy to get at
the market and consumers
Promotion
Is the activity that company do to communicate their product and get the
consumer to reach their product Consist of advertising events sponsorship
and other activity are summarized in the Integrated Marketing
Communication (IMC)
Booms and Bitner is suggested 3 other elements beides the traditional 4Prsquos by
Kotler for service business which are (wwwlenamarketingnet 2013)
Physical Evidence
Is about where the service is being delivered from This element will
differentiate the company with other
Process
This element of the marketing mix looks at the used to deliver the service
36
People
People are essential ingredients in service provision recruiting and training
the right staff is required to create a competitive advantage
28 OPERATIONAL MANAGEMENT 281 THE SERVICE DESIGN PROCESS Service design is more comprehensive and occurs more often than product
design The inherent variability of service processes requires that the service system
be carefully designed The service concept defines the target customer and the desired
customer experience The service design process must be different and unique from
others to make the product selling point It also defines how onersquos service is
different from others and how it will compete in the marketplace Sometimes
services are successful because their service concept fills a previously unoccupied
niche or differs from the generally accepted mode of operation (Rusell amp Taylor
2011 193)
37
Figure 25 The Service Design Process Source Rusell amp Taylor2011
From the service concept a service package is created to meet customer
needs The package consists of a mixture of physical items sensual
benefits and psychological benefits Effective service design recognizes and
defines all the components of a service package Finding the appropriate mix of
physical items and sensual and psychological benefits and designing them to be
consistent with each other and the service concept is also important (Rusell amp
Taylor 2011 194) From the service package service specifications are developed
for performance design and delivery Performance specifications outline
expectations and requirements for general and specific customers
Performance specifications are converted into design specifications and finally
delivery specifications Design specifications must describe the service in
sufficient detail for the desired service experience to be replicated for different
individuals at numerous locations The specifications typically consist of
38
activities to be performed skill requirements and guidelines for service
providers and cost and time estimates Facility size location and layoutas well
as equipment needs are also included
29 FINANCIAL THEORY 291 BALANCE SHEET
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 62) The balance sheet presents a
summary statement of the firmrsquos financial position at a given time The statement
balances the firmrsquos assets (what it owns) against its financing which can be either
debt (what it owes) or equity (what was provided by owners) Below is the example
of balance sheet from Bartlettrsquos Company
Figure 26 Bartlett Company Balance Sheets Source Gitman amp Zitter 2012
39
The assets are listed from the most liquid (cash) ndash down to the least liquid
Marketable securities are very liquid short-term investments held by the firm
Because they are highly liquid marketable securities are viewed as a form of cash
(ldquonear cashrdquo) Accounts receivable represent the total monies owed the firm by its
customers on credit sales Inventories include raw materials work in process
(partially finished goods) and finished goods held by the firm The entry for gross
fixed assets is the original cost of all fixed (long-term) assets owned by the firm Net
fixed assets represent the difference between gross fixed assets and accumulated
depreciation ndash the total expense recorded for the depreciation of fixed assets The net
value of fixed assets is called their book value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
The liabilities and equity accounts are listed from short-term to long-
term Current liabilities include accounts payable amounts owed for credit
purchases by the firm notes payable outstanding short-term loans typically
from commercial banks and accruals amounts owed for services for which a bill
may not or will not be received Examples of accruals include taxes due the
government and wages due employees Long-term debt represents debt for which
payment is not due in the current year Stockholdersrsquo equity represents the
ownersrsquo claims on the firm The preferred stock entry shows the historical
proceeds from the sale of preferred stock(Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
40
292 INCOME STATEMENT
The income statement provides a financial summary of the firmrsquos operating
results during a specified period Most common are income statements covering a 1-
year period ending at a specified date ordinarily December 31 of the calendar year
Many large firms however operate on a 12-month financial cycle or fiscal year that
ends at a time other than December 31 In addition monthly income statements are
typically prepared for use by management and quarterly statements must be made
available to the stockholders of publicly owned corporations (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 59-60) The example of income statement is shown below
Figure 27 Bartlett Company Income
Statement Source GitmanampZitter2012
293 CASH FLOW ANALYSIS
A cash flow statement is one of the most important financial statements for a
project or business The statement can be as simple as a one page analysis or may
41
involve several schedules that feed information into a central statement A cash flow
statement is a listing of the flows of cash into and out of the business or project
Many cash flows are constructed with multiple time periods
For example it may list monthly cash inflows and outflows over a yearrsquos time
It not only projects the cash balance remaining at the end of the year but also
the cash balance for each month (wwwextensioniastateedu 2013) Some cash
flow budgets are constructed so that we can monitor the accuracy of our projections
These budgets allow us to make monthly cash flow projections for the coming year
and also enter actual inflows and outflows as we progress through the year This
will allow us to compare your projections to your actual cash flows and make
adjustments to the projections for the remainder of the year
Figure 28 Example of
Cash Flow Source
Gitman ampZitter 2012
Even though cash flow and profitability are closely related they are different
42
A cash flow statement lists cash inflows and cash outflows while the income
statement lists income and expenses A cash flow statement shows liquidity while an
income statement shows profitability
294 PAYBACK PERIOD
Payback periods are commonly used to evaluate proposed investments The
payback period is the amount of time required for the firm to recover its initial
investment in a project as calculated from cash inflows The payback period can be
found by dividing the initial investment by the annual cash inflow When the
payback period is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the following decision
criteria apply
If the payback period is less than the maximum acceptable payback
period accept the project
If the payback period is greater than the maximum acceptable payback
period reject the project
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 393) the length of the maximum
acceptable payback period is determined by management This value is set
subjectively on the basis of a number of factors including the type of project
(expansion replacement or renewal other) the perceived risk of the project and the
perceived relationship between the payback period and the share value It is simply a
value that management feels on average will result in value-creating investment
decisions
43
By measuring how quickly the firm recovers its initial investment the
payback period also gives implicit consideration to the timing of cash flows and
therefore to the time value of money Because it can be viewed as a measure of
risk exposure many firms use the payback period as a decision criterion or as a
supplement to other decision techniques The longer the firm must wait to recover
its invested funds the greater the possibility of a calamity Hence the shorter the
payback period the lower the firmrsquos risk exposure A second weakness is that this
approach fails to take fully into account the time factor in the value of money A
third weakness of payback is its failure to recognize cash flows that occur after the
payback period (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 394-396)
Figure 29 Calculation of
Payback Period Source
Gitman amp Zitter 2012
44
295 NET PRESENT VALUE (NPV)
The method used by most large companies to evaluate investment projects is
called net present value (NPV) The intuition behind the NPV method is simple
When firms make investments they are spending money that they obtained in one
form or another from investors Investors expect a return on the money that they give
to firms so a firm should undertake an investment only if the present value of the
cash flow that the investment generates is greater than the cost of making the
investment in the first place
Because the NPV method takes into account the time value of investorsrsquo
money it is a more sophisticated capital budgeting technique than the payback rule
The NPV method discounts the firmrsquos cash flows at the firmrsquos cost of capital This
rate is the minimum return that must be earned on a project to satisfy the firmrsquos
investors Projects with lower returns fail to meet investorsrsquo expectations and
therefore decrease firm value and projects with higher returns increase firm
value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
The net present value (NPV) is found by subtracting a projectrsquos initial
investment (CF0) from the present value of its cash inflows (CFt) discounted at a
rate equal to the firmrsquos cost of capital (r) as shown below
NPV = Present value of cash inflows - Initial investment
When NPV is used both inflows and outflows are measured in terms of
45
present dollars For a project that has cash outflows beyond the initial investment the
net present value of a project would be found by subtracting the present value of
outflows from the present value of inflows When NPV is used to make accept reject
decisions the decision criteria are as follows
If the NPV is greater than $0 accept the project
If the NPV is less than $0 reject the project
If the NPV is greater than $0 the firm will earn a return greater than its cost of
capital Such action should increase the market value of the firm and therefore the
wealth of its owners by an amount equal to the NPV (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
296 INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN (IRR)
The internal rate of return (IRR) is one of the most widely used capital
budgeting techniques The internal rate of return (IRR) is the discount rate that
equates the NPV of an investment opportunity with $0 (because the present value of
cash inflows equals the initial investment) It is the rate of return that the firm will
earn if it invests in the project and receives the given cash inflows (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 401)
When IRR is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the decision criteria are as
follows
If the IRR is greater than the cost of capital accept the project
46
If the IRR is less than the cost of capital reject the project
To calculate IRR Most financial calculators have a pre-programmed IRR
function that can be used to simplify the IRR calculation With these calculators you
merely punch in all cash flows just as if to calculate NPV and then depress IRR to
find the internal rate of return Computer software including spreadsheets is also
available for simplifying these calculations All NPV and IRR values presented in
this and subsequent chapters are obtained by using these functions on a popular
financial calculator (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 402)
297 COST OF GOOD SOLD (COGS)
Cost of goods sold is the direct costs attributable to the production of the
goods sold by a company This amount includes the cost of the materials used in
creating the good along with the direct labor costs used to produce the good It
excludes indirect expenses such as distribution costs and sales force costs
COGS is the costs that go into creating the products that a company sells
therefore the only costs included in the measure are those that are directly tied to the
production of the products For example the COGS for an automaker would include
the material costs for the parts that go into making the car along with the labor costs
used to put the car together The cost of sending the cars to dealerships and the cost of
the labor used to sell the car would be excluded
The exact costs included in the COGS calculation will differ from one type
of business to another The cost of goods attributed to a companys products are
47
expensed as the company sells these goods In summary for manufacturers COGS is
the cost of buying raw materials and manufacturing finished products For retailers
itrsquos the cost of obtaining or buying the products sold to customers If the company is
in a service industry COGS is the cost of the service it offers
48
49
50
17
Limitations
Cannot generalize to the general population
Challenges in applying statistical methods
Difficulty in assessing relations between characteristics
212 QUANTITATIVE APPROACH
The quantitative approach to gathering information focuses on describing a
phenomenon across a larger number of participants thereby providing the possibility
of summarizing characteristics across groups or relationships This approach surveys
a large number of individuals and applies statistical techniques to recognize overall
patterns in the relations of processes
Benefits of the quantitative approach
Using survey methods across a large group of individuals enables generalization For
example if policy makers wanted to instantiate a policy about mentor training they
would likely require some evidence that this training actually works Interviewing a
few individuals or conducting a focus group with forty matches might be reflective
of specific cases in which the mentoring training worked however it would not
provide strong evidence that such training is beneficial overall Stronger support for
successful training would be evident if using quantitative methods
Enables gathering information from a relatively large number of participant
18
Can conduct in a number of groups allowing for comparison
Allows generalizing to broader population
Provides numerical or rating information
Informative for instantiating policy or guidelines
Lends to statistical techniques that allow determining relations between variables
(think of better word)
Limitations
Difficulty in recognizing new and untouched phenomena
Caution in interpretation without a control group
In summary the qualitative and quantitative approaches to research allow a different
perspective of situations or phenomena These two main approaches to research are
highly informative especially if used in combination Each approach has its benefits
and detriments and being aware of the methods used to gather information can help
practitioners and policy-makers understand the extent to which research findings can
be applied
22 FOOD HYGIENE THEORY
Good food hygiene is all about controlling harmful bacteria which can cause
serious illness The four main important aspects to remember for good hygiene are
Cross-contamination Cross-contamination is when bacteria are spread between food
surfaces or equipment It is most likely to happen when raw food touches (or drips
19
onto) ready-to-eat food equipment or surfaces To avoid cross- contamination try to
do the following use different equipment (including chopping boards and knives) for
raw meatpoultry and ready-to-eat food and make sure to wash your hands before
preparing food
Cleaning Effective cleaning gets rid of bacteria on hands equipment and surfaces
So it helps to stop harmful bacteria from spreading onto food
Chilling Chilling food properly helps to stop harmful bacteria from growing Some
food needs to be kept chilled to keep it safe for example food with a lsquouse byrsquo date
cooked dishes and other ready-to-eat food such as prepared salads and desserts It is
very important not to leave these types of food standing around at room temperature
Cooking Through cooking kills harmful bacteria in food So it is extremely
important to make sure that food is cooked properly When cooking or reheating
food always check that it is steaming hot all the way through
23 NUTRITION THEORY
The term is derived from the Arabic nutritional ldquogizardquo which means food
substances in English is well known as nutrition which means the material foods or
nutrients or often defined as the science of nutrition Other definition nutrient is
defined as a process that organisms use normally consumed food through the
digestive process absorption transport storage metabolism and spending substance
nutrition to sustain life growth and normal function organs as well as to generate
power (Irianto 2006 2)
20
231 UNDERSTANDING NUTRITION PARENTING
Manage the Nutrition in additional food for baby itrsquos for sustain the growth
and development of the physical and biological toddlers appropriately and impartial
(EvelineampNanang D 2010 11)
Figure 21 Kerangka TeoriSource Depkes RI 2007
According to (LIPI 2000123) a key aspect of nutrition parenting
a Care and protection from the mother to her baby
b The practice of breastfeeding and complementary feeding administration
c Parenting psychosocial
d Preparation of food
21
e Personal hygiene and environmental sanitation
Nutritional problems one of which is influenced by the mother to their baby
do not get enough information and ability to provide parenting from the mothers or
families will result in the incidence of malnutrition in their baby
232 THE PURPOSE OF SUPPLEMENTARY FEEDING
The purpose of supplementary feeding for baby more than 6 months of age is
to increase the energy and nutrients necessary that canrsquot provide from ASI because
the growing of the baby and with increasing the ages and weight Disorders on the
growth and development of normal children can happen when the energy and nutrient
needs of infants not fulfilled It can be caused by the food of the baby only ASI or the
additional food less qualified for the babys (Waryana 2010 p85)
Indonesia Government also issued a decision from Ministry of Health
represent the code etics form WHO In the decision ministry of health included
giving the ASI exclusive for the babys (permenkes nomer 450MenkesSKIV2004)
Also describe food for babys beside ASI (MP-ASI) in the regulation number
2371997 In this regulation the mean of food for babys beside ASI itrsquos not replacing
the ASI from the mother but the food beside the ASIrdquo said Rachmi Untoro Directors
of Social Nutritions Ministry of Health (httpdepkesstatus-gizigoid)
22
24 BUSINESS MODEL (NINE BUILDING BLOCKS)
The aim for this business model is to give visualization about how the
business wills works The idea it is included the purpose of the business operational
process and the business strategy therefore the model will give a specific concept to
be succeed in the future
Figure 22 Nine Building Blocks
Source Osterwalder amp Pigneur 2010
The canvas business model contain of nine important points it is define as nine
building blocks This model management strategic tools that could be develop for
new business or existing business The nine building blocks is cover as the following
23
1 Customer segments Target of the customers that define as a group of people
to reach and served
2 Value propositions It is the product and service that being offered to the
customer
3 Channels Defines how the business able to communicate and reach the
customer segment
4 Customer relationship Describes how to maintain the relationship between
the company and customers
5 Revenue streams Represent the cash that the company generate from the
customers
6 Key resources the assets and important source that the business need to
required thus the business will works
7 Key activities It s describe what the company activity do to run the business
8 Key partnership it is explains relationship networking between the suppliers
and partners that can support the company
9 Cost structure Expenses that the company must take in order to
manufacturing the product
Before going further into the innovation first a business need to create the
business model idea This is important to generate the idea of business and make into
a successful one (Osterwalder amp Pigneur 2010136)
24
25 PORTER FIVE FORCES MODEL
To analyze the structure of the business Five Forces Model is one of the
suggested frameworks to define the industry advantage and competitive advantage
with industry structure as the key to determinant it (Grimm Curtis M et al 200651)
Figure 23 Five Forces Model
Source Grimm Curtis Met al 2006
1 Threat new entrant
There are several factors that affect the threat of the new entry as the
following
a Entry barriers This is the ability of the product to enter the market If
the entry barriers are high it means the threat of the new entrant are
low and if the entry barriers are low the threat of new entrant are high
25
b Customer demand When the customer demand of product and service
are high threat of the possibility of new entrant is high since the
industry not be able to handle
c Product or service differentiation If the product can make
differentiation with new innovation then the threat is high
2 Threat of substitute products or service
The threat of substitute increased if there is competitor that can offer
better competitive price to the market
3 Bargaining power of customer
There are several factors that affect the bargaining power of customer as
the following
a Reputation When the product or service has a good reputation the
bargaining power of supplier will be low since the customer will have
no choice to select other product
b Switching cost High switching cost means the customer not easy to
switch to other competitor
c Quality of product and service Customers will buy the better quality
of the product even though the price is the same
d The number of the other industry competitor If the numbers of the
competitor are low the bargaining power of the customer also low
When the numbers of the competitors are high then the bargaining
power of the customer will be high
26
e Dependency to the product or service The bargaining power of the
customer will be low if a product have the ability to create a
dependency to the customer
4 Bargaining power of suppliers
There are some factors that affect the bargaining power of suppliers as the
following
a The number of supplier If the number of the supplier of the industry
are low then the bargaining power of the supplier are high and if the
number of the supplier are high then the bargaining power of supplier
are low
b Switching cost High switching cost in the product and service then it
is hard to change to another supplier
c Quality of the product serviceIt is very common to switch to another
supplier once the quality of product and service are low on the other
hand if the quality of the product and service are high there is not a n
option to change to other supplier
d Product or service availability The bargaining power of supplier will
be low if the availability of the product is high
e Image of the supplier If the supplier has a great image and status in
the industry then it will follow by the higher bargaining power
5 Intensity of competitive rivalry
Intensity of the industry will be high when there is other service and
products operate that involve many players which can be dominant or similar
27
26 SWOT ANALYSIS
A Way to monitoring the external and internal marketing environment is by using
SWOT analysis (Kotler Keller 2012 70) In their book Osterwalder and Pigneur
(2010 224) mentioned that a SWOT analysis in the business model yields two
results
1 Provides a snapshot of where is our business are (strength and weakness as
internal environment)
2 Suggest some future trajectories (opportunities and threats as external
environment)
SWOT analysis is such an important part in the process of designing business model
prototypes
A business unit must monitor key macro environment forces and significant
micro environment factors that affect is ability to earn profits An opportunity is the
are of buyer need an interest that a company has a high probability of profitability
satisfying Meanwhile a threat is a challenge posed by an unfavorable trend or
development that in the absence of defensive marketing action would led to lower
sales or profit (Kotler Keller 2012 71)
Meanwhile as an evaluation the business itself has to looking to its strength
and weaknesses By looking on these points the business could consider whether it
should limit itself to those opportunities for which it possesses the required strength
or consider those that might require it to find or develop new strength
28
261 TOWS MATRIX
Based on the journal from Heinz Weihrich (1982) Tows Matrix is a variant of
the classic business tool SWOT Analysis TOWS and SWOT are acronyms for
different arrangements of the words Strengths Weaknesses Opportunities and
Threats
Here are four basic strategies depending on the prevalence of the analyzed
group of factors (positive or negative) in the environment and within the company
SO situation - maxi-maxi strategy This situation applies to the company for
which dominates strengths in the environment and opportunities within This
situation corresponds to the maxi-maxi strategy strong expansion and
diversified development
WO situation - mini-maxi strategy In this situation company has the more
vulnerabilities - weaknesses but its environment gives more opportunities
The strategy should include the use of these opportunities while reducing or
correcting weaknesses within the organization
ST situation - maxi-mini strategy The source of development difficulties for
the company are unfavorable external conditions (prevalence of threats) The
company may use large internal strengths in attempt to overcome threats from
environment
WT situation - mini-mini strategy The company in this case is devoid of any
development opportunities It operates in hostile environments and its
29
potential for change is small It does not have significant strengths which
could withstand threats Mini-mini strategy boils down to a pessimistic
version of the liquidation or in optimistic situation - to strive for survival or
merger with another organization
Figure 24 TOWS Matrix Source Weihrich (1982)
27 MARKETING THEORY
The American Marketing Association define marketing as the activity set of
institutions and process for creating communication delivering and exchanging
offerings that have value for customers clients partners and society at large (Kotler
Keller 2012 27) Peter Drucker a leading management theorist said that the aim of
marketing is to make selling superfluous Successful marketing need and
30
understanding creating delivering capturing and sustaining customer value The
marketing plan is the central instrument for directing and coordinating the marketing
effort
271 Marketing Management
Based on (Kotler amp Amstrong 2010) the marketing management is analysis
planning implementation and programs control that made for created developed
and maintenance the transaction for gain the benefit based on the company purposed
Company management consist of demand that relationship with the customers
272 Segmenting Targeting Positioning
Based on (Kotler 2001) there are many consumers with differential needs so
the company must share the market choose good segmentation and also made some
appropriate strategy to gain a big benefit than other competitors Those strategies
process consist of there point which are
1 Market Segmentation
Segmentation is the share consumer activity into a more homogenous group m
hopes of a response is obtained such as buy wear accept and believe On the
practice segmentation market is the process share market into group
consumer based on their needs characteristic behavior and differentiation
mix market (Kasali 203) Based on (Kotler 2003) there are 3 main
segmentations of variable which are
31
a Geographic segmentation
Dividing market into different geographical units such as nations
states regions countries cities and neighborhoods
b Demographic segmentation
Dividing market into groups based on demographic variables such as
age gender family size family life cycle income occupation
education religion race and nationality
c Psychographic segmentation
Dividing a market into different groups based on social class lifestyle
or personality characteristic
Based on (Kotler 2003) that the market segment can drive so the
segment of the market must have 5 characteristics which are
Measurable size of the segment purchasing power of the
segment we want to reach and the last one is characteristic of
the segment can be measurable
Substantial a segment becomes the unity of homogeny group
that have a power to gain benefit if the program and marketing
drive by these groups
Accessible the segment that must be reach and served
effectively
32
Differentiable that the segments can be separate by conceptual
and respond differently to the program and the different
elements of the marketing mix
Actionable the program have made effectively that must be
implemented to attract and serve the segments
2 Market Targeting
These methods purpose to establish target market evaluation process begins
with the attractiveness of each market segment and has one or more segments
most benefit to be entered Based on (Kotler 2003) these are 5 patterns that
we can used to enter the market which are
a Single segment concentration
Concentrate with one segment the company get the knowledge
about what the market needs that to be the reach target market
and get a strong minded of consumers in that segment This
pattern have a high risk if there are saturation occurs in this
segment the company faces the risk of losing the entire market
b Selective specialization
On this pattern the company can choose the segment market
that where segment must gain the benefit The advantage of
this pattern are the ability of the company to reduce the risk
lower
c Product specialization
33
This pattern showed the company produced the goods which
will be sold in some segments
d Market specialization
The market showed that company produced the goods and sell
to the one segment the advantages if this pattern the company
have a high reputation from the consumer that segment market
have been entered
e Full market coverage
On this pattern the company try to reach whole market with
produced what consumer needs with the differential product to
gain the whole market the entered
3 Market Positioning
Market positioning is the activity of the company to place their product on the
market so their product get a clear position distinguishable as well as more
expected than competing production the minds of the target consumers that
will provide huge benefits in the target market
Based on (Kotler 2003) the company must avoid the four main errors in
placing market position which are
a Under positioning
It is mean the placement too low that causing superficial
picture of the product so consumer have a low response to the
product
b Over positioning
34
The placement is too high so it can cause the false perception
from consumers on the price of the product so consumers are
reluctant to buy because they think price is too high
c Confused positioning
Confusing placement of the product because the company too
often change their market position
d Doubtful positioning
Dubious product placement the effect of this position the
consumers distrust of the product
273 Marketing Mix
Based on (Kotler ampAmstrong 2010) marketing mix is a unity of the tools of
marketing that the tactical as well as directed and used by the company to produce the
desired response target market Marketing mix is a modern marketing theory
Marketing mix defined as the set of marketing tools that the form use to pursue its
marketing objective in the target market (Kotler 1994 98) Based on the Journal
Marketing by Chai Lee Goi Marketing mix is not scientific theory but a conceptual
framework that identifies the principal decision making manager make in configuring
their offerings to suit consumersrsquo needs (Lee Chai Goi 2009 1) To gain the benefit
for the company marketing mix is the weapon that company usually used to get the
change on the market That changed was grouped by four strategies named ldquo4Psrdquo
that consist of product price place and promotion
35
Product
Product is goods or services that company offered to the market
Price
Price is the several money that consumer must pay to buy a product
Place
Place (distribution) not only represent that the product can achieve or known
but also activity that company do for the product the produced easy to get at
the market and consumers
Promotion
Is the activity that company do to communicate their product and get the
consumer to reach their product Consist of advertising events sponsorship
and other activity are summarized in the Integrated Marketing
Communication (IMC)
Booms and Bitner is suggested 3 other elements beides the traditional 4Prsquos by
Kotler for service business which are (wwwlenamarketingnet 2013)
Physical Evidence
Is about where the service is being delivered from This element will
differentiate the company with other
Process
This element of the marketing mix looks at the used to deliver the service
36
People
People are essential ingredients in service provision recruiting and training
the right staff is required to create a competitive advantage
28 OPERATIONAL MANAGEMENT 281 THE SERVICE DESIGN PROCESS Service design is more comprehensive and occurs more often than product
design The inherent variability of service processes requires that the service system
be carefully designed The service concept defines the target customer and the desired
customer experience The service design process must be different and unique from
others to make the product selling point It also defines how onersquos service is
different from others and how it will compete in the marketplace Sometimes
services are successful because their service concept fills a previously unoccupied
niche or differs from the generally accepted mode of operation (Rusell amp Taylor
2011 193)
37
Figure 25 The Service Design Process Source Rusell amp Taylor2011
From the service concept a service package is created to meet customer
needs The package consists of a mixture of physical items sensual
benefits and psychological benefits Effective service design recognizes and
defines all the components of a service package Finding the appropriate mix of
physical items and sensual and psychological benefits and designing them to be
consistent with each other and the service concept is also important (Rusell amp
Taylor 2011 194) From the service package service specifications are developed
for performance design and delivery Performance specifications outline
expectations and requirements for general and specific customers
Performance specifications are converted into design specifications and finally
delivery specifications Design specifications must describe the service in
sufficient detail for the desired service experience to be replicated for different
individuals at numerous locations The specifications typically consist of
38
activities to be performed skill requirements and guidelines for service
providers and cost and time estimates Facility size location and layoutas well
as equipment needs are also included
29 FINANCIAL THEORY 291 BALANCE SHEET
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 62) The balance sheet presents a
summary statement of the firmrsquos financial position at a given time The statement
balances the firmrsquos assets (what it owns) against its financing which can be either
debt (what it owes) or equity (what was provided by owners) Below is the example
of balance sheet from Bartlettrsquos Company
Figure 26 Bartlett Company Balance Sheets Source Gitman amp Zitter 2012
39
The assets are listed from the most liquid (cash) ndash down to the least liquid
Marketable securities are very liquid short-term investments held by the firm
Because they are highly liquid marketable securities are viewed as a form of cash
(ldquonear cashrdquo) Accounts receivable represent the total monies owed the firm by its
customers on credit sales Inventories include raw materials work in process
(partially finished goods) and finished goods held by the firm The entry for gross
fixed assets is the original cost of all fixed (long-term) assets owned by the firm Net
fixed assets represent the difference between gross fixed assets and accumulated
depreciation ndash the total expense recorded for the depreciation of fixed assets The net
value of fixed assets is called their book value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
The liabilities and equity accounts are listed from short-term to long-
term Current liabilities include accounts payable amounts owed for credit
purchases by the firm notes payable outstanding short-term loans typically
from commercial banks and accruals amounts owed for services for which a bill
may not or will not be received Examples of accruals include taxes due the
government and wages due employees Long-term debt represents debt for which
payment is not due in the current year Stockholdersrsquo equity represents the
ownersrsquo claims on the firm The preferred stock entry shows the historical
proceeds from the sale of preferred stock(Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
40
292 INCOME STATEMENT
The income statement provides a financial summary of the firmrsquos operating
results during a specified period Most common are income statements covering a 1-
year period ending at a specified date ordinarily December 31 of the calendar year
Many large firms however operate on a 12-month financial cycle or fiscal year that
ends at a time other than December 31 In addition monthly income statements are
typically prepared for use by management and quarterly statements must be made
available to the stockholders of publicly owned corporations (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 59-60) The example of income statement is shown below
Figure 27 Bartlett Company Income
Statement Source GitmanampZitter2012
293 CASH FLOW ANALYSIS
A cash flow statement is one of the most important financial statements for a
project or business The statement can be as simple as a one page analysis or may
41
involve several schedules that feed information into a central statement A cash flow
statement is a listing of the flows of cash into and out of the business or project
Many cash flows are constructed with multiple time periods
For example it may list monthly cash inflows and outflows over a yearrsquos time
It not only projects the cash balance remaining at the end of the year but also
the cash balance for each month (wwwextensioniastateedu 2013) Some cash
flow budgets are constructed so that we can monitor the accuracy of our projections
These budgets allow us to make monthly cash flow projections for the coming year
and also enter actual inflows and outflows as we progress through the year This
will allow us to compare your projections to your actual cash flows and make
adjustments to the projections for the remainder of the year
Figure 28 Example of
Cash Flow Source
Gitman ampZitter 2012
Even though cash flow and profitability are closely related they are different
42
A cash flow statement lists cash inflows and cash outflows while the income
statement lists income and expenses A cash flow statement shows liquidity while an
income statement shows profitability
294 PAYBACK PERIOD
Payback periods are commonly used to evaluate proposed investments The
payback period is the amount of time required for the firm to recover its initial
investment in a project as calculated from cash inflows The payback period can be
found by dividing the initial investment by the annual cash inflow When the
payback period is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the following decision
criteria apply
If the payback period is less than the maximum acceptable payback
period accept the project
If the payback period is greater than the maximum acceptable payback
period reject the project
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 393) the length of the maximum
acceptable payback period is determined by management This value is set
subjectively on the basis of a number of factors including the type of project
(expansion replacement or renewal other) the perceived risk of the project and the
perceived relationship between the payback period and the share value It is simply a
value that management feels on average will result in value-creating investment
decisions
43
By measuring how quickly the firm recovers its initial investment the
payback period also gives implicit consideration to the timing of cash flows and
therefore to the time value of money Because it can be viewed as a measure of
risk exposure many firms use the payback period as a decision criterion or as a
supplement to other decision techniques The longer the firm must wait to recover
its invested funds the greater the possibility of a calamity Hence the shorter the
payback period the lower the firmrsquos risk exposure A second weakness is that this
approach fails to take fully into account the time factor in the value of money A
third weakness of payback is its failure to recognize cash flows that occur after the
payback period (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 394-396)
Figure 29 Calculation of
Payback Period Source
Gitman amp Zitter 2012
44
295 NET PRESENT VALUE (NPV)
The method used by most large companies to evaluate investment projects is
called net present value (NPV) The intuition behind the NPV method is simple
When firms make investments they are spending money that they obtained in one
form or another from investors Investors expect a return on the money that they give
to firms so a firm should undertake an investment only if the present value of the
cash flow that the investment generates is greater than the cost of making the
investment in the first place
Because the NPV method takes into account the time value of investorsrsquo
money it is a more sophisticated capital budgeting technique than the payback rule
The NPV method discounts the firmrsquos cash flows at the firmrsquos cost of capital This
rate is the minimum return that must be earned on a project to satisfy the firmrsquos
investors Projects with lower returns fail to meet investorsrsquo expectations and
therefore decrease firm value and projects with higher returns increase firm
value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
The net present value (NPV) is found by subtracting a projectrsquos initial
investment (CF0) from the present value of its cash inflows (CFt) discounted at a
rate equal to the firmrsquos cost of capital (r) as shown below
NPV = Present value of cash inflows - Initial investment
When NPV is used both inflows and outflows are measured in terms of
45
present dollars For a project that has cash outflows beyond the initial investment the
net present value of a project would be found by subtracting the present value of
outflows from the present value of inflows When NPV is used to make accept reject
decisions the decision criteria are as follows
If the NPV is greater than $0 accept the project
If the NPV is less than $0 reject the project
If the NPV is greater than $0 the firm will earn a return greater than its cost of
capital Such action should increase the market value of the firm and therefore the
wealth of its owners by an amount equal to the NPV (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
296 INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN (IRR)
The internal rate of return (IRR) is one of the most widely used capital
budgeting techniques The internal rate of return (IRR) is the discount rate that
equates the NPV of an investment opportunity with $0 (because the present value of
cash inflows equals the initial investment) It is the rate of return that the firm will
earn if it invests in the project and receives the given cash inflows (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 401)
When IRR is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the decision criteria are as
follows
If the IRR is greater than the cost of capital accept the project
46
If the IRR is less than the cost of capital reject the project
To calculate IRR Most financial calculators have a pre-programmed IRR
function that can be used to simplify the IRR calculation With these calculators you
merely punch in all cash flows just as if to calculate NPV and then depress IRR to
find the internal rate of return Computer software including spreadsheets is also
available for simplifying these calculations All NPV and IRR values presented in
this and subsequent chapters are obtained by using these functions on a popular
financial calculator (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 402)
297 COST OF GOOD SOLD (COGS)
Cost of goods sold is the direct costs attributable to the production of the
goods sold by a company This amount includes the cost of the materials used in
creating the good along with the direct labor costs used to produce the good It
excludes indirect expenses such as distribution costs and sales force costs
COGS is the costs that go into creating the products that a company sells
therefore the only costs included in the measure are those that are directly tied to the
production of the products For example the COGS for an automaker would include
the material costs for the parts that go into making the car along with the labor costs
used to put the car together The cost of sending the cars to dealerships and the cost of
the labor used to sell the car would be excluded
The exact costs included in the COGS calculation will differ from one type
of business to another The cost of goods attributed to a companys products are
47
expensed as the company sells these goods In summary for manufacturers COGS is
the cost of buying raw materials and manufacturing finished products For retailers
itrsquos the cost of obtaining or buying the products sold to customers If the company is
in a service industry COGS is the cost of the service it offers
48
49
50
18
Can conduct in a number of groups allowing for comparison
Allows generalizing to broader population
Provides numerical or rating information
Informative for instantiating policy or guidelines
Lends to statistical techniques that allow determining relations between variables
(think of better word)
Limitations
Difficulty in recognizing new and untouched phenomena
Caution in interpretation without a control group
In summary the qualitative and quantitative approaches to research allow a different
perspective of situations or phenomena These two main approaches to research are
highly informative especially if used in combination Each approach has its benefits
and detriments and being aware of the methods used to gather information can help
practitioners and policy-makers understand the extent to which research findings can
be applied
22 FOOD HYGIENE THEORY
Good food hygiene is all about controlling harmful bacteria which can cause
serious illness The four main important aspects to remember for good hygiene are
Cross-contamination Cross-contamination is when bacteria are spread between food
surfaces or equipment It is most likely to happen when raw food touches (or drips
19
onto) ready-to-eat food equipment or surfaces To avoid cross- contamination try to
do the following use different equipment (including chopping boards and knives) for
raw meatpoultry and ready-to-eat food and make sure to wash your hands before
preparing food
Cleaning Effective cleaning gets rid of bacteria on hands equipment and surfaces
So it helps to stop harmful bacteria from spreading onto food
Chilling Chilling food properly helps to stop harmful bacteria from growing Some
food needs to be kept chilled to keep it safe for example food with a lsquouse byrsquo date
cooked dishes and other ready-to-eat food such as prepared salads and desserts It is
very important not to leave these types of food standing around at room temperature
Cooking Through cooking kills harmful bacteria in food So it is extremely
important to make sure that food is cooked properly When cooking or reheating
food always check that it is steaming hot all the way through
23 NUTRITION THEORY
The term is derived from the Arabic nutritional ldquogizardquo which means food
substances in English is well known as nutrition which means the material foods or
nutrients or often defined as the science of nutrition Other definition nutrient is
defined as a process that organisms use normally consumed food through the
digestive process absorption transport storage metabolism and spending substance
nutrition to sustain life growth and normal function organs as well as to generate
power (Irianto 2006 2)
20
231 UNDERSTANDING NUTRITION PARENTING
Manage the Nutrition in additional food for baby itrsquos for sustain the growth
and development of the physical and biological toddlers appropriately and impartial
(EvelineampNanang D 2010 11)
Figure 21 Kerangka TeoriSource Depkes RI 2007
According to (LIPI 2000123) a key aspect of nutrition parenting
a Care and protection from the mother to her baby
b The practice of breastfeeding and complementary feeding administration
c Parenting psychosocial
d Preparation of food
21
e Personal hygiene and environmental sanitation
Nutritional problems one of which is influenced by the mother to their baby
do not get enough information and ability to provide parenting from the mothers or
families will result in the incidence of malnutrition in their baby
232 THE PURPOSE OF SUPPLEMENTARY FEEDING
The purpose of supplementary feeding for baby more than 6 months of age is
to increase the energy and nutrients necessary that canrsquot provide from ASI because
the growing of the baby and with increasing the ages and weight Disorders on the
growth and development of normal children can happen when the energy and nutrient
needs of infants not fulfilled It can be caused by the food of the baby only ASI or the
additional food less qualified for the babys (Waryana 2010 p85)
Indonesia Government also issued a decision from Ministry of Health
represent the code etics form WHO In the decision ministry of health included
giving the ASI exclusive for the babys (permenkes nomer 450MenkesSKIV2004)
Also describe food for babys beside ASI (MP-ASI) in the regulation number
2371997 In this regulation the mean of food for babys beside ASI itrsquos not replacing
the ASI from the mother but the food beside the ASIrdquo said Rachmi Untoro Directors
of Social Nutritions Ministry of Health (httpdepkesstatus-gizigoid)
22
24 BUSINESS MODEL (NINE BUILDING BLOCKS)
The aim for this business model is to give visualization about how the
business wills works The idea it is included the purpose of the business operational
process and the business strategy therefore the model will give a specific concept to
be succeed in the future
Figure 22 Nine Building Blocks
Source Osterwalder amp Pigneur 2010
The canvas business model contain of nine important points it is define as nine
building blocks This model management strategic tools that could be develop for
new business or existing business The nine building blocks is cover as the following
23
1 Customer segments Target of the customers that define as a group of people
to reach and served
2 Value propositions It is the product and service that being offered to the
customer
3 Channels Defines how the business able to communicate and reach the
customer segment
4 Customer relationship Describes how to maintain the relationship between
the company and customers
5 Revenue streams Represent the cash that the company generate from the
customers
6 Key resources the assets and important source that the business need to
required thus the business will works
7 Key activities It s describe what the company activity do to run the business
8 Key partnership it is explains relationship networking between the suppliers
and partners that can support the company
9 Cost structure Expenses that the company must take in order to
manufacturing the product
Before going further into the innovation first a business need to create the
business model idea This is important to generate the idea of business and make into
a successful one (Osterwalder amp Pigneur 2010136)
24
25 PORTER FIVE FORCES MODEL
To analyze the structure of the business Five Forces Model is one of the
suggested frameworks to define the industry advantage and competitive advantage
with industry structure as the key to determinant it (Grimm Curtis M et al 200651)
Figure 23 Five Forces Model
Source Grimm Curtis Met al 2006
1 Threat new entrant
There are several factors that affect the threat of the new entry as the
following
a Entry barriers This is the ability of the product to enter the market If
the entry barriers are high it means the threat of the new entrant are
low and if the entry barriers are low the threat of new entrant are high
25
b Customer demand When the customer demand of product and service
are high threat of the possibility of new entrant is high since the
industry not be able to handle
c Product or service differentiation If the product can make
differentiation with new innovation then the threat is high
2 Threat of substitute products or service
The threat of substitute increased if there is competitor that can offer
better competitive price to the market
3 Bargaining power of customer
There are several factors that affect the bargaining power of customer as
the following
a Reputation When the product or service has a good reputation the
bargaining power of supplier will be low since the customer will have
no choice to select other product
b Switching cost High switching cost means the customer not easy to
switch to other competitor
c Quality of product and service Customers will buy the better quality
of the product even though the price is the same
d The number of the other industry competitor If the numbers of the
competitor are low the bargaining power of the customer also low
When the numbers of the competitors are high then the bargaining
power of the customer will be high
26
e Dependency to the product or service The bargaining power of the
customer will be low if a product have the ability to create a
dependency to the customer
4 Bargaining power of suppliers
There are some factors that affect the bargaining power of suppliers as the
following
a The number of supplier If the number of the supplier of the industry
are low then the bargaining power of the supplier are high and if the
number of the supplier are high then the bargaining power of supplier
are low
b Switching cost High switching cost in the product and service then it
is hard to change to another supplier
c Quality of the product serviceIt is very common to switch to another
supplier once the quality of product and service are low on the other
hand if the quality of the product and service are high there is not a n
option to change to other supplier
d Product or service availability The bargaining power of supplier will
be low if the availability of the product is high
e Image of the supplier If the supplier has a great image and status in
the industry then it will follow by the higher bargaining power
5 Intensity of competitive rivalry
Intensity of the industry will be high when there is other service and
products operate that involve many players which can be dominant or similar
27
26 SWOT ANALYSIS
A Way to monitoring the external and internal marketing environment is by using
SWOT analysis (Kotler Keller 2012 70) In their book Osterwalder and Pigneur
(2010 224) mentioned that a SWOT analysis in the business model yields two
results
1 Provides a snapshot of where is our business are (strength and weakness as
internal environment)
2 Suggest some future trajectories (opportunities and threats as external
environment)
SWOT analysis is such an important part in the process of designing business model
prototypes
A business unit must monitor key macro environment forces and significant
micro environment factors that affect is ability to earn profits An opportunity is the
are of buyer need an interest that a company has a high probability of profitability
satisfying Meanwhile a threat is a challenge posed by an unfavorable trend or
development that in the absence of defensive marketing action would led to lower
sales or profit (Kotler Keller 2012 71)
Meanwhile as an evaluation the business itself has to looking to its strength
and weaknesses By looking on these points the business could consider whether it
should limit itself to those opportunities for which it possesses the required strength
or consider those that might require it to find or develop new strength
28
261 TOWS MATRIX
Based on the journal from Heinz Weihrich (1982) Tows Matrix is a variant of
the classic business tool SWOT Analysis TOWS and SWOT are acronyms for
different arrangements of the words Strengths Weaknesses Opportunities and
Threats
Here are four basic strategies depending on the prevalence of the analyzed
group of factors (positive or negative) in the environment and within the company
SO situation - maxi-maxi strategy This situation applies to the company for
which dominates strengths in the environment and opportunities within This
situation corresponds to the maxi-maxi strategy strong expansion and
diversified development
WO situation - mini-maxi strategy In this situation company has the more
vulnerabilities - weaknesses but its environment gives more opportunities
The strategy should include the use of these opportunities while reducing or
correcting weaknesses within the organization
ST situation - maxi-mini strategy The source of development difficulties for
the company are unfavorable external conditions (prevalence of threats) The
company may use large internal strengths in attempt to overcome threats from
environment
WT situation - mini-mini strategy The company in this case is devoid of any
development opportunities It operates in hostile environments and its
29
potential for change is small It does not have significant strengths which
could withstand threats Mini-mini strategy boils down to a pessimistic
version of the liquidation or in optimistic situation - to strive for survival or
merger with another organization
Figure 24 TOWS Matrix Source Weihrich (1982)
27 MARKETING THEORY
The American Marketing Association define marketing as the activity set of
institutions and process for creating communication delivering and exchanging
offerings that have value for customers clients partners and society at large (Kotler
Keller 2012 27) Peter Drucker a leading management theorist said that the aim of
marketing is to make selling superfluous Successful marketing need and
30
understanding creating delivering capturing and sustaining customer value The
marketing plan is the central instrument for directing and coordinating the marketing
effort
271 Marketing Management
Based on (Kotler amp Amstrong 2010) the marketing management is analysis
planning implementation and programs control that made for created developed
and maintenance the transaction for gain the benefit based on the company purposed
Company management consist of demand that relationship with the customers
272 Segmenting Targeting Positioning
Based on (Kotler 2001) there are many consumers with differential needs so
the company must share the market choose good segmentation and also made some
appropriate strategy to gain a big benefit than other competitors Those strategies
process consist of there point which are
1 Market Segmentation
Segmentation is the share consumer activity into a more homogenous group m
hopes of a response is obtained such as buy wear accept and believe On the
practice segmentation market is the process share market into group
consumer based on their needs characteristic behavior and differentiation
mix market (Kasali 203) Based on (Kotler 2003) there are 3 main
segmentations of variable which are
31
a Geographic segmentation
Dividing market into different geographical units such as nations
states regions countries cities and neighborhoods
b Demographic segmentation
Dividing market into groups based on demographic variables such as
age gender family size family life cycle income occupation
education religion race and nationality
c Psychographic segmentation
Dividing a market into different groups based on social class lifestyle
or personality characteristic
Based on (Kotler 2003) that the market segment can drive so the
segment of the market must have 5 characteristics which are
Measurable size of the segment purchasing power of the
segment we want to reach and the last one is characteristic of
the segment can be measurable
Substantial a segment becomes the unity of homogeny group
that have a power to gain benefit if the program and marketing
drive by these groups
Accessible the segment that must be reach and served
effectively
32
Differentiable that the segments can be separate by conceptual
and respond differently to the program and the different
elements of the marketing mix
Actionable the program have made effectively that must be
implemented to attract and serve the segments
2 Market Targeting
These methods purpose to establish target market evaluation process begins
with the attractiveness of each market segment and has one or more segments
most benefit to be entered Based on (Kotler 2003) these are 5 patterns that
we can used to enter the market which are
a Single segment concentration
Concentrate with one segment the company get the knowledge
about what the market needs that to be the reach target market
and get a strong minded of consumers in that segment This
pattern have a high risk if there are saturation occurs in this
segment the company faces the risk of losing the entire market
b Selective specialization
On this pattern the company can choose the segment market
that where segment must gain the benefit The advantage of
this pattern are the ability of the company to reduce the risk
lower
c Product specialization
33
This pattern showed the company produced the goods which
will be sold in some segments
d Market specialization
The market showed that company produced the goods and sell
to the one segment the advantages if this pattern the company
have a high reputation from the consumer that segment market
have been entered
e Full market coverage
On this pattern the company try to reach whole market with
produced what consumer needs with the differential product to
gain the whole market the entered
3 Market Positioning
Market positioning is the activity of the company to place their product on the
market so their product get a clear position distinguishable as well as more
expected than competing production the minds of the target consumers that
will provide huge benefits in the target market
Based on (Kotler 2003) the company must avoid the four main errors in
placing market position which are
a Under positioning
It is mean the placement too low that causing superficial
picture of the product so consumer have a low response to the
product
b Over positioning
34
The placement is too high so it can cause the false perception
from consumers on the price of the product so consumers are
reluctant to buy because they think price is too high
c Confused positioning
Confusing placement of the product because the company too
often change their market position
d Doubtful positioning
Dubious product placement the effect of this position the
consumers distrust of the product
273 Marketing Mix
Based on (Kotler ampAmstrong 2010) marketing mix is a unity of the tools of
marketing that the tactical as well as directed and used by the company to produce the
desired response target market Marketing mix is a modern marketing theory
Marketing mix defined as the set of marketing tools that the form use to pursue its
marketing objective in the target market (Kotler 1994 98) Based on the Journal
Marketing by Chai Lee Goi Marketing mix is not scientific theory but a conceptual
framework that identifies the principal decision making manager make in configuring
their offerings to suit consumersrsquo needs (Lee Chai Goi 2009 1) To gain the benefit
for the company marketing mix is the weapon that company usually used to get the
change on the market That changed was grouped by four strategies named ldquo4Psrdquo
that consist of product price place and promotion
35
Product
Product is goods or services that company offered to the market
Price
Price is the several money that consumer must pay to buy a product
Place
Place (distribution) not only represent that the product can achieve or known
but also activity that company do for the product the produced easy to get at
the market and consumers
Promotion
Is the activity that company do to communicate their product and get the
consumer to reach their product Consist of advertising events sponsorship
and other activity are summarized in the Integrated Marketing
Communication (IMC)
Booms and Bitner is suggested 3 other elements beides the traditional 4Prsquos by
Kotler for service business which are (wwwlenamarketingnet 2013)
Physical Evidence
Is about where the service is being delivered from This element will
differentiate the company with other
Process
This element of the marketing mix looks at the used to deliver the service
36
People
People are essential ingredients in service provision recruiting and training
the right staff is required to create a competitive advantage
28 OPERATIONAL MANAGEMENT 281 THE SERVICE DESIGN PROCESS Service design is more comprehensive and occurs more often than product
design The inherent variability of service processes requires that the service system
be carefully designed The service concept defines the target customer and the desired
customer experience The service design process must be different and unique from
others to make the product selling point It also defines how onersquos service is
different from others and how it will compete in the marketplace Sometimes
services are successful because their service concept fills a previously unoccupied
niche or differs from the generally accepted mode of operation (Rusell amp Taylor
2011 193)
37
Figure 25 The Service Design Process Source Rusell amp Taylor2011
From the service concept a service package is created to meet customer
needs The package consists of a mixture of physical items sensual
benefits and psychological benefits Effective service design recognizes and
defines all the components of a service package Finding the appropriate mix of
physical items and sensual and psychological benefits and designing them to be
consistent with each other and the service concept is also important (Rusell amp
Taylor 2011 194) From the service package service specifications are developed
for performance design and delivery Performance specifications outline
expectations and requirements for general and specific customers
Performance specifications are converted into design specifications and finally
delivery specifications Design specifications must describe the service in
sufficient detail for the desired service experience to be replicated for different
individuals at numerous locations The specifications typically consist of
38
activities to be performed skill requirements and guidelines for service
providers and cost and time estimates Facility size location and layoutas well
as equipment needs are also included
29 FINANCIAL THEORY 291 BALANCE SHEET
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 62) The balance sheet presents a
summary statement of the firmrsquos financial position at a given time The statement
balances the firmrsquos assets (what it owns) against its financing which can be either
debt (what it owes) or equity (what was provided by owners) Below is the example
of balance sheet from Bartlettrsquos Company
Figure 26 Bartlett Company Balance Sheets Source Gitman amp Zitter 2012
39
The assets are listed from the most liquid (cash) ndash down to the least liquid
Marketable securities are very liquid short-term investments held by the firm
Because they are highly liquid marketable securities are viewed as a form of cash
(ldquonear cashrdquo) Accounts receivable represent the total monies owed the firm by its
customers on credit sales Inventories include raw materials work in process
(partially finished goods) and finished goods held by the firm The entry for gross
fixed assets is the original cost of all fixed (long-term) assets owned by the firm Net
fixed assets represent the difference between gross fixed assets and accumulated
depreciation ndash the total expense recorded for the depreciation of fixed assets The net
value of fixed assets is called their book value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
The liabilities and equity accounts are listed from short-term to long-
term Current liabilities include accounts payable amounts owed for credit
purchases by the firm notes payable outstanding short-term loans typically
from commercial banks and accruals amounts owed for services for which a bill
may not or will not be received Examples of accruals include taxes due the
government and wages due employees Long-term debt represents debt for which
payment is not due in the current year Stockholdersrsquo equity represents the
ownersrsquo claims on the firm The preferred stock entry shows the historical
proceeds from the sale of preferred stock(Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
40
292 INCOME STATEMENT
The income statement provides a financial summary of the firmrsquos operating
results during a specified period Most common are income statements covering a 1-
year period ending at a specified date ordinarily December 31 of the calendar year
Many large firms however operate on a 12-month financial cycle or fiscal year that
ends at a time other than December 31 In addition monthly income statements are
typically prepared for use by management and quarterly statements must be made
available to the stockholders of publicly owned corporations (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 59-60) The example of income statement is shown below
Figure 27 Bartlett Company Income
Statement Source GitmanampZitter2012
293 CASH FLOW ANALYSIS
A cash flow statement is one of the most important financial statements for a
project or business The statement can be as simple as a one page analysis or may
41
involve several schedules that feed information into a central statement A cash flow
statement is a listing of the flows of cash into and out of the business or project
Many cash flows are constructed with multiple time periods
For example it may list monthly cash inflows and outflows over a yearrsquos time
It not only projects the cash balance remaining at the end of the year but also
the cash balance for each month (wwwextensioniastateedu 2013) Some cash
flow budgets are constructed so that we can monitor the accuracy of our projections
These budgets allow us to make monthly cash flow projections for the coming year
and also enter actual inflows and outflows as we progress through the year This
will allow us to compare your projections to your actual cash flows and make
adjustments to the projections for the remainder of the year
Figure 28 Example of
Cash Flow Source
Gitman ampZitter 2012
Even though cash flow and profitability are closely related they are different
42
A cash flow statement lists cash inflows and cash outflows while the income
statement lists income and expenses A cash flow statement shows liquidity while an
income statement shows profitability
294 PAYBACK PERIOD
Payback periods are commonly used to evaluate proposed investments The
payback period is the amount of time required for the firm to recover its initial
investment in a project as calculated from cash inflows The payback period can be
found by dividing the initial investment by the annual cash inflow When the
payback period is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the following decision
criteria apply
If the payback period is less than the maximum acceptable payback
period accept the project
If the payback period is greater than the maximum acceptable payback
period reject the project
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 393) the length of the maximum
acceptable payback period is determined by management This value is set
subjectively on the basis of a number of factors including the type of project
(expansion replacement or renewal other) the perceived risk of the project and the
perceived relationship between the payback period and the share value It is simply a
value that management feels on average will result in value-creating investment
decisions
43
By measuring how quickly the firm recovers its initial investment the
payback period also gives implicit consideration to the timing of cash flows and
therefore to the time value of money Because it can be viewed as a measure of
risk exposure many firms use the payback period as a decision criterion or as a
supplement to other decision techniques The longer the firm must wait to recover
its invested funds the greater the possibility of a calamity Hence the shorter the
payback period the lower the firmrsquos risk exposure A second weakness is that this
approach fails to take fully into account the time factor in the value of money A
third weakness of payback is its failure to recognize cash flows that occur after the
payback period (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 394-396)
Figure 29 Calculation of
Payback Period Source
Gitman amp Zitter 2012
44
295 NET PRESENT VALUE (NPV)
The method used by most large companies to evaluate investment projects is
called net present value (NPV) The intuition behind the NPV method is simple
When firms make investments they are spending money that they obtained in one
form or another from investors Investors expect a return on the money that they give
to firms so a firm should undertake an investment only if the present value of the
cash flow that the investment generates is greater than the cost of making the
investment in the first place
Because the NPV method takes into account the time value of investorsrsquo
money it is a more sophisticated capital budgeting technique than the payback rule
The NPV method discounts the firmrsquos cash flows at the firmrsquos cost of capital This
rate is the minimum return that must be earned on a project to satisfy the firmrsquos
investors Projects with lower returns fail to meet investorsrsquo expectations and
therefore decrease firm value and projects with higher returns increase firm
value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
The net present value (NPV) is found by subtracting a projectrsquos initial
investment (CF0) from the present value of its cash inflows (CFt) discounted at a
rate equal to the firmrsquos cost of capital (r) as shown below
NPV = Present value of cash inflows - Initial investment
When NPV is used both inflows and outflows are measured in terms of
45
present dollars For a project that has cash outflows beyond the initial investment the
net present value of a project would be found by subtracting the present value of
outflows from the present value of inflows When NPV is used to make accept reject
decisions the decision criteria are as follows
If the NPV is greater than $0 accept the project
If the NPV is less than $0 reject the project
If the NPV is greater than $0 the firm will earn a return greater than its cost of
capital Such action should increase the market value of the firm and therefore the
wealth of its owners by an amount equal to the NPV (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
296 INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN (IRR)
The internal rate of return (IRR) is one of the most widely used capital
budgeting techniques The internal rate of return (IRR) is the discount rate that
equates the NPV of an investment opportunity with $0 (because the present value of
cash inflows equals the initial investment) It is the rate of return that the firm will
earn if it invests in the project and receives the given cash inflows (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 401)
When IRR is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the decision criteria are as
follows
If the IRR is greater than the cost of capital accept the project
46
If the IRR is less than the cost of capital reject the project
To calculate IRR Most financial calculators have a pre-programmed IRR
function that can be used to simplify the IRR calculation With these calculators you
merely punch in all cash flows just as if to calculate NPV and then depress IRR to
find the internal rate of return Computer software including spreadsheets is also
available for simplifying these calculations All NPV and IRR values presented in
this and subsequent chapters are obtained by using these functions on a popular
financial calculator (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 402)
297 COST OF GOOD SOLD (COGS)
Cost of goods sold is the direct costs attributable to the production of the
goods sold by a company This amount includes the cost of the materials used in
creating the good along with the direct labor costs used to produce the good It
excludes indirect expenses such as distribution costs and sales force costs
COGS is the costs that go into creating the products that a company sells
therefore the only costs included in the measure are those that are directly tied to the
production of the products For example the COGS for an automaker would include
the material costs for the parts that go into making the car along with the labor costs
used to put the car together The cost of sending the cars to dealerships and the cost of
the labor used to sell the car would be excluded
The exact costs included in the COGS calculation will differ from one type
of business to another The cost of goods attributed to a companys products are
47
expensed as the company sells these goods In summary for manufacturers COGS is
the cost of buying raw materials and manufacturing finished products For retailers
itrsquos the cost of obtaining or buying the products sold to customers If the company is
in a service industry COGS is the cost of the service it offers
48
49
50
19
onto) ready-to-eat food equipment or surfaces To avoid cross- contamination try to
do the following use different equipment (including chopping boards and knives) for
raw meatpoultry and ready-to-eat food and make sure to wash your hands before
preparing food
Cleaning Effective cleaning gets rid of bacteria on hands equipment and surfaces
So it helps to stop harmful bacteria from spreading onto food
Chilling Chilling food properly helps to stop harmful bacteria from growing Some
food needs to be kept chilled to keep it safe for example food with a lsquouse byrsquo date
cooked dishes and other ready-to-eat food such as prepared salads and desserts It is
very important not to leave these types of food standing around at room temperature
Cooking Through cooking kills harmful bacteria in food So it is extremely
important to make sure that food is cooked properly When cooking or reheating
food always check that it is steaming hot all the way through
23 NUTRITION THEORY
The term is derived from the Arabic nutritional ldquogizardquo which means food
substances in English is well known as nutrition which means the material foods or
nutrients or often defined as the science of nutrition Other definition nutrient is
defined as a process that organisms use normally consumed food through the
digestive process absorption transport storage metabolism and spending substance
nutrition to sustain life growth and normal function organs as well as to generate
power (Irianto 2006 2)
20
231 UNDERSTANDING NUTRITION PARENTING
Manage the Nutrition in additional food for baby itrsquos for sustain the growth
and development of the physical and biological toddlers appropriately and impartial
(EvelineampNanang D 2010 11)
Figure 21 Kerangka TeoriSource Depkes RI 2007
According to (LIPI 2000123) a key aspect of nutrition parenting
a Care and protection from the mother to her baby
b The practice of breastfeeding and complementary feeding administration
c Parenting psychosocial
d Preparation of food
21
e Personal hygiene and environmental sanitation
Nutritional problems one of which is influenced by the mother to their baby
do not get enough information and ability to provide parenting from the mothers or
families will result in the incidence of malnutrition in their baby
232 THE PURPOSE OF SUPPLEMENTARY FEEDING
The purpose of supplementary feeding for baby more than 6 months of age is
to increase the energy and nutrients necessary that canrsquot provide from ASI because
the growing of the baby and with increasing the ages and weight Disorders on the
growth and development of normal children can happen when the energy and nutrient
needs of infants not fulfilled It can be caused by the food of the baby only ASI or the
additional food less qualified for the babys (Waryana 2010 p85)
Indonesia Government also issued a decision from Ministry of Health
represent the code etics form WHO In the decision ministry of health included
giving the ASI exclusive for the babys (permenkes nomer 450MenkesSKIV2004)
Also describe food for babys beside ASI (MP-ASI) in the regulation number
2371997 In this regulation the mean of food for babys beside ASI itrsquos not replacing
the ASI from the mother but the food beside the ASIrdquo said Rachmi Untoro Directors
of Social Nutritions Ministry of Health (httpdepkesstatus-gizigoid)
22
24 BUSINESS MODEL (NINE BUILDING BLOCKS)
The aim for this business model is to give visualization about how the
business wills works The idea it is included the purpose of the business operational
process and the business strategy therefore the model will give a specific concept to
be succeed in the future
Figure 22 Nine Building Blocks
Source Osterwalder amp Pigneur 2010
The canvas business model contain of nine important points it is define as nine
building blocks This model management strategic tools that could be develop for
new business or existing business The nine building blocks is cover as the following
23
1 Customer segments Target of the customers that define as a group of people
to reach and served
2 Value propositions It is the product and service that being offered to the
customer
3 Channels Defines how the business able to communicate and reach the
customer segment
4 Customer relationship Describes how to maintain the relationship between
the company and customers
5 Revenue streams Represent the cash that the company generate from the
customers
6 Key resources the assets and important source that the business need to
required thus the business will works
7 Key activities It s describe what the company activity do to run the business
8 Key partnership it is explains relationship networking between the suppliers
and partners that can support the company
9 Cost structure Expenses that the company must take in order to
manufacturing the product
Before going further into the innovation first a business need to create the
business model idea This is important to generate the idea of business and make into
a successful one (Osterwalder amp Pigneur 2010136)
24
25 PORTER FIVE FORCES MODEL
To analyze the structure of the business Five Forces Model is one of the
suggested frameworks to define the industry advantage and competitive advantage
with industry structure as the key to determinant it (Grimm Curtis M et al 200651)
Figure 23 Five Forces Model
Source Grimm Curtis Met al 2006
1 Threat new entrant
There are several factors that affect the threat of the new entry as the
following
a Entry barriers This is the ability of the product to enter the market If
the entry barriers are high it means the threat of the new entrant are
low and if the entry barriers are low the threat of new entrant are high
25
b Customer demand When the customer demand of product and service
are high threat of the possibility of new entrant is high since the
industry not be able to handle
c Product or service differentiation If the product can make
differentiation with new innovation then the threat is high
2 Threat of substitute products or service
The threat of substitute increased if there is competitor that can offer
better competitive price to the market
3 Bargaining power of customer
There are several factors that affect the bargaining power of customer as
the following
a Reputation When the product or service has a good reputation the
bargaining power of supplier will be low since the customer will have
no choice to select other product
b Switching cost High switching cost means the customer not easy to
switch to other competitor
c Quality of product and service Customers will buy the better quality
of the product even though the price is the same
d The number of the other industry competitor If the numbers of the
competitor are low the bargaining power of the customer also low
When the numbers of the competitors are high then the bargaining
power of the customer will be high
26
e Dependency to the product or service The bargaining power of the
customer will be low if a product have the ability to create a
dependency to the customer
4 Bargaining power of suppliers
There are some factors that affect the bargaining power of suppliers as the
following
a The number of supplier If the number of the supplier of the industry
are low then the bargaining power of the supplier are high and if the
number of the supplier are high then the bargaining power of supplier
are low
b Switching cost High switching cost in the product and service then it
is hard to change to another supplier
c Quality of the product serviceIt is very common to switch to another
supplier once the quality of product and service are low on the other
hand if the quality of the product and service are high there is not a n
option to change to other supplier
d Product or service availability The bargaining power of supplier will
be low if the availability of the product is high
e Image of the supplier If the supplier has a great image and status in
the industry then it will follow by the higher bargaining power
5 Intensity of competitive rivalry
Intensity of the industry will be high when there is other service and
products operate that involve many players which can be dominant or similar
27
26 SWOT ANALYSIS
A Way to monitoring the external and internal marketing environment is by using
SWOT analysis (Kotler Keller 2012 70) In their book Osterwalder and Pigneur
(2010 224) mentioned that a SWOT analysis in the business model yields two
results
1 Provides a snapshot of where is our business are (strength and weakness as
internal environment)
2 Suggest some future trajectories (opportunities and threats as external
environment)
SWOT analysis is such an important part in the process of designing business model
prototypes
A business unit must monitor key macro environment forces and significant
micro environment factors that affect is ability to earn profits An opportunity is the
are of buyer need an interest that a company has a high probability of profitability
satisfying Meanwhile a threat is a challenge posed by an unfavorable trend or
development that in the absence of defensive marketing action would led to lower
sales or profit (Kotler Keller 2012 71)
Meanwhile as an evaluation the business itself has to looking to its strength
and weaknesses By looking on these points the business could consider whether it
should limit itself to those opportunities for which it possesses the required strength
or consider those that might require it to find or develop new strength
28
261 TOWS MATRIX
Based on the journal from Heinz Weihrich (1982) Tows Matrix is a variant of
the classic business tool SWOT Analysis TOWS and SWOT are acronyms for
different arrangements of the words Strengths Weaknesses Opportunities and
Threats
Here are four basic strategies depending on the prevalence of the analyzed
group of factors (positive or negative) in the environment and within the company
SO situation - maxi-maxi strategy This situation applies to the company for
which dominates strengths in the environment and opportunities within This
situation corresponds to the maxi-maxi strategy strong expansion and
diversified development
WO situation - mini-maxi strategy In this situation company has the more
vulnerabilities - weaknesses but its environment gives more opportunities
The strategy should include the use of these opportunities while reducing or
correcting weaknesses within the organization
ST situation - maxi-mini strategy The source of development difficulties for
the company are unfavorable external conditions (prevalence of threats) The
company may use large internal strengths in attempt to overcome threats from
environment
WT situation - mini-mini strategy The company in this case is devoid of any
development opportunities It operates in hostile environments and its
29
potential for change is small It does not have significant strengths which
could withstand threats Mini-mini strategy boils down to a pessimistic
version of the liquidation or in optimistic situation - to strive for survival or
merger with another organization
Figure 24 TOWS Matrix Source Weihrich (1982)
27 MARKETING THEORY
The American Marketing Association define marketing as the activity set of
institutions and process for creating communication delivering and exchanging
offerings that have value for customers clients partners and society at large (Kotler
Keller 2012 27) Peter Drucker a leading management theorist said that the aim of
marketing is to make selling superfluous Successful marketing need and
30
understanding creating delivering capturing and sustaining customer value The
marketing plan is the central instrument for directing and coordinating the marketing
effort
271 Marketing Management
Based on (Kotler amp Amstrong 2010) the marketing management is analysis
planning implementation and programs control that made for created developed
and maintenance the transaction for gain the benefit based on the company purposed
Company management consist of demand that relationship with the customers
272 Segmenting Targeting Positioning
Based on (Kotler 2001) there are many consumers with differential needs so
the company must share the market choose good segmentation and also made some
appropriate strategy to gain a big benefit than other competitors Those strategies
process consist of there point which are
1 Market Segmentation
Segmentation is the share consumer activity into a more homogenous group m
hopes of a response is obtained such as buy wear accept and believe On the
practice segmentation market is the process share market into group
consumer based on their needs characteristic behavior and differentiation
mix market (Kasali 203) Based on (Kotler 2003) there are 3 main
segmentations of variable which are
31
a Geographic segmentation
Dividing market into different geographical units such as nations
states regions countries cities and neighborhoods
b Demographic segmentation
Dividing market into groups based on demographic variables such as
age gender family size family life cycle income occupation
education religion race and nationality
c Psychographic segmentation
Dividing a market into different groups based on social class lifestyle
or personality characteristic
Based on (Kotler 2003) that the market segment can drive so the
segment of the market must have 5 characteristics which are
Measurable size of the segment purchasing power of the
segment we want to reach and the last one is characteristic of
the segment can be measurable
Substantial a segment becomes the unity of homogeny group
that have a power to gain benefit if the program and marketing
drive by these groups
Accessible the segment that must be reach and served
effectively
32
Differentiable that the segments can be separate by conceptual
and respond differently to the program and the different
elements of the marketing mix
Actionable the program have made effectively that must be
implemented to attract and serve the segments
2 Market Targeting
These methods purpose to establish target market evaluation process begins
with the attractiveness of each market segment and has one or more segments
most benefit to be entered Based on (Kotler 2003) these are 5 patterns that
we can used to enter the market which are
a Single segment concentration
Concentrate with one segment the company get the knowledge
about what the market needs that to be the reach target market
and get a strong minded of consumers in that segment This
pattern have a high risk if there are saturation occurs in this
segment the company faces the risk of losing the entire market
b Selective specialization
On this pattern the company can choose the segment market
that where segment must gain the benefit The advantage of
this pattern are the ability of the company to reduce the risk
lower
c Product specialization
33
This pattern showed the company produced the goods which
will be sold in some segments
d Market specialization
The market showed that company produced the goods and sell
to the one segment the advantages if this pattern the company
have a high reputation from the consumer that segment market
have been entered
e Full market coverage
On this pattern the company try to reach whole market with
produced what consumer needs with the differential product to
gain the whole market the entered
3 Market Positioning
Market positioning is the activity of the company to place their product on the
market so their product get a clear position distinguishable as well as more
expected than competing production the minds of the target consumers that
will provide huge benefits in the target market
Based on (Kotler 2003) the company must avoid the four main errors in
placing market position which are
a Under positioning
It is mean the placement too low that causing superficial
picture of the product so consumer have a low response to the
product
b Over positioning
34
The placement is too high so it can cause the false perception
from consumers on the price of the product so consumers are
reluctant to buy because they think price is too high
c Confused positioning
Confusing placement of the product because the company too
often change their market position
d Doubtful positioning
Dubious product placement the effect of this position the
consumers distrust of the product
273 Marketing Mix
Based on (Kotler ampAmstrong 2010) marketing mix is a unity of the tools of
marketing that the tactical as well as directed and used by the company to produce the
desired response target market Marketing mix is a modern marketing theory
Marketing mix defined as the set of marketing tools that the form use to pursue its
marketing objective in the target market (Kotler 1994 98) Based on the Journal
Marketing by Chai Lee Goi Marketing mix is not scientific theory but a conceptual
framework that identifies the principal decision making manager make in configuring
their offerings to suit consumersrsquo needs (Lee Chai Goi 2009 1) To gain the benefit
for the company marketing mix is the weapon that company usually used to get the
change on the market That changed was grouped by four strategies named ldquo4Psrdquo
that consist of product price place and promotion
35
Product
Product is goods or services that company offered to the market
Price
Price is the several money that consumer must pay to buy a product
Place
Place (distribution) not only represent that the product can achieve or known
but also activity that company do for the product the produced easy to get at
the market and consumers
Promotion
Is the activity that company do to communicate their product and get the
consumer to reach their product Consist of advertising events sponsorship
and other activity are summarized in the Integrated Marketing
Communication (IMC)
Booms and Bitner is suggested 3 other elements beides the traditional 4Prsquos by
Kotler for service business which are (wwwlenamarketingnet 2013)
Physical Evidence
Is about where the service is being delivered from This element will
differentiate the company with other
Process
This element of the marketing mix looks at the used to deliver the service
36
People
People are essential ingredients in service provision recruiting and training
the right staff is required to create a competitive advantage
28 OPERATIONAL MANAGEMENT 281 THE SERVICE DESIGN PROCESS Service design is more comprehensive and occurs more often than product
design The inherent variability of service processes requires that the service system
be carefully designed The service concept defines the target customer and the desired
customer experience The service design process must be different and unique from
others to make the product selling point It also defines how onersquos service is
different from others and how it will compete in the marketplace Sometimes
services are successful because their service concept fills a previously unoccupied
niche or differs from the generally accepted mode of operation (Rusell amp Taylor
2011 193)
37
Figure 25 The Service Design Process Source Rusell amp Taylor2011
From the service concept a service package is created to meet customer
needs The package consists of a mixture of physical items sensual
benefits and psychological benefits Effective service design recognizes and
defines all the components of a service package Finding the appropriate mix of
physical items and sensual and psychological benefits and designing them to be
consistent with each other and the service concept is also important (Rusell amp
Taylor 2011 194) From the service package service specifications are developed
for performance design and delivery Performance specifications outline
expectations and requirements for general and specific customers
Performance specifications are converted into design specifications and finally
delivery specifications Design specifications must describe the service in
sufficient detail for the desired service experience to be replicated for different
individuals at numerous locations The specifications typically consist of
38
activities to be performed skill requirements and guidelines for service
providers and cost and time estimates Facility size location and layoutas well
as equipment needs are also included
29 FINANCIAL THEORY 291 BALANCE SHEET
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 62) The balance sheet presents a
summary statement of the firmrsquos financial position at a given time The statement
balances the firmrsquos assets (what it owns) against its financing which can be either
debt (what it owes) or equity (what was provided by owners) Below is the example
of balance sheet from Bartlettrsquos Company
Figure 26 Bartlett Company Balance Sheets Source Gitman amp Zitter 2012
39
The assets are listed from the most liquid (cash) ndash down to the least liquid
Marketable securities are very liquid short-term investments held by the firm
Because they are highly liquid marketable securities are viewed as a form of cash
(ldquonear cashrdquo) Accounts receivable represent the total monies owed the firm by its
customers on credit sales Inventories include raw materials work in process
(partially finished goods) and finished goods held by the firm The entry for gross
fixed assets is the original cost of all fixed (long-term) assets owned by the firm Net
fixed assets represent the difference between gross fixed assets and accumulated
depreciation ndash the total expense recorded for the depreciation of fixed assets The net
value of fixed assets is called their book value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
The liabilities and equity accounts are listed from short-term to long-
term Current liabilities include accounts payable amounts owed for credit
purchases by the firm notes payable outstanding short-term loans typically
from commercial banks and accruals amounts owed for services for which a bill
may not or will not be received Examples of accruals include taxes due the
government and wages due employees Long-term debt represents debt for which
payment is not due in the current year Stockholdersrsquo equity represents the
ownersrsquo claims on the firm The preferred stock entry shows the historical
proceeds from the sale of preferred stock(Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
40
292 INCOME STATEMENT
The income statement provides a financial summary of the firmrsquos operating
results during a specified period Most common are income statements covering a 1-
year period ending at a specified date ordinarily December 31 of the calendar year
Many large firms however operate on a 12-month financial cycle or fiscal year that
ends at a time other than December 31 In addition monthly income statements are
typically prepared for use by management and quarterly statements must be made
available to the stockholders of publicly owned corporations (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 59-60) The example of income statement is shown below
Figure 27 Bartlett Company Income
Statement Source GitmanampZitter2012
293 CASH FLOW ANALYSIS
A cash flow statement is one of the most important financial statements for a
project or business The statement can be as simple as a one page analysis or may
41
involve several schedules that feed information into a central statement A cash flow
statement is a listing of the flows of cash into and out of the business or project
Many cash flows are constructed with multiple time periods
For example it may list monthly cash inflows and outflows over a yearrsquos time
It not only projects the cash balance remaining at the end of the year but also
the cash balance for each month (wwwextensioniastateedu 2013) Some cash
flow budgets are constructed so that we can monitor the accuracy of our projections
These budgets allow us to make monthly cash flow projections for the coming year
and also enter actual inflows and outflows as we progress through the year This
will allow us to compare your projections to your actual cash flows and make
adjustments to the projections for the remainder of the year
Figure 28 Example of
Cash Flow Source
Gitman ampZitter 2012
Even though cash flow and profitability are closely related they are different
42
A cash flow statement lists cash inflows and cash outflows while the income
statement lists income and expenses A cash flow statement shows liquidity while an
income statement shows profitability
294 PAYBACK PERIOD
Payback periods are commonly used to evaluate proposed investments The
payback period is the amount of time required for the firm to recover its initial
investment in a project as calculated from cash inflows The payback period can be
found by dividing the initial investment by the annual cash inflow When the
payback period is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the following decision
criteria apply
If the payback period is less than the maximum acceptable payback
period accept the project
If the payback period is greater than the maximum acceptable payback
period reject the project
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 393) the length of the maximum
acceptable payback period is determined by management This value is set
subjectively on the basis of a number of factors including the type of project
(expansion replacement or renewal other) the perceived risk of the project and the
perceived relationship between the payback period and the share value It is simply a
value that management feels on average will result in value-creating investment
decisions
43
By measuring how quickly the firm recovers its initial investment the
payback period also gives implicit consideration to the timing of cash flows and
therefore to the time value of money Because it can be viewed as a measure of
risk exposure many firms use the payback period as a decision criterion or as a
supplement to other decision techniques The longer the firm must wait to recover
its invested funds the greater the possibility of a calamity Hence the shorter the
payback period the lower the firmrsquos risk exposure A second weakness is that this
approach fails to take fully into account the time factor in the value of money A
third weakness of payback is its failure to recognize cash flows that occur after the
payback period (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 394-396)
Figure 29 Calculation of
Payback Period Source
Gitman amp Zitter 2012
44
295 NET PRESENT VALUE (NPV)
The method used by most large companies to evaluate investment projects is
called net present value (NPV) The intuition behind the NPV method is simple
When firms make investments they are spending money that they obtained in one
form or another from investors Investors expect a return on the money that they give
to firms so a firm should undertake an investment only if the present value of the
cash flow that the investment generates is greater than the cost of making the
investment in the first place
Because the NPV method takes into account the time value of investorsrsquo
money it is a more sophisticated capital budgeting technique than the payback rule
The NPV method discounts the firmrsquos cash flows at the firmrsquos cost of capital This
rate is the minimum return that must be earned on a project to satisfy the firmrsquos
investors Projects with lower returns fail to meet investorsrsquo expectations and
therefore decrease firm value and projects with higher returns increase firm
value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
The net present value (NPV) is found by subtracting a projectrsquos initial
investment (CF0) from the present value of its cash inflows (CFt) discounted at a
rate equal to the firmrsquos cost of capital (r) as shown below
NPV = Present value of cash inflows - Initial investment
When NPV is used both inflows and outflows are measured in terms of
45
present dollars For a project that has cash outflows beyond the initial investment the
net present value of a project would be found by subtracting the present value of
outflows from the present value of inflows When NPV is used to make accept reject
decisions the decision criteria are as follows
If the NPV is greater than $0 accept the project
If the NPV is less than $0 reject the project
If the NPV is greater than $0 the firm will earn a return greater than its cost of
capital Such action should increase the market value of the firm and therefore the
wealth of its owners by an amount equal to the NPV (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
296 INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN (IRR)
The internal rate of return (IRR) is one of the most widely used capital
budgeting techniques The internal rate of return (IRR) is the discount rate that
equates the NPV of an investment opportunity with $0 (because the present value of
cash inflows equals the initial investment) It is the rate of return that the firm will
earn if it invests in the project and receives the given cash inflows (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 401)
When IRR is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the decision criteria are as
follows
If the IRR is greater than the cost of capital accept the project
46
If the IRR is less than the cost of capital reject the project
To calculate IRR Most financial calculators have a pre-programmed IRR
function that can be used to simplify the IRR calculation With these calculators you
merely punch in all cash flows just as if to calculate NPV and then depress IRR to
find the internal rate of return Computer software including spreadsheets is also
available for simplifying these calculations All NPV and IRR values presented in
this and subsequent chapters are obtained by using these functions on a popular
financial calculator (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 402)
297 COST OF GOOD SOLD (COGS)
Cost of goods sold is the direct costs attributable to the production of the
goods sold by a company This amount includes the cost of the materials used in
creating the good along with the direct labor costs used to produce the good It
excludes indirect expenses such as distribution costs and sales force costs
COGS is the costs that go into creating the products that a company sells
therefore the only costs included in the measure are those that are directly tied to the
production of the products For example the COGS for an automaker would include
the material costs for the parts that go into making the car along with the labor costs
used to put the car together The cost of sending the cars to dealerships and the cost of
the labor used to sell the car would be excluded
The exact costs included in the COGS calculation will differ from one type
of business to another The cost of goods attributed to a companys products are
47
expensed as the company sells these goods In summary for manufacturers COGS is
the cost of buying raw materials and manufacturing finished products For retailers
itrsquos the cost of obtaining or buying the products sold to customers If the company is
in a service industry COGS is the cost of the service it offers
48
49
50
20
231 UNDERSTANDING NUTRITION PARENTING
Manage the Nutrition in additional food for baby itrsquos for sustain the growth
and development of the physical and biological toddlers appropriately and impartial
(EvelineampNanang D 2010 11)
Figure 21 Kerangka TeoriSource Depkes RI 2007
According to (LIPI 2000123) a key aspect of nutrition parenting
a Care and protection from the mother to her baby
b The practice of breastfeeding and complementary feeding administration
c Parenting psychosocial
d Preparation of food
21
e Personal hygiene and environmental sanitation
Nutritional problems one of which is influenced by the mother to their baby
do not get enough information and ability to provide parenting from the mothers or
families will result in the incidence of malnutrition in their baby
232 THE PURPOSE OF SUPPLEMENTARY FEEDING
The purpose of supplementary feeding for baby more than 6 months of age is
to increase the energy and nutrients necessary that canrsquot provide from ASI because
the growing of the baby and with increasing the ages and weight Disorders on the
growth and development of normal children can happen when the energy and nutrient
needs of infants not fulfilled It can be caused by the food of the baby only ASI or the
additional food less qualified for the babys (Waryana 2010 p85)
Indonesia Government also issued a decision from Ministry of Health
represent the code etics form WHO In the decision ministry of health included
giving the ASI exclusive for the babys (permenkes nomer 450MenkesSKIV2004)
Also describe food for babys beside ASI (MP-ASI) in the regulation number
2371997 In this regulation the mean of food for babys beside ASI itrsquos not replacing
the ASI from the mother but the food beside the ASIrdquo said Rachmi Untoro Directors
of Social Nutritions Ministry of Health (httpdepkesstatus-gizigoid)
22
24 BUSINESS MODEL (NINE BUILDING BLOCKS)
The aim for this business model is to give visualization about how the
business wills works The idea it is included the purpose of the business operational
process and the business strategy therefore the model will give a specific concept to
be succeed in the future
Figure 22 Nine Building Blocks
Source Osterwalder amp Pigneur 2010
The canvas business model contain of nine important points it is define as nine
building blocks This model management strategic tools that could be develop for
new business or existing business The nine building blocks is cover as the following
23
1 Customer segments Target of the customers that define as a group of people
to reach and served
2 Value propositions It is the product and service that being offered to the
customer
3 Channels Defines how the business able to communicate and reach the
customer segment
4 Customer relationship Describes how to maintain the relationship between
the company and customers
5 Revenue streams Represent the cash that the company generate from the
customers
6 Key resources the assets and important source that the business need to
required thus the business will works
7 Key activities It s describe what the company activity do to run the business
8 Key partnership it is explains relationship networking between the suppliers
and partners that can support the company
9 Cost structure Expenses that the company must take in order to
manufacturing the product
Before going further into the innovation first a business need to create the
business model idea This is important to generate the idea of business and make into
a successful one (Osterwalder amp Pigneur 2010136)
24
25 PORTER FIVE FORCES MODEL
To analyze the structure of the business Five Forces Model is one of the
suggested frameworks to define the industry advantage and competitive advantage
with industry structure as the key to determinant it (Grimm Curtis M et al 200651)
Figure 23 Five Forces Model
Source Grimm Curtis Met al 2006
1 Threat new entrant
There are several factors that affect the threat of the new entry as the
following
a Entry barriers This is the ability of the product to enter the market If
the entry barriers are high it means the threat of the new entrant are
low and if the entry barriers are low the threat of new entrant are high
25
b Customer demand When the customer demand of product and service
are high threat of the possibility of new entrant is high since the
industry not be able to handle
c Product or service differentiation If the product can make
differentiation with new innovation then the threat is high
2 Threat of substitute products or service
The threat of substitute increased if there is competitor that can offer
better competitive price to the market
3 Bargaining power of customer
There are several factors that affect the bargaining power of customer as
the following
a Reputation When the product or service has a good reputation the
bargaining power of supplier will be low since the customer will have
no choice to select other product
b Switching cost High switching cost means the customer not easy to
switch to other competitor
c Quality of product and service Customers will buy the better quality
of the product even though the price is the same
d The number of the other industry competitor If the numbers of the
competitor are low the bargaining power of the customer also low
When the numbers of the competitors are high then the bargaining
power of the customer will be high
26
e Dependency to the product or service The bargaining power of the
customer will be low if a product have the ability to create a
dependency to the customer
4 Bargaining power of suppliers
There are some factors that affect the bargaining power of suppliers as the
following
a The number of supplier If the number of the supplier of the industry
are low then the bargaining power of the supplier are high and if the
number of the supplier are high then the bargaining power of supplier
are low
b Switching cost High switching cost in the product and service then it
is hard to change to another supplier
c Quality of the product serviceIt is very common to switch to another
supplier once the quality of product and service are low on the other
hand if the quality of the product and service are high there is not a n
option to change to other supplier
d Product or service availability The bargaining power of supplier will
be low if the availability of the product is high
e Image of the supplier If the supplier has a great image and status in
the industry then it will follow by the higher bargaining power
5 Intensity of competitive rivalry
Intensity of the industry will be high when there is other service and
products operate that involve many players which can be dominant or similar
27
26 SWOT ANALYSIS
A Way to monitoring the external and internal marketing environment is by using
SWOT analysis (Kotler Keller 2012 70) In their book Osterwalder and Pigneur
(2010 224) mentioned that a SWOT analysis in the business model yields two
results
1 Provides a snapshot of where is our business are (strength and weakness as
internal environment)
2 Suggest some future trajectories (opportunities and threats as external
environment)
SWOT analysis is such an important part in the process of designing business model
prototypes
A business unit must monitor key macro environment forces and significant
micro environment factors that affect is ability to earn profits An opportunity is the
are of buyer need an interest that a company has a high probability of profitability
satisfying Meanwhile a threat is a challenge posed by an unfavorable trend or
development that in the absence of defensive marketing action would led to lower
sales or profit (Kotler Keller 2012 71)
Meanwhile as an evaluation the business itself has to looking to its strength
and weaknesses By looking on these points the business could consider whether it
should limit itself to those opportunities for which it possesses the required strength
or consider those that might require it to find or develop new strength
28
261 TOWS MATRIX
Based on the journal from Heinz Weihrich (1982) Tows Matrix is a variant of
the classic business tool SWOT Analysis TOWS and SWOT are acronyms for
different arrangements of the words Strengths Weaknesses Opportunities and
Threats
Here are four basic strategies depending on the prevalence of the analyzed
group of factors (positive or negative) in the environment and within the company
SO situation - maxi-maxi strategy This situation applies to the company for
which dominates strengths in the environment and opportunities within This
situation corresponds to the maxi-maxi strategy strong expansion and
diversified development
WO situation - mini-maxi strategy In this situation company has the more
vulnerabilities - weaknesses but its environment gives more opportunities
The strategy should include the use of these opportunities while reducing or
correcting weaknesses within the organization
ST situation - maxi-mini strategy The source of development difficulties for
the company are unfavorable external conditions (prevalence of threats) The
company may use large internal strengths in attempt to overcome threats from
environment
WT situation - mini-mini strategy The company in this case is devoid of any
development opportunities It operates in hostile environments and its
29
potential for change is small It does not have significant strengths which
could withstand threats Mini-mini strategy boils down to a pessimistic
version of the liquidation or in optimistic situation - to strive for survival or
merger with another organization
Figure 24 TOWS Matrix Source Weihrich (1982)
27 MARKETING THEORY
The American Marketing Association define marketing as the activity set of
institutions and process for creating communication delivering and exchanging
offerings that have value for customers clients partners and society at large (Kotler
Keller 2012 27) Peter Drucker a leading management theorist said that the aim of
marketing is to make selling superfluous Successful marketing need and
30
understanding creating delivering capturing and sustaining customer value The
marketing plan is the central instrument for directing and coordinating the marketing
effort
271 Marketing Management
Based on (Kotler amp Amstrong 2010) the marketing management is analysis
planning implementation and programs control that made for created developed
and maintenance the transaction for gain the benefit based on the company purposed
Company management consist of demand that relationship with the customers
272 Segmenting Targeting Positioning
Based on (Kotler 2001) there are many consumers with differential needs so
the company must share the market choose good segmentation and also made some
appropriate strategy to gain a big benefit than other competitors Those strategies
process consist of there point which are
1 Market Segmentation
Segmentation is the share consumer activity into a more homogenous group m
hopes of a response is obtained such as buy wear accept and believe On the
practice segmentation market is the process share market into group
consumer based on their needs characteristic behavior and differentiation
mix market (Kasali 203) Based on (Kotler 2003) there are 3 main
segmentations of variable which are
31
a Geographic segmentation
Dividing market into different geographical units such as nations
states regions countries cities and neighborhoods
b Demographic segmentation
Dividing market into groups based on demographic variables such as
age gender family size family life cycle income occupation
education religion race and nationality
c Psychographic segmentation
Dividing a market into different groups based on social class lifestyle
or personality characteristic
Based on (Kotler 2003) that the market segment can drive so the
segment of the market must have 5 characteristics which are
Measurable size of the segment purchasing power of the
segment we want to reach and the last one is characteristic of
the segment can be measurable
Substantial a segment becomes the unity of homogeny group
that have a power to gain benefit if the program and marketing
drive by these groups
Accessible the segment that must be reach and served
effectively
32
Differentiable that the segments can be separate by conceptual
and respond differently to the program and the different
elements of the marketing mix
Actionable the program have made effectively that must be
implemented to attract and serve the segments
2 Market Targeting
These methods purpose to establish target market evaluation process begins
with the attractiveness of each market segment and has one or more segments
most benefit to be entered Based on (Kotler 2003) these are 5 patterns that
we can used to enter the market which are
a Single segment concentration
Concentrate with one segment the company get the knowledge
about what the market needs that to be the reach target market
and get a strong minded of consumers in that segment This
pattern have a high risk if there are saturation occurs in this
segment the company faces the risk of losing the entire market
b Selective specialization
On this pattern the company can choose the segment market
that where segment must gain the benefit The advantage of
this pattern are the ability of the company to reduce the risk
lower
c Product specialization
33
This pattern showed the company produced the goods which
will be sold in some segments
d Market specialization
The market showed that company produced the goods and sell
to the one segment the advantages if this pattern the company
have a high reputation from the consumer that segment market
have been entered
e Full market coverage
On this pattern the company try to reach whole market with
produced what consumer needs with the differential product to
gain the whole market the entered
3 Market Positioning
Market positioning is the activity of the company to place their product on the
market so their product get a clear position distinguishable as well as more
expected than competing production the minds of the target consumers that
will provide huge benefits in the target market
Based on (Kotler 2003) the company must avoid the four main errors in
placing market position which are
a Under positioning
It is mean the placement too low that causing superficial
picture of the product so consumer have a low response to the
product
b Over positioning
34
The placement is too high so it can cause the false perception
from consumers on the price of the product so consumers are
reluctant to buy because they think price is too high
c Confused positioning
Confusing placement of the product because the company too
often change their market position
d Doubtful positioning
Dubious product placement the effect of this position the
consumers distrust of the product
273 Marketing Mix
Based on (Kotler ampAmstrong 2010) marketing mix is a unity of the tools of
marketing that the tactical as well as directed and used by the company to produce the
desired response target market Marketing mix is a modern marketing theory
Marketing mix defined as the set of marketing tools that the form use to pursue its
marketing objective in the target market (Kotler 1994 98) Based on the Journal
Marketing by Chai Lee Goi Marketing mix is not scientific theory but a conceptual
framework that identifies the principal decision making manager make in configuring
their offerings to suit consumersrsquo needs (Lee Chai Goi 2009 1) To gain the benefit
for the company marketing mix is the weapon that company usually used to get the
change on the market That changed was grouped by four strategies named ldquo4Psrdquo
that consist of product price place and promotion
35
Product
Product is goods or services that company offered to the market
Price
Price is the several money that consumer must pay to buy a product
Place
Place (distribution) not only represent that the product can achieve or known
but also activity that company do for the product the produced easy to get at
the market and consumers
Promotion
Is the activity that company do to communicate their product and get the
consumer to reach their product Consist of advertising events sponsorship
and other activity are summarized in the Integrated Marketing
Communication (IMC)
Booms and Bitner is suggested 3 other elements beides the traditional 4Prsquos by
Kotler for service business which are (wwwlenamarketingnet 2013)
Physical Evidence
Is about where the service is being delivered from This element will
differentiate the company with other
Process
This element of the marketing mix looks at the used to deliver the service
36
People
People are essential ingredients in service provision recruiting and training
the right staff is required to create a competitive advantage
28 OPERATIONAL MANAGEMENT 281 THE SERVICE DESIGN PROCESS Service design is more comprehensive and occurs more often than product
design The inherent variability of service processes requires that the service system
be carefully designed The service concept defines the target customer and the desired
customer experience The service design process must be different and unique from
others to make the product selling point It also defines how onersquos service is
different from others and how it will compete in the marketplace Sometimes
services are successful because their service concept fills a previously unoccupied
niche or differs from the generally accepted mode of operation (Rusell amp Taylor
2011 193)
37
Figure 25 The Service Design Process Source Rusell amp Taylor2011
From the service concept a service package is created to meet customer
needs The package consists of a mixture of physical items sensual
benefits and psychological benefits Effective service design recognizes and
defines all the components of a service package Finding the appropriate mix of
physical items and sensual and psychological benefits and designing them to be
consistent with each other and the service concept is also important (Rusell amp
Taylor 2011 194) From the service package service specifications are developed
for performance design and delivery Performance specifications outline
expectations and requirements for general and specific customers
Performance specifications are converted into design specifications and finally
delivery specifications Design specifications must describe the service in
sufficient detail for the desired service experience to be replicated for different
individuals at numerous locations The specifications typically consist of
38
activities to be performed skill requirements and guidelines for service
providers and cost and time estimates Facility size location and layoutas well
as equipment needs are also included
29 FINANCIAL THEORY 291 BALANCE SHEET
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 62) The balance sheet presents a
summary statement of the firmrsquos financial position at a given time The statement
balances the firmrsquos assets (what it owns) against its financing which can be either
debt (what it owes) or equity (what was provided by owners) Below is the example
of balance sheet from Bartlettrsquos Company
Figure 26 Bartlett Company Balance Sheets Source Gitman amp Zitter 2012
39
The assets are listed from the most liquid (cash) ndash down to the least liquid
Marketable securities are very liquid short-term investments held by the firm
Because they are highly liquid marketable securities are viewed as a form of cash
(ldquonear cashrdquo) Accounts receivable represent the total monies owed the firm by its
customers on credit sales Inventories include raw materials work in process
(partially finished goods) and finished goods held by the firm The entry for gross
fixed assets is the original cost of all fixed (long-term) assets owned by the firm Net
fixed assets represent the difference between gross fixed assets and accumulated
depreciation ndash the total expense recorded for the depreciation of fixed assets The net
value of fixed assets is called their book value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
The liabilities and equity accounts are listed from short-term to long-
term Current liabilities include accounts payable amounts owed for credit
purchases by the firm notes payable outstanding short-term loans typically
from commercial banks and accruals amounts owed for services for which a bill
may not or will not be received Examples of accruals include taxes due the
government and wages due employees Long-term debt represents debt for which
payment is not due in the current year Stockholdersrsquo equity represents the
ownersrsquo claims on the firm The preferred stock entry shows the historical
proceeds from the sale of preferred stock(Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
40
292 INCOME STATEMENT
The income statement provides a financial summary of the firmrsquos operating
results during a specified period Most common are income statements covering a 1-
year period ending at a specified date ordinarily December 31 of the calendar year
Many large firms however operate on a 12-month financial cycle or fiscal year that
ends at a time other than December 31 In addition monthly income statements are
typically prepared for use by management and quarterly statements must be made
available to the stockholders of publicly owned corporations (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 59-60) The example of income statement is shown below
Figure 27 Bartlett Company Income
Statement Source GitmanampZitter2012
293 CASH FLOW ANALYSIS
A cash flow statement is one of the most important financial statements for a
project or business The statement can be as simple as a one page analysis or may
41
involve several schedules that feed information into a central statement A cash flow
statement is a listing of the flows of cash into and out of the business or project
Many cash flows are constructed with multiple time periods
For example it may list monthly cash inflows and outflows over a yearrsquos time
It not only projects the cash balance remaining at the end of the year but also
the cash balance for each month (wwwextensioniastateedu 2013) Some cash
flow budgets are constructed so that we can monitor the accuracy of our projections
These budgets allow us to make monthly cash flow projections for the coming year
and also enter actual inflows and outflows as we progress through the year This
will allow us to compare your projections to your actual cash flows and make
adjustments to the projections for the remainder of the year
Figure 28 Example of
Cash Flow Source
Gitman ampZitter 2012
Even though cash flow and profitability are closely related they are different
42
A cash flow statement lists cash inflows and cash outflows while the income
statement lists income and expenses A cash flow statement shows liquidity while an
income statement shows profitability
294 PAYBACK PERIOD
Payback periods are commonly used to evaluate proposed investments The
payback period is the amount of time required for the firm to recover its initial
investment in a project as calculated from cash inflows The payback period can be
found by dividing the initial investment by the annual cash inflow When the
payback period is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the following decision
criteria apply
If the payback period is less than the maximum acceptable payback
period accept the project
If the payback period is greater than the maximum acceptable payback
period reject the project
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 393) the length of the maximum
acceptable payback period is determined by management This value is set
subjectively on the basis of a number of factors including the type of project
(expansion replacement or renewal other) the perceived risk of the project and the
perceived relationship between the payback period and the share value It is simply a
value that management feels on average will result in value-creating investment
decisions
43
By measuring how quickly the firm recovers its initial investment the
payback period also gives implicit consideration to the timing of cash flows and
therefore to the time value of money Because it can be viewed as a measure of
risk exposure many firms use the payback period as a decision criterion or as a
supplement to other decision techniques The longer the firm must wait to recover
its invested funds the greater the possibility of a calamity Hence the shorter the
payback period the lower the firmrsquos risk exposure A second weakness is that this
approach fails to take fully into account the time factor in the value of money A
third weakness of payback is its failure to recognize cash flows that occur after the
payback period (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 394-396)
Figure 29 Calculation of
Payback Period Source
Gitman amp Zitter 2012
44
295 NET PRESENT VALUE (NPV)
The method used by most large companies to evaluate investment projects is
called net present value (NPV) The intuition behind the NPV method is simple
When firms make investments they are spending money that they obtained in one
form or another from investors Investors expect a return on the money that they give
to firms so a firm should undertake an investment only if the present value of the
cash flow that the investment generates is greater than the cost of making the
investment in the first place
Because the NPV method takes into account the time value of investorsrsquo
money it is a more sophisticated capital budgeting technique than the payback rule
The NPV method discounts the firmrsquos cash flows at the firmrsquos cost of capital This
rate is the minimum return that must be earned on a project to satisfy the firmrsquos
investors Projects with lower returns fail to meet investorsrsquo expectations and
therefore decrease firm value and projects with higher returns increase firm
value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
The net present value (NPV) is found by subtracting a projectrsquos initial
investment (CF0) from the present value of its cash inflows (CFt) discounted at a
rate equal to the firmrsquos cost of capital (r) as shown below
NPV = Present value of cash inflows - Initial investment
When NPV is used both inflows and outflows are measured in terms of
45
present dollars For a project that has cash outflows beyond the initial investment the
net present value of a project would be found by subtracting the present value of
outflows from the present value of inflows When NPV is used to make accept reject
decisions the decision criteria are as follows
If the NPV is greater than $0 accept the project
If the NPV is less than $0 reject the project
If the NPV is greater than $0 the firm will earn a return greater than its cost of
capital Such action should increase the market value of the firm and therefore the
wealth of its owners by an amount equal to the NPV (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
296 INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN (IRR)
The internal rate of return (IRR) is one of the most widely used capital
budgeting techniques The internal rate of return (IRR) is the discount rate that
equates the NPV of an investment opportunity with $0 (because the present value of
cash inflows equals the initial investment) It is the rate of return that the firm will
earn if it invests in the project and receives the given cash inflows (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 401)
When IRR is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the decision criteria are as
follows
If the IRR is greater than the cost of capital accept the project
46
If the IRR is less than the cost of capital reject the project
To calculate IRR Most financial calculators have a pre-programmed IRR
function that can be used to simplify the IRR calculation With these calculators you
merely punch in all cash flows just as if to calculate NPV and then depress IRR to
find the internal rate of return Computer software including spreadsheets is also
available for simplifying these calculations All NPV and IRR values presented in
this and subsequent chapters are obtained by using these functions on a popular
financial calculator (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 402)
297 COST OF GOOD SOLD (COGS)
Cost of goods sold is the direct costs attributable to the production of the
goods sold by a company This amount includes the cost of the materials used in
creating the good along with the direct labor costs used to produce the good It
excludes indirect expenses such as distribution costs and sales force costs
COGS is the costs that go into creating the products that a company sells
therefore the only costs included in the measure are those that are directly tied to the
production of the products For example the COGS for an automaker would include
the material costs for the parts that go into making the car along with the labor costs
used to put the car together The cost of sending the cars to dealerships and the cost of
the labor used to sell the car would be excluded
The exact costs included in the COGS calculation will differ from one type
of business to another The cost of goods attributed to a companys products are
47
expensed as the company sells these goods In summary for manufacturers COGS is
the cost of buying raw materials and manufacturing finished products For retailers
itrsquos the cost of obtaining or buying the products sold to customers If the company is
in a service industry COGS is the cost of the service it offers
48
49
50
21
e Personal hygiene and environmental sanitation
Nutritional problems one of which is influenced by the mother to their baby
do not get enough information and ability to provide parenting from the mothers or
families will result in the incidence of malnutrition in their baby
232 THE PURPOSE OF SUPPLEMENTARY FEEDING
The purpose of supplementary feeding for baby more than 6 months of age is
to increase the energy and nutrients necessary that canrsquot provide from ASI because
the growing of the baby and with increasing the ages and weight Disorders on the
growth and development of normal children can happen when the energy and nutrient
needs of infants not fulfilled It can be caused by the food of the baby only ASI or the
additional food less qualified for the babys (Waryana 2010 p85)
Indonesia Government also issued a decision from Ministry of Health
represent the code etics form WHO In the decision ministry of health included
giving the ASI exclusive for the babys (permenkes nomer 450MenkesSKIV2004)
Also describe food for babys beside ASI (MP-ASI) in the regulation number
2371997 In this regulation the mean of food for babys beside ASI itrsquos not replacing
the ASI from the mother but the food beside the ASIrdquo said Rachmi Untoro Directors
of Social Nutritions Ministry of Health (httpdepkesstatus-gizigoid)
22
24 BUSINESS MODEL (NINE BUILDING BLOCKS)
The aim for this business model is to give visualization about how the
business wills works The idea it is included the purpose of the business operational
process and the business strategy therefore the model will give a specific concept to
be succeed in the future
Figure 22 Nine Building Blocks
Source Osterwalder amp Pigneur 2010
The canvas business model contain of nine important points it is define as nine
building blocks This model management strategic tools that could be develop for
new business or existing business The nine building blocks is cover as the following
23
1 Customer segments Target of the customers that define as a group of people
to reach and served
2 Value propositions It is the product and service that being offered to the
customer
3 Channels Defines how the business able to communicate and reach the
customer segment
4 Customer relationship Describes how to maintain the relationship between
the company and customers
5 Revenue streams Represent the cash that the company generate from the
customers
6 Key resources the assets and important source that the business need to
required thus the business will works
7 Key activities It s describe what the company activity do to run the business
8 Key partnership it is explains relationship networking between the suppliers
and partners that can support the company
9 Cost structure Expenses that the company must take in order to
manufacturing the product
Before going further into the innovation first a business need to create the
business model idea This is important to generate the idea of business and make into
a successful one (Osterwalder amp Pigneur 2010136)
24
25 PORTER FIVE FORCES MODEL
To analyze the structure of the business Five Forces Model is one of the
suggested frameworks to define the industry advantage and competitive advantage
with industry structure as the key to determinant it (Grimm Curtis M et al 200651)
Figure 23 Five Forces Model
Source Grimm Curtis Met al 2006
1 Threat new entrant
There are several factors that affect the threat of the new entry as the
following
a Entry barriers This is the ability of the product to enter the market If
the entry barriers are high it means the threat of the new entrant are
low and if the entry barriers are low the threat of new entrant are high
25
b Customer demand When the customer demand of product and service
are high threat of the possibility of new entrant is high since the
industry not be able to handle
c Product or service differentiation If the product can make
differentiation with new innovation then the threat is high
2 Threat of substitute products or service
The threat of substitute increased if there is competitor that can offer
better competitive price to the market
3 Bargaining power of customer
There are several factors that affect the bargaining power of customer as
the following
a Reputation When the product or service has a good reputation the
bargaining power of supplier will be low since the customer will have
no choice to select other product
b Switching cost High switching cost means the customer not easy to
switch to other competitor
c Quality of product and service Customers will buy the better quality
of the product even though the price is the same
d The number of the other industry competitor If the numbers of the
competitor are low the bargaining power of the customer also low
When the numbers of the competitors are high then the bargaining
power of the customer will be high
26
e Dependency to the product or service The bargaining power of the
customer will be low if a product have the ability to create a
dependency to the customer
4 Bargaining power of suppliers
There are some factors that affect the bargaining power of suppliers as the
following
a The number of supplier If the number of the supplier of the industry
are low then the bargaining power of the supplier are high and if the
number of the supplier are high then the bargaining power of supplier
are low
b Switching cost High switching cost in the product and service then it
is hard to change to another supplier
c Quality of the product serviceIt is very common to switch to another
supplier once the quality of product and service are low on the other
hand if the quality of the product and service are high there is not a n
option to change to other supplier
d Product or service availability The bargaining power of supplier will
be low if the availability of the product is high
e Image of the supplier If the supplier has a great image and status in
the industry then it will follow by the higher bargaining power
5 Intensity of competitive rivalry
Intensity of the industry will be high when there is other service and
products operate that involve many players which can be dominant or similar
27
26 SWOT ANALYSIS
A Way to monitoring the external and internal marketing environment is by using
SWOT analysis (Kotler Keller 2012 70) In their book Osterwalder and Pigneur
(2010 224) mentioned that a SWOT analysis in the business model yields two
results
1 Provides a snapshot of where is our business are (strength and weakness as
internal environment)
2 Suggest some future trajectories (opportunities and threats as external
environment)
SWOT analysis is such an important part in the process of designing business model
prototypes
A business unit must monitor key macro environment forces and significant
micro environment factors that affect is ability to earn profits An opportunity is the
are of buyer need an interest that a company has a high probability of profitability
satisfying Meanwhile a threat is a challenge posed by an unfavorable trend or
development that in the absence of defensive marketing action would led to lower
sales or profit (Kotler Keller 2012 71)
Meanwhile as an evaluation the business itself has to looking to its strength
and weaknesses By looking on these points the business could consider whether it
should limit itself to those opportunities for which it possesses the required strength
or consider those that might require it to find or develop new strength
28
261 TOWS MATRIX
Based on the journal from Heinz Weihrich (1982) Tows Matrix is a variant of
the classic business tool SWOT Analysis TOWS and SWOT are acronyms for
different arrangements of the words Strengths Weaknesses Opportunities and
Threats
Here are four basic strategies depending on the prevalence of the analyzed
group of factors (positive or negative) in the environment and within the company
SO situation - maxi-maxi strategy This situation applies to the company for
which dominates strengths in the environment and opportunities within This
situation corresponds to the maxi-maxi strategy strong expansion and
diversified development
WO situation - mini-maxi strategy In this situation company has the more
vulnerabilities - weaknesses but its environment gives more opportunities
The strategy should include the use of these opportunities while reducing or
correcting weaknesses within the organization
ST situation - maxi-mini strategy The source of development difficulties for
the company are unfavorable external conditions (prevalence of threats) The
company may use large internal strengths in attempt to overcome threats from
environment
WT situation - mini-mini strategy The company in this case is devoid of any
development opportunities It operates in hostile environments and its
29
potential for change is small It does not have significant strengths which
could withstand threats Mini-mini strategy boils down to a pessimistic
version of the liquidation or in optimistic situation - to strive for survival or
merger with another organization
Figure 24 TOWS Matrix Source Weihrich (1982)
27 MARKETING THEORY
The American Marketing Association define marketing as the activity set of
institutions and process for creating communication delivering and exchanging
offerings that have value for customers clients partners and society at large (Kotler
Keller 2012 27) Peter Drucker a leading management theorist said that the aim of
marketing is to make selling superfluous Successful marketing need and
30
understanding creating delivering capturing and sustaining customer value The
marketing plan is the central instrument for directing and coordinating the marketing
effort
271 Marketing Management
Based on (Kotler amp Amstrong 2010) the marketing management is analysis
planning implementation and programs control that made for created developed
and maintenance the transaction for gain the benefit based on the company purposed
Company management consist of demand that relationship with the customers
272 Segmenting Targeting Positioning
Based on (Kotler 2001) there are many consumers with differential needs so
the company must share the market choose good segmentation and also made some
appropriate strategy to gain a big benefit than other competitors Those strategies
process consist of there point which are
1 Market Segmentation
Segmentation is the share consumer activity into a more homogenous group m
hopes of a response is obtained such as buy wear accept and believe On the
practice segmentation market is the process share market into group
consumer based on their needs characteristic behavior and differentiation
mix market (Kasali 203) Based on (Kotler 2003) there are 3 main
segmentations of variable which are
31
a Geographic segmentation
Dividing market into different geographical units such as nations
states regions countries cities and neighborhoods
b Demographic segmentation
Dividing market into groups based on demographic variables such as
age gender family size family life cycle income occupation
education religion race and nationality
c Psychographic segmentation
Dividing a market into different groups based on social class lifestyle
or personality characteristic
Based on (Kotler 2003) that the market segment can drive so the
segment of the market must have 5 characteristics which are
Measurable size of the segment purchasing power of the
segment we want to reach and the last one is characteristic of
the segment can be measurable
Substantial a segment becomes the unity of homogeny group
that have a power to gain benefit if the program and marketing
drive by these groups
Accessible the segment that must be reach and served
effectively
32
Differentiable that the segments can be separate by conceptual
and respond differently to the program and the different
elements of the marketing mix
Actionable the program have made effectively that must be
implemented to attract and serve the segments
2 Market Targeting
These methods purpose to establish target market evaluation process begins
with the attractiveness of each market segment and has one or more segments
most benefit to be entered Based on (Kotler 2003) these are 5 patterns that
we can used to enter the market which are
a Single segment concentration
Concentrate with one segment the company get the knowledge
about what the market needs that to be the reach target market
and get a strong minded of consumers in that segment This
pattern have a high risk if there are saturation occurs in this
segment the company faces the risk of losing the entire market
b Selective specialization
On this pattern the company can choose the segment market
that where segment must gain the benefit The advantage of
this pattern are the ability of the company to reduce the risk
lower
c Product specialization
33
This pattern showed the company produced the goods which
will be sold in some segments
d Market specialization
The market showed that company produced the goods and sell
to the one segment the advantages if this pattern the company
have a high reputation from the consumer that segment market
have been entered
e Full market coverage
On this pattern the company try to reach whole market with
produced what consumer needs with the differential product to
gain the whole market the entered
3 Market Positioning
Market positioning is the activity of the company to place their product on the
market so their product get a clear position distinguishable as well as more
expected than competing production the minds of the target consumers that
will provide huge benefits in the target market
Based on (Kotler 2003) the company must avoid the four main errors in
placing market position which are
a Under positioning
It is mean the placement too low that causing superficial
picture of the product so consumer have a low response to the
product
b Over positioning
34
The placement is too high so it can cause the false perception
from consumers on the price of the product so consumers are
reluctant to buy because they think price is too high
c Confused positioning
Confusing placement of the product because the company too
often change their market position
d Doubtful positioning
Dubious product placement the effect of this position the
consumers distrust of the product
273 Marketing Mix
Based on (Kotler ampAmstrong 2010) marketing mix is a unity of the tools of
marketing that the tactical as well as directed and used by the company to produce the
desired response target market Marketing mix is a modern marketing theory
Marketing mix defined as the set of marketing tools that the form use to pursue its
marketing objective in the target market (Kotler 1994 98) Based on the Journal
Marketing by Chai Lee Goi Marketing mix is not scientific theory but a conceptual
framework that identifies the principal decision making manager make in configuring
their offerings to suit consumersrsquo needs (Lee Chai Goi 2009 1) To gain the benefit
for the company marketing mix is the weapon that company usually used to get the
change on the market That changed was grouped by four strategies named ldquo4Psrdquo
that consist of product price place and promotion
35
Product
Product is goods or services that company offered to the market
Price
Price is the several money that consumer must pay to buy a product
Place
Place (distribution) not only represent that the product can achieve or known
but also activity that company do for the product the produced easy to get at
the market and consumers
Promotion
Is the activity that company do to communicate their product and get the
consumer to reach their product Consist of advertising events sponsorship
and other activity are summarized in the Integrated Marketing
Communication (IMC)
Booms and Bitner is suggested 3 other elements beides the traditional 4Prsquos by
Kotler for service business which are (wwwlenamarketingnet 2013)
Physical Evidence
Is about where the service is being delivered from This element will
differentiate the company with other
Process
This element of the marketing mix looks at the used to deliver the service
36
People
People are essential ingredients in service provision recruiting and training
the right staff is required to create a competitive advantage
28 OPERATIONAL MANAGEMENT 281 THE SERVICE DESIGN PROCESS Service design is more comprehensive and occurs more often than product
design The inherent variability of service processes requires that the service system
be carefully designed The service concept defines the target customer and the desired
customer experience The service design process must be different and unique from
others to make the product selling point It also defines how onersquos service is
different from others and how it will compete in the marketplace Sometimes
services are successful because their service concept fills a previously unoccupied
niche or differs from the generally accepted mode of operation (Rusell amp Taylor
2011 193)
37
Figure 25 The Service Design Process Source Rusell amp Taylor2011
From the service concept a service package is created to meet customer
needs The package consists of a mixture of physical items sensual
benefits and psychological benefits Effective service design recognizes and
defines all the components of a service package Finding the appropriate mix of
physical items and sensual and psychological benefits and designing them to be
consistent with each other and the service concept is also important (Rusell amp
Taylor 2011 194) From the service package service specifications are developed
for performance design and delivery Performance specifications outline
expectations and requirements for general and specific customers
Performance specifications are converted into design specifications and finally
delivery specifications Design specifications must describe the service in
sufficient detail for the desired service experience to be replicated for different
individuals at numerous locations The specifications typically consist of
38
activities to be performed skill requirements and guidelines for service
providers and cost and time estimates Facility size location and layoutas well
as equipment needs are also included
29 FINANCIAL THEORY 291 BALANCE SHEET
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 62) The balance sheet presents a
summary statement of the firmrsquos financial position at a given time The statement
balances the firmrsquos assets (what it owns) against its financing which can be either
debt (what it owes) or equity (what was provided by owners) Below is the example
of balance sheet from Bartlettrsquos Company
Figure 26 Bartlett Company Balance Sheets Source Gitman amp Zitter 2012
39
The assets are listed from the most liquid (cash) ndash down to the least liquid
Marketable securities are very liquid short-term investments held by the firm
Because they are highly liquid marketable securities are viewed as a form of cash
(ldquonear cashrdquo) Accounts receivable represent the total monies owed the firm by its
customers on credit sales Inventories include raw materials work in process
(partially finished goods) and finished goods held by the firm The entry for gross
fixed assets is the original cost of all fixed (long-term) assets owned by the firm Net
fixed assets represent the difference between gross fixed assets and accumulated
depreciation ndash the total expense recorded for the depreciation of fixed assets The net
value of fixed assets is called their book value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
The liabilities and equity accounts are listed from short-term to long-
term Current liabilities include accounts payable amounts owed for credit
purchases by the firm notes payable outstanding short-term loans typically
from commercial banks and accruals amounts owed for services for which a bill
may not or will not be received Examples of accruals include taxes due the
government and wages due employees Long-term debt represents debt for which
payment is not due in the current year Stockholdersrsquo equity represents the
ownersrsquo claims on the firm The preferred stock entry shows the historical
proceeds from the sale of preferred stock(Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
40
292 INCOME STATEMENT
The income statement provides a financial summary of the firmrsquos operating
results during a specified period Most common are income statements covering a 1-
year period ending at a specified date ordinarily December 31 of the calendar year
Many large firms however operate on a 12-month financial cycle or fiscal year that
ends at a time other than December 31 In addition monthly income statements are
typically prepared for use by management and quarterly statements must be made
available to the stockholders of publicly owned corporations (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 59-60) The example of income statement is shown below
Figure 27 Bartlett Company Income
Statement Source GitmanampZitter2012
293 CASH FLOW ANALYSIS
A cash flow statement is one of the most important financial statements for a
project or business The statement can be as simple as a one page analysis or may
41
involve several schedules that feed information into a central statement A cash flow
statement is a listing of the flows of cash into and out of the business or project
Many cash flows are constructed with multiple time periods
For example it may list monthly cash inflows and outflows over a yearrsquos time
It not only projects the cash balance remaining at the end of the year but also
the cash balance for each month (wwwextensioniastateedu 2013) Some cash
flow budgets are constructed so that we can monitor the accuracy of our projections
These budgets allow us to make monthly cash flow projections for the coming year
and also enter actual inflows and outflows as we progress through the year This
will allow us to compare your projections to your actual cash flows and make
adjustments to the projections for the remainder of the year
Figure 28 Example of
Cash Flow Source
Gitman ampZitter 2012
Even though cash flow and profitability are closely related they are different
42
A cash flow statement lists cash inflows and cash outflows while the income
statement lists income and expenses A cash flow statement shows liquidity while an
income statement shows profitability
294 PAYBACK PERIOD
Payback periods are commonly used to evaluate proposed investments The
payback period is the amount of time required for the firm to recover its initial
investment in a project as calculated from cash inflows The payback period can be
found by dividing the initial investment by the annual cash inflow When the
payback period is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the following decision
criteria apply
If the payback period is less than the maximum acceptable payback
period accept the project
If the payback period is greater than the maximum acceptable payback
period reject the project
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 393) the length of the maximum
acceptable payback period is determined by management This value is set
subjectively on the basis of a number of factors including the type of project
(expansion replacement or renewal other) the perceived risk of the project and the
perceived relationship between the payback period and the share value It is simply a
value that management feels on average will result in value-creating investment
decisions
43
By measuring how quickly the firm recovers its initial investment the
payback period also gives implicit consideration to the timing of cash flows and
therefore to the time value of money Because it can be viewed as a measure of
risk exposure many firms use the payback period as a decision criterion or as a
supplement to other decision techniques The longer the firm must wait to recover
its invested funds the greater the possibility of a calamity Hence the shorter the
payback period the lower the firmrsquos risk exposure A second weakness is that this
approach fails to take fully into account the time factor in the value of money A
third weakness of payback is its failure to recognize cash flows that occur after the
payback period (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 394-396)
Figure 29 Calculation of
Payback Period Source
Gitman amp Zitter 2012
44
295 NET PRESENT VALUE (NPV)
The method used by most large companies to evaluate investment projects is
called net present value (NPV) The intuition behind the NPV method is simple
When firms make investments they are spending money that they obtained in one
form or another from investors Investors expect a return on the money that they give
to firms so a firm should undertake an investment only if the present value of the
cash flow that the investment generates is greater than the cost of making the
investment in the first place
Because the NPV method takes into account the time value of investorsrsquo
money it is a more sophisticated capital budgeting technique than the payback rule
The NPV method discounts the firmrsquos cash flows at the firmrsquos cost of capital This
rate is the minimum return that must be earned on a project to satisfy the firmrsquos
investors Projects with lower returns fail to meet investorsrsquo expectations and
therefore decrease firm value and projects with higher returns increase firm
value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
The net present value (NPV) is found by subtracting a projectrsquos initial
investment (CF0) from the present value of its cash inflows (CFt) discounted at a
rate equal to the firmrsquos cost of capital (r) as shown below
NPV = Present value of cash inflows - Initial investment
When NPV is used both inflows and outflows are measured in terms of
45
present dollars For a project that has cash outflows beyond the initial investment the
net present value of a project would be found by subtracting the present value of
outflows from the present value of inflows When NPV is used to make accept reject
decisions the decision criteria are as follows
If the NPV is greater than $0 accept the project
If the NPV is less than $0 reject the project
If the NPV is greater than $0 the firm will earn a return greater than its cost of
capital Such action should increase the market value of the firm and therefore the
wealth of its owners by an amount equal to the NPV (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
296 INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN (IRR)
The internal rate of return (IRR) is one of the most widely used capital
budgeting techniques The internal rate of return (IRR) is the discount rate that
equates the NPV of an investment opportunity with $0 (because the present value of
cash inflows equals the initial investment) It is the rate of return that the firm will
earn if it invests in the project and receives the given cash inflows (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 401)
When IRR is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the decision criteria are as
follows
If the IRR is greater than the cost of capital accept the project
46
If the IRR is less than the cost of capital reject the project
To calculate IRR Most financial calculators have a pre-programmed IRR
function that can be used to simplify the IRR calculation With these calculators you
merely punch in all cash flows just as if to calculate NPV and then depress IRR to
find the internal rate of return Computer software including spreadsheets is also
available for simplifying these calculations All NPV and IRR values presented in
this and subsequent chapters are obtained by using these functions on a popular
financial calculator (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 402)
297 COST OF GOOD SOLD (COGS)
Cost of goods sold is the direct costs attributable to the production of the
goods sold by a company This amount includes the cost of the materials used in
creating the good along with the direct labor costs used to produce the good It
excludes indirect expenses such as distribution costs and sales force costs
COGS is the costs that go into creating the products that a company sells
therefore the only costs included in the measure are those that are directly tied to the
production of the products For example the COGS for an automaker would include
the material costs for the parts that go into making the car along with the labor costs
used to put the car together The cost of sending the cars to dealerships and the cost of
the labor used to sell the car would be excluded
The exact costs included in the COGS calculation will differ from one type
of business to another The cost of goods attributed to a companys products are
47
expensed as the company sells these goods In summary for manufacturers COGS is
the cost of buying raw materials and manufacturing finished products For retailers
itrsquos the cost of obtaining or buying the products sold to customers If the company is
in a service industry COGS is the cost of the service it offers
48
49
50
22
24 BUSINESS MODEL (NINE BUILDING BLOCKS)
The aim for this business model is to give visualization about how the
business wills works The idea it is included the purpose of the business operational
process and the business strategy therefore the model will give a specific concept to
be succeed in the future
Figure 22 Nine Building Blocks
Source Osterwalder amp Pigneur 2010
The canvas business model contain of nine important points it is define as nine
building blocks This model management strategic tools that could be develop for
new business or existing business The nine building blocks is cover as the following
23
1 Customer segments Target of the customers that define as a group of people
to reach and served
2 Value propositions It is the product and service that being offered to the
customer
3 Channels Defines how the business able to communicate and reach the
customer segment
4 Customer relationship Describes how to maintain the relationship between
the company and customers
5 Revenue streams Represent the cash that the company generate from the
customers
6 Key resources the assets and important source that the business need to
required thus the business will works
7 Key activities It s describe what the company activity do to run the business
8 Key partnership it is explains relationship networking between the suppliers
and partners that can support the company
9 Cost structure Expenses that the company must take in order to
manufacturing the product
Before going further into the innovation first a business need to create the
business model idea This is important to generate the idea of business and make into
a successful one (Osterwalder amp Pigneur 2010136)
24
25 PORTER FIVE FORCES MODEL
To analyze the structure of the business Five Forces Model is one of the
suggested frameworks to define the industry advantage and competitive advantage
with industry structure as the key to determinant it (Grimm Curtis M et al 200651)
Figure 23 Five Forces Model
Source Grimm Curtis Met al 2006
1 Threat new entrant
There are several factors that affect the threat of the new entry as the
following
a Entry barriers This is the ability of the product to enter the market If
the entry barriers are high it means the threat of the new entrant are
low and if the entry barriers are low the threat of new entrant are high
25
b Customer demand When the customer demand of product and service
are high threat of the possibility of new entrant is high since the
industry not be able to handle
c Product or service differentiation If the product can make
differentiation with new innovation then the threat is high
2 Threat of substitute products or service
The threat of substitute increased if there is competitor that can offer
better competitive price to the market
3 Bargaining power of customer
There are several factors that affect the bargaining power of customer as
the following
a Reputation When the product or service has a good reputation the
bargaining power of supplier will be low since the customer will have
no choice to select other product
b Switching cost High switching cost means the customer not easy to
switch to other competitor
c Quality of product and service Customers will buy the better quality
of the product even though the price is the same
d The number of the other industry competitor If the numbers of the
competitor are low the bargaining power of the customer also low
When the numbers of the competitors are high then the bargaining
power of the customer will be high
26
e Dependency to the product or service The bargaining power of the
customer will be low if a product have the ability to create a
dependency to the customer
4 Bargaining power of suppliers
There are some factors that affect the bargaining power of suppliers as the
following
a The number of supplier If the number of the supplier of the industry
are low then the bargaining power of the supplier are high and if the
number of the supplier are high then the bargaining power of supplier
are low
b Switching cost High switching cost in the product and service then it
is hard to change to another supplier
c Quality of the product serviceIt is very common to switch to another
supplier once the quality of product and service are low on the other
hand if the quality of the product and service are high there is not a n
option to change to other supplier
d Product or service availability The bargaining power of supplier will
be low if the availability of the product is high
e Image of the supplier If the supplier has a great image and status in
the industry then it will follow by the higher bargaining power
5 Intensity of competitive rivalry
Intensity of the industry will be high when there is other service and
products operate that involve many players which can be dominant or similar
27
26 SWOT ANALYSIS
A Way to monitoring the external and internal marketing environment is by using
SWOT analysis (Kotler Keller 2012 70) In their book Osterwalder and Pigneur
(2010 224) mentioned that a SWOT analysis in the business model yields two
results
1 Provides a snapshot of where is our business are (strength and weakness as
internal environment)
2 Suggest some future trajectories (opportunities and threats as external
environment)
SWOT analysis is such an important part in the process of designing business model
prototypes
A business unit must monitor key macro environment forces and significant
micro environment factors that affect is ability to earn profits An opportunity is the
are of buyer need an interest that a company has a high probability of profitability
satisfying Meanwhile a threat is a challenge posed by an unfavorable trend or
development that in the absence of defensive marketing action would led to lower
sales or profit (Kotler Keller 2012 71)
Meanwhile as an evaluation the business itself has to looking to its strength
and weaknesses By looking on these points the business could consider whether it
should limit itself to those opportunities for which it possesses the required strength
or consider those that might require it to find or develop new strength
28
261 TOWS MATRIX
Based on the journal from Heinz Weihrich (1982) Tows Matrix is a variant of
the classic business tool SWOT Analysis TOWS and SWOT are acronyms for
different arrangements of the words Strengths Weaknesses Opportunities and
Threats
Here are four basic strategies depending on the prevalence of the analyzed
group of factors (positive or negative) in the environment and within the company
SO situation - maxi-maxi strategy This situation applies to the company for
which dominates strengths in the environment and opportunities within This
situation corresponds to the maxi-maxi strategy strong expansion and
diversified development
WO situation - mini-maxi strategy In this situation company has the more
vulnerabilities - weaknesses but its environment gives more opportunities
The strategy should include the use of these opportunities while reducing or
correcting weaknesses within the organization
ST situation - maxi-mini strategy The source of development difficulties for
the company are unfavorable external conditions (prevalence of threats) The
company may use large internal strengths in attempt to overcome threats from
environment
WT situation - mini-mini strategy The company in this case is devoid of any
development opportunities It operates in hostile environments and its
29
potential for change is small It does not have significant strengths which
could withstand threats Mini-mini strategy boils down to a pessimistic
version of the liquidation or in optimistic situation - to strive for survival or
merger with another organization
Figure 24 TOWS Matrix Source Weihrich (1982)
27 MARKETING THEORY
The American Marketing Association define marketing as the activity set of
institutions and process for creating communication delivering and exchanging
offerings that have value for customers clients partners and society at large (Kotler
Keller 2012 27) Peter Drucker a leading management theorist said that the aim of
marketing is to make selling superfluous Successful marketing need and
30
understanding creating delivering capturing and sustaining customer value The
marketing plan is the central instrument for directing and coordinating the marketing
effort
271 Marketing Management
Based on (Kotler amp Amstrong 2010) the marketing management is analysis
planning implementation and programs control that made for created developed
and maintenance the transaction for gain the benefit based on the company purposed
Company management consist of demand that relationship with the customers
272 Segmenting Targeting Positioning
Based on (Kotler 2001) there are many consumers with differential needs so
the company must share the market choose good segmentation and also made some
appropriate strategy to gain a big benefit than other competitors Those strategies
process consist of there point which are
1 Market Segmentation
Segmentation is the share consumer activity into a more homogenous group m
hopes of a response is obtained such as buy wear accept and believe On the
practice segmentation market is the process share market into group
consumer based on their needs characteristic behavior and differentiation
mix market (Kasali 203) Based on (Kotler 2003) there are 3 main
segmentations of variable which are
31
a Geographic segmentation
Dividing market into different geographical units such as nations
states regions countries cities and neighborhoods
b Demographic segmentation
Dividing market into groups based on demographic variables such as
age gender family size family life cycle income occupation
education religion race and nationality
c Psychographic segmentation
Dividing a market into different groups based on social class lifestyle
or personality characteristic
Based on (Kotler 2003) that the market segment can drive so the
segment of the market must have 5 characteristics which are
Measurable size of the segment purchasing power of the
segment we want to reach and the last one is characteristic of
the segment can be measurable
Substantial a segment becomes the unity of homogeny group
that have a power to gain benefit if the program and marketing
drive by these groups
Accessible the segment that must be reach and served
effectively
32
Differentiable that the segments can be separate by conceptual
and respond differently to the program and the different
elements of the marketing mix
Actionable the program have made effectively that must be
implemented to attract and serve the segments
2 Market Targeting
These methods purpose to establish target market evaluation process begins
with the attractiveness of each market segment and has one or more segments
most benefit to be entered Based on (Kotler 2003) these are 5 patterns that
we can used to enter the market which are
a Single segment concentration
Concentrate with one segment the company get the knowledge
about what the market needs that to be the reach target market
and get a strong minded of consumers in that segment This
pattern have a high risk if there are saturation occurs in this
segment the company faces the risk of losing the entire market
b Selective specialization
On this pattern the company can choose the segment market
that where segment must gain the benefit The advantage of
this pattern are the ability of the company to reduce the risk
lower
c Product specialization
33
This pattern showed the company produced the goods which
will be sold in some segments
d Market specialization
The market showed that company produced the goods and sell
to the one segment the advantages if this pattern the company
have a high reputation from the consumer that segment market
have been entered
e Full market coverage
On this pattern the company try to reach whole market with
produced what consumer needs with the differential product to
gain the whole market the entered
3 Market Positioning
Market positioning is the activity of the company to place their product on the
market so their product get a clear position distinguishable as well as more
expected than competing production the minds of the target consumers that
will provide huge benefits in the target market
Based on (Kotler 2003) the company must avoid the four main errors in
placing market position which are
a Under positioning
It is mean the placement too low that causing superficial
picture of the product so consumer have a low response to the
product
b Over positioning
34
The placement is too high so it can cause the false perception
from consumers on the price of the product so consumers are
reluctant to buy because they think price is too high
c Confused positioning
Confusing placement of the product because the company too
often change their market position
d Doubtful positioning
Dubious product placement the effect of this position the
consumers distrust of the product
273 Marketing Mix
Based on (Kotler ampAmstrong 2010) marketing mix is a unity of the tools of
marketing that the tactical as well as directed and used by the company to produce the
desired response target market Marketing mix is a modern marketing theory
Marketing mix defined as the set of marketing tools that the form use to pursue its
marketing objective in the target market (Kotler 1994 98) Based on the Journal
Marketing by Chai Lee Goi Marketing mix is not scientific theory but a conceptual
framework that identifies the principal decision making manager make in configuring
their offerings to suit consumersrsquo needs (Lee Chai Goi 2009 1) To gain the benefit
for the company marketing mix is the weapon that company usually used to get the
change on the market That changed was grouped by four strategies named ldquo4Psrdquo
that consist of product price place and promotion
35
Product
Product is goods or services that company offered to the market
Price
Price is the several money that consumer must pay to buy a product
Place
Place (distribution) not only represent that the product can achieve or known
but also activity that company do for the product the produced easy to get at
the market and consumers
Promotion
Is the activity that company do to communicate their product and get the
consumer to reach their product Consist of advertising events sponsorship
and other activity are summarized in the Integrated Marketing
Communication (IMC)
Booms and Bitner is suggested 3 other elements beides the traditional 4Prsquos by
Kotler for service business which are (wwwlenamarketingnet 2013)
Physical Evidence
Is about where the service is being delivered from This element will
differentiate the company with other
Process
This element of the marketing mix looks at the used to deliver the service
36
People
People are essential ingredients in service provision recruiting and training
the right staff is required to create a competitive advantage
28 OPERATIONAL MANAGEMENT 281 THE SERVICE DESIGN PROCESS Service design is more comprehensive and occurs more often than product
design The inherent variability of service processes requires that the service system
be carefully designed The service concept defines the target customer and the desired
customer experience The service design process must be different and unique from
others to make the product selling point It also defines how onersquos service is
different from others and how it will compete in the marketplace Sometimes
services are successful because their service concept fills a previously unoccupied
niche or differs from the generally accepted mode of operation (Rusell amp Taylor
2011 193)
37
Figure 25 The Service Design Process Source Rusell amp Taylor2011
From the service concept a service package is created to meet customer
needs The package consists of a mixture of physical items sensual
benefits and psychological benefits Effective service design recognizes and
defines all the components of a service package Finding the appropriate mix of
physical items and sensual and psychological benefits and designing them to be
consistent with each other and the service concept is also important (Rusell amp
Taylor 2011 194) From the service package service specifications are developed
for performance design and delivery Performance specifications outline
expectations and requirements for general and specific customers
Performance specifications are converted into design specifications and finally
delivery specifications Design specifications must describe the service in
sufficient detail for the desired service experience to be replicated for different
individuals at numerous locations The specifications typically consist of
38
activities to be performed skill requirements and guidelines for service
providers and cost and time estimates Facility size location and layoutas well
as equipment needs are also included
29 FINANCIAL THEORY 291 BALANCE SHEET
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 62) The balance sheet presents a
summary statement of the firmrsquos financial position at a given time The statement
balances the firmrsquos assets (what it owns) against its financing which can be either
debt (what it owes) or equity (what was provided by owners) Below is the example
of balance sheet from Bartlettrsquos Company
Figure 26 Bartlett Company Balance Sheets Source Gitman amp Zitter 2012
39
The assets are listed from the most liquid (cash) ndash down to the least liquid
Marketable securities are very liquid short-term investments held by the firm
Because they are highly liquid marketable securities are viewed as a form of cash
(ldquonear cashrdquo) Accounts receivable represent the total monies owed the firm by its
customers on credit sales Inventories include raw materials work in process
(partially finished goods) and finished goods held by the firm The entry for gross
fixed assets is the original cost of all fixed (long-term) assets owned by the firm Net
fixed assets represent the difference between gross fixed assets and accumulated
depreciation ndash the total expense recorded for the depreciation of fixed assets The net
value of fixed assets is called their book value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
The liabilities and equity accounts are listed from short-term to long-
term Current liabilities include accounts payable amounts owed for credit
purchases by the firm notes payable outstanding short-term loans typically
from commercial banks and accruals amounts owed for services for which a bill
may not or will not be received Examples of accruals include taxes due the
government and wages due employees Long-term debt represents debt for which
payment is not due in the current year Stockholdersrsquo equity represents the
ownersrsquo claims on the firm The preferred stock entry shows the historical
proceeds from the sale of preferred stock(Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
40
292 INCOME STATEMENT
The income statement provides a financial summary of the firmrsquos operating
results during a specified period Most common are income statements covering a 1-
year period ending at a specified date ordinarily December 31 of the calendar year
Many large firms however operate on a 12-month financial cycle or fiscal year that
ends at a time other than December 31 In addition monthly income statements are
typically prepared for use by management and quarterly statements must be made
available to the stockholders of publicly owned corporations (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 59-60) The example of income statement is shown below
Figure 27 Bartlett Company Income
Statement Source GitmanampZitter2012
293 CASH FLOW ANALYSIS
A cash flow statement is one of the most important financial statements for a
project or business The statement can be as simple as a one page analysis or may
41
involve several schedules that feed information into a central statement A cash flow
statement is a listing of the flows of cash into and out of the business or project
Many cash flows are constructed with multiple time periods
For example it may list monthly cash inflows and outflows over a yearrsquos time
It not only projects the cash balance remaining at the end of the year but also
the cash balance for each month (wwwextensioniastateedu 2013) Some cash
flow budgets are constructed so that we can monitor the accuracy of our projections
These budgets allow us to make monthly cash flow projections for the coming year
and also enter actual inflows and outflows as we progress through the year This
will allow us to compare your projections to your actual cash flows and make
adjustments to the projections for the remainder of the year
Figure 28 Example of
Cash Flow Source
Gitman ampZitter 2012
Even though cash flow and profitability are closely related they are different
42
A cash flow statement lists cash inflows and cash outflows while the income
statement lists income and expenses A cash flow statement shows liquidity while an
income statement shows profitability
294 PAYBACK PERIOD
Payback periods are commonly used to evaluate proposed investments The
payback period is the amount of time required for the firm to recover its initial
investment in a project as calculated from cash inflows The payback period can be
found by dividing the initial investment by the annual cash inflow When the
payback period is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the following decision
criteria apply
If the payback period is less than the maximum acceptable payback
period accept the project
If the payback period is greater than the maximum acceptable payback
period reject the project
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 393) the length of the maximum
acceptable payback period is determined by management This value is set
subjectively on the basis of a number of factors including the type of project
(expansion replacement or renewal other) the perceived risk of the project and the
perceived relationship between the payback period and the share value It is simply a
value that management feels on average will result in value-creating investment
decisions
43
By measuring how quickly the firm recovers its initial investment the
payback period also gives implicit consideration to the timing of cash flows and
therefore to the time value of money Because it can be viewed as a measure of
risk exposure many firms use the payback period as a decision criterion or as a
supplement to other decision techniques The longer the firm must wait to recover
its invested funds the greater the possibility of a calamity Hence the shorter the
payback period the lower the firmrsquos risk exposure A second weakness is that this
approach fails to take fully into account the time factor in the value of money A
third weakness of payback is its failure to recognize cash flows that occur after the
payback period (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 394-396)
Figure 29 Calculation of
Payback Period Source
Gitman amp Zitter 2012
44
295 NET PRESENT VALUE (NPV)
The method used by most large companies to evaluate investment projects is
called net present value (NPV) The intuition behind the NPV method is simple
When firms make investments they are spending money that they obtained in one
form or another from investors Investors expect a return on the money that they give
to firms so a firm should undertake an investment only if the present value of the
cash flow that the investment generates is greater than the cost of making the
investment in the first place
Because the NPV method takes into account the time value of investorsrsquo
money it is a more sophisticated capital budgeting technique than the payback rule
The NPV method discounts the firmrsquos cash flows at the firmrsquos cost of capital This
rate is the minimum return that must be earned on a project to satisfy the firmrsquos
investors Projects with lower returns fail to meet investorsrsquo expectations and
therefore decrease firm value and projects with higher returns increase firm
value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
The net present value (NPV) is found by subtracting a projectrsquos initial
investment (CF0) from the present value of its cash inflows (CFt) discounted at a
rate equal to the firmrsquos cost of capital (r) as shown below
NPV = Present value of cash inflows - Initial investment
When NPV is used both inflows and outflows are measured in terms of
45
present dollars For a project that has cash outflows beyond the initial investment the
net present value of a project would be found by subtracting the present value of
outflows from the present value of inflows When NPV is used to make accept reject
decisions the decision criteria are as follows
If the NPV is greater than $0 accept the project
If the NPV is less than $0 reject the project
If the NPV is greater than $0 the firm will earn a return greater than its cost of
capital Such action should increase the market value of the firm and therefore the
wealth of its owners by an amount equal to the NPV (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
296 INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN (IRR)
The internal rate of return (IRR) is one of the most widely used capital
budgeting techniques The internal rate of return (IRR) is the discount rate that
equates the NPV of an investment opportunity with $0 (because the present value of
cash inflows equals the initial investment) It is the rate of return that the firm will
earn if it invests in the project and receives the given cash inflows (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 401)
When IRR is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the decision criteria are as
follows
If the IRR is greater than the cost of capital accept the project
46
If the IRR is less than the cost of capital reject the project
To calculate IRR Most financial calculators have a pre-programmed IRR
function that can be used to simplify the IRR calculation With these calculators you
merely punch in all cash flows just as if to calculate NPV and then depress IRR to
find the internal rate of return Computer software including spreadsheets is also
available for simplifying these calculations All NPV and IRR values presented in
this and subsequent chapters are obtained by using these functions on a popular
financial calculator (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 402)
297 COST OF GOOD SOLD (COGS)
Cost of goods sold is the direct costs attributable to the production of the
goods sold by a company This amount includes the cost of the materials used in
creating the good along with the direct labor costs used to produce the good It
excludes indirect expenses such as distribution costs and sales force costs
COGS is the costs that go into creating the products that a company sells
therefore the only costs included in the measure are those that are directly tied to the
production of the products For example the COGS for an automaker would include
the material costs for the parts that go into making the car along with the labor costs
used to put the car together The cost of sending the cars to dealerships and the cost of
the labor used to sell the car would be excluded
The exact costs included in the COGS calculation will differ from one type
of business to another The cost of goods attributed to a companys products are
47
expensed as the company sells these goods In summary for manufacturers COGS is
the cost of buying raw materials and manufacturing finished products For retailers
itrsquos the cost of obtaining or buying the products sold to customers If the company is
in a service industry COGS is the cost of the service it offers
48
49
50
23
1 Customer segments Target of the customers that define as a group of people
to reach and served
2 Value propositions It is the product and service that being offered to the
customer
3 Channels Defines how the business able to communicate and reach the
customer segment
4 Customer relationship Describes how to maintain the relationship between
the company and customers
5 Revenue streams Represent the cash that the company generate from the
customers
6 Key resources the assets and important source that the business need to
required thus the business will works
7 Key activities It s describe what the company activity do to run the business
8 Key partnership it is explains relationship networking between the suppliers
and partners that can support the company
9 Cost structure Expenses that the company must take in order to
manufacturing the product
Before going further into the innovation first a business need to create the
business model idea This is important to generate the idea of business and make into
a successful one (Osterwalder amp Pigneur 2010136)
24
25 PORTER FIVE FORCES MODEL
To analyze the structure of the business Five Forces Model is one of the
suggested frameworks to define the industry advantage and competitive advantage
with industry structure as the key to determinant it (Grimm Curtis M et al 200651)
Figure 23 Five Forces Model
Source Grimm Curtis Met al 2006
1 Threat new entrant
There are several factors that affect the threat of the new entry as the
following
a Entry barriers This is the ability of the product to enter the market If
the entry barriers are high it means the threat of the new entrant are
low and if the entry barriers are low the threat of new entrant are high
25
b Customer demand When the customer demand of product and service
are high threat of the possibility of new entrant is high since the
industry not be able to handle
c Product or service differentiation If the product can make
differentiation with new innovation then the threat is high
2 Threat of substitute products or service
The threat of substitute increased if there is competitor that can offer
better competitive price to the market
3 Bargaining power of customer
There are several factors that affect the bargaining power of customer as
the following
a Reputation When the product or service has a good reputation the
bargaining power of supplier will be low since the customer will have
no choice to select other product
b Switching cost High switching cost means the customer not easy to
switch to other competitor
c Quality of product and service Customers will buy the better quality
of the product even though the price is the same
d The number of the other industry competitor If the numbers of the
competitor are low the bargaining power of the customer also low
When the numbers of the competitors are high then the bargaining
power of the customer will be high
26
e Dependency to the product or service The bargaining power of the
customer will be low if a product have the ability to create a
dependency to the customer
4 Bargaining power of suppliers
There are some factors that affect the bargaining power of suppliers as the
following
a The number of supplier If the number of the supplier of the industry
are low then the bargaining power of the supplier are high and if the
number of the supplier are high then the bargaining power of supplier
are low
b Switching cost High switching cost in the product and service then it
is hard to change to another supplier
c Quality of the product serviceIt is very common to switch to another
supplier once the quality of product and service are low on the other
hand if the quality of the product and service are high there is not a n
option to change to other supplier
d Product or service availability The bargaining power of supplier will
be low if the availability of the product is high
e Image of the supplier If the supplier has a great image and status in
the industry then it will follow by the higher bargaining power
5 Intensity of competitive rivalry
Intensity of the industry will be high when there is other service and
products operate that involve many players which can be dominant or similar
27
26 SWOT ANALYSIS
A Way to monitoring the external and internal marketing environment is by using
SWOT analysis (Kotler Keller 2012 70) In their book Osterwalder and Pigneur
(2010 224) mentioned that a SWOT analysis in the business model yields two
results
1 Provides a snapshot of where is our business are (strength and weakness as
internal environment)
2 Suggest some future trajectories (opportunities and threats as external
environment)
SWOT analysis is such an important part in the process of designing business model
prototypes
A business unit must monitor key macro environment forces and significant
micro environment factors that affect is ability to earn profits An opportunity is the
are of buyer need an interest that a company has a high probability of profitability
satisfying Meanwhile a threat is a challenge posed by an unfavorable trend or
development that in the absence of defensive marketing action would led to lower
sales or profit (Kotler Keller 2012 71)
Meanwhile as an evaluation the business itself has to looking to its strength
and weaknesses By looking on these points the business could consider whether it
should limit itself to those opportunities for which it possesses the required strength
or consider those that might require it to find or develop new strength
28
261 TOWS MATRIX
Based on the journal from Heinz Weihrich (1982) Tows Matrix is a variant of
the classic business tool SWOT Analysis TOWS and SWOT are acronyms for
different arrangements of the words Strengths Weaknesses Opportunities and
Threats
Here are four basic strategies depending on the prevalence of the analyzed
group of factors (positive or negative) in the environment and within the company
SO situation - maxi-maxi strategy This situation applies to the company for
which dominates strengths in the environment and opportunities within This
situation corresponds to the maxi-maxi strategy strong expansion and
diversified development
WO situation - mini-maxi strategy In this situation company has the more
vulnerabilities - weaknesses but its environment gives more opportunities
The strategy should include the use of these opportunities while reducing or
correcting weaknesses within the organization
ST situation - maxi-mini strategy The source of development difficulties for
the company are unfavorable external conditions (prevalence of threats) The
company may use large internal strengths in attempt to overcome threats from
environment
WT situation - mini-mini strategy The company in this case is devoid of any
development opportunities It operates in hostile environments and its
29
potential for change is small It does not have significant strengths which
could withstand threats Mini-mini strategy boils down to a pessimistic
version of the liquidation or in optimistic situation - to strive for survival or
merger with another organization
Figure 24 TOWS Matrix Source Weihrich (1982)
27 MARKETING THEORY
The American Marketing Association define marketing as the activity set of
institutions and process for creating communication delivering and exchanging
offerings that have value for customers clients partners and society at large (Kotler
Keller 2012 27) Peter Drucker a leading management theorist said that the aim of
marketing is to make selling superfluous Successful marketing need and
30
understanding creating delivering capturing and sustaining customer value The
marketing plan is the central instrument for directing and coordinating the marketing
effort
271 Marketing Management
Based on (Kotler amp Amstrong 2010) the marketing management is analysis
planning implementation and programs control that made for created developed
and maintenance the transaction for gain the benefit based on the company purposed
Company management consist of demand that relationship with the customers
272 Segmenting Targeting Positioning
Based on (Kotler 2001) there are many consumers with differential needs so
the company must share the market choose good segmentation and also made some
appropriate strategy to gain a big benefit than other competitors Those strategies
process consist of there point which are
1 Market Segmentation
Segmentation is the share consumer activity into a more homogenous group m
hopes of a response is obtained such as buy wear accept and believe On the
practice segmentation market is the process share market into group
consumer based on their needs characteristic behavior and differentiation
mix market (Kasali 203) Based on (Kotler 2003) there are 3 main
segmentations of variable which are
31
a Geographic segmentation
Dividing market into different geographical units such as nations
states regions countries cities and neighborhoods
b Demographic segmentation
Dividing market into groups based on demographic variables such as
age gender family size family life cycle income occupation
education religion race and nationality
c Psychographic segmentation
Dividing a market into different groups based on social class lifestyle
or personality characteristic
Based on (Kotler 2003) that the market segment can drive so the
segment of the market must have 5 characteristics which are
Measurable size of the segment purchasing power of the
segment we want to reach and the last one is characteristic of
the segment can be measurable
Substantial a segment becomes the unity of homogeny group
that have a power to gain benefit if the program and marketing
drive by these groups
Accessible the segment that must be reach and served
effectively
32
Differentiable that the segments can be separate by conceptual
and respond differently to the program and the different
elements of the marketing mix
Actionable the program have made effectively that must be
implemented to attract and serve the segments
2 Market Targeting
These methods purpose to establish target market evaluation process begins
with the attractiveness of each market segment and has one or more segments
most benefit to be entered Based on (Kotler 2003) these are 5 patterns that
we can used to enter the market which are
a Single segment concentration
Concentrate with one segment the company get the knowledge
about what the market needs that to be the reach target market
and get a strong minded of consumers in that segment This
pattern have a high risk if there are saturation occurs in this
segment the company faces the risk of losing the entire market
b Selective specialization
On this pattern the company can choose the segment market
that where segment must gain the benefit The advantage of
this pattern are the ability of the company to reduce the risk
lower
c Product specialization
33
This pattern showed the company produced the goods which
will be sold in some segments
d Market specialization
The market showed that company produced the goods and sell
to the one segment the advantages if this pattern the company
have a high reputation from the consumer that segment market
have been entered
e Full market coverage
On this pattern the company try to reach whole market with
produced what consumer needs with the differential product to
gain the whole market the entered
3 Market Positioning
Market positioning is the activity of the company to place their product on the
market so their product get a clear position distinguishable as well as more
expected than competing production the minds of the target consumers that
will provide huge benefits in the target market
Based on (Kotler 2003) the company must avoid the four main errors in
placing market position which are
a Under positioning
It is mean the placement too low that causing superficial
picture of the product so consumer have a low response to the
product
b Over positioning
34
The placement is too high so it can cause the false perception
from consumers on the price of the product so consumers are
reluctant to buy because they think price is too high
c Confused positioning
Confusing placement of the product because the company too
often change their market position
d Doubtful positioning
Dubious product placement the effect of this position the
consumers distrust of the product
273 Marketing Mix
Based on (Kotler ampAmstrong 2010) marketing mix is a unity of the tools of
marketing that the tactical as well as directed and used by the company to produce the
desired response target market Marketing mix is a modern marketing theory
Marketing mix defined as the set of marketing tools that the form use to pursue its
marketing objective in the target market (Kotler 1994 98) Based on the Journal
Marketing by Chai Lee Goi Marketing mix is not scientific theory but a conceptual
framework that identifies the principal decision making manager make in configuring
their offerings to suit consumersrsquo needs (Lee Chai Goi 2009 1) To gain the benefit
for the company marketing mix is the weapon that company usually used to get the
change on the market That changed was grouped by four strategies named ldquo4Psrdquo
that consist of product price place and promotion
35
Product
Product is goods or services that company offered to the market
Price
Price is the several money that consumer must pay to buy a product
Place
Place (distribution) not only represent that the product can achieve or known
but also activity that company do for the product the produced easy to get at
the market and consumers
Promotion
Is the activity that company do to communicate their product and get the
consumer to reach their product Consist of advertising events sponsorship
and other activity are summarized in the Integrated Marketing
Communication (IMC)
Booms and Bitner is suggested 3 other elements beides the traditional 4Prsquos by
Kotler for service business which are (wwwlenamarketingnet 2013)
Physical Evidence
Is about where the service is being delivered from This element will
differentiate the company with other
Process
This element of the marketing mix looks at the used to deliver the service
36
People
People are essential ingredients in service provision recruiting and training
the right staff is required to create a competitive advantage
28 OPERATIONAL MANAGEMENT 281 THE SERVICE DESIGN PROCESS Service design is more comprehensive and occurs more often than product
design The inherent variability of service processes requires that the service system
be carefully designed The service concept defines the target customer and the desired
customer experience The service design process must be different and unique from
others to make the product selling point It also defines how onersquos service is
different from others and how it will compete in the marketplace Sometimes
services are successful because their service concept fills a previously unoccupied
niche or differs from the generally accepted mode of operation (Rusell amp Taylor
2011 193)
37
Figure 25 The Service Design Process Source Rusell amp Taylor2011
From the service concept a service package is created to meet customer
needs The package consists of a mixture of physical items sensual
benefits and psychological benefits Effective service design recognizes and
defines all the components of a service package Finding the appropriate mix of
physical items and sensual and psychological benefits and designing them to be
consistent with each other and the service concept is also important (Rusell amp
Taylor 2011 194) From the service package service specifications are developed
for performance design and delivery Performance specifications outline
expectations and requirements for general and specific customers
Performance specifications are converted into design specifications and finally
delivery specifications Design specifications must describe the service in
sufficient detail for the desired service experience to be replicated for different
individuals at numerous locations The specifications typically consist of
38
activities to be performed skill requirements and guidelines for service
providers and cost and time estimates Facility size location and layoutas well
as equipment needs are also included
29 FINANCIAL THEORY 291 BALANCE SHEET
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 62) The balance sheet presents a
summary statement of the firmrsquos financial position at a given time The statement
balances the firmrsquos assets (what it owns) against its financing which can be either
debt (what it owes) or equity (what was provided by owners) Below is the example
of balance sheet from Bartlettrsquos Company
Figure 26 Bartlett Company Balance Sheets Source Gitman amp Zitter 2012
39
The assets are listed from the most liquid (cash) ndash down to the least liquid
Marketable securities are very liquid short-term investments held by the firm
Because they are highly liquid marketable securities are viewed as a form of cash
(ldquonear cashrdquo) Accounts receivable represent the total monies owed the firm by its
customers on credit sales Inventories include raw materials work in process
(partially finished goods) and finished goods held by the firm The entry for gross
fixed assets is the original cost of all fixed (long-term) assets owned by the firm Net
fixed assets represent the difference between gross fixed assets and accumulated
depreciation ndash the total expense recorded for the depreciation of fixed assets The net
value of fixed assets is called their book value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
The liabilities and equity accounts are listed from short-term to long-
term Current liabilities include accounts payable amounts owed for credit
purchases by the firm notes payable outstanding short-term loans typically
from commercial banks and accruals amounts owed for services for which a bill
may not or will not be received Examples of accruals include taxes due the
government and wages due employees Long-term debt represents debt for which
payment is not due in the current year Stockholdersrsquo equity represents the
ownersrsquo claims on the firm The preferred stock entry shows the historical
proceeds from the sale of preferred stock(Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
40
292 INCOME STATEMENT
The income statement provides a financial summary of the firmrsquos operating
results during a specified period Most common are income statements covering a 1-
year period ending at a specified date ordinarily December 31 of the calendar year
Many large firms however operate on a 12-month financial cycle or fiscal year that
ends at a time other than December 31 In addition monthly income statements are
typically prepared for use by management and quarterly statements must be made
available to the stockholders of publicly owned corporations (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 59-60) The example of income statement is shown below
Figure 27 Bartlett Company Income
Statement Source GitmanampZitter2012
293 CASH FLOW ANALYSIS
A cash flow statement is one of the most important financial statements for a
project or business The statement can be as simple as a one page analysis or may
41
involve several schedules that feed information into a central statement A cash flow
statement is a listing of the flows of cash into and out of the business or project
Many cash flows are constructed with multiple time periods
For example it may list monthly cash inflows and outflows over a yearrsquos time
It not only projects the cash balance remaining at the end of the year but also
the cash balance for each month (wwwextensioniastateedu 2013) Some cash
flow budgets are constructed so that we can monitor the accuracy of our projections
These budgets allow us to make monthly cash flow projections for the coming year
and also enter actual inflows and outflows as we progress through the year This
will allow us to compare your projections to your actual cash flows and make
adjustments to the projections for the remainder of the year
Figure 28 Example of
Cash Flow Source
Gitman ampZitter 2012
Even though cash flow and profitability are closely related they are different
42
A cash flow statement lists cash inflows and cash outflows while the income
statement lists income and expenses A cash flow statement shows liquidity while an
income statement shows profitability
294 PAYBACK PERIOD
Payback periods are commonly used to evaluate proposed investments The
payback period is the amount of time required for the firm to recover its initial
investment in a project as calculated from cash inflows The payback period can be
found by dividing the initial investment by the annual cash inflow When the
payback period is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the following decision
criteria apply
If the payback period is less than the maximum acceptable payback
period accept the project
If the payback period is greater than the maximum acceptable payback
period reject the project
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 393) the length of the maximum
acceptable payback period is determined by management This value is set
subjectively on the basis of a number of factors including the type of project
(expansion replacement or renewal other) the perceived risk of the project and the
perceived relationship between the payback period and the share value It is simply a
value that management feels on average will result in value-creating investment
decisions
43
By measuring how quickly the firm recovers its initial investment the
payback period also gives implicit consideration to the timing of cash flows and
therefore to the time value of money Because it can be viewed as a measure of
risk exposure many firms use the payback period as a decision criterion or as a
supplement to other decision techniques The longer the firm must wait to recover
its invested funds the greater the possibility of a calamity Hence the shorter the
payback period the lower the firmrsquos risk exposure A second weakness is that this
approach fails to take fully into account the time factor in the value of money A
third weakness of payback is its failure to recognize cash flows that occur after the
payback period (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 394-396)
Figure 29 Calculation of
Payback Period Source
Gitman amp Zitter 2012
44
295 NET PRESENT VALUE (NPV)
The method used by most large companies to evaluate investment projects is
called net present value (NPV) The intuition behind the NPV method is simple
When firms make investments they are spending money that they obtained in one
form or another from investors Investors expect a return on the money that they give
to firms so a firm should undertake an investment only if the present value of the
cash flow that the investment generates is greater than the cost of making the
investment in the first place
Because the NPV method takes into account the time value of investorsrsquo
money it is a more sophisticated capital budgeting technique than the payback rule
The NPV method discounts the firmrsquos cash flows at the firmrsquos cost of capital This
rate is the minimum return that must be earned on a project to satisfy the firmrsquos
investors Projects with lower returns fail to meet investorsrsquo expectations and
therefore decrease firm value and projects with higher returns increase firm
value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
The net present value (NPV) is found by subtracting a projectrsquos initial
investment (CF0) from the present value of its cash inflows (CFt) discounted at a
rate equal to the firmrsquos cost of capital (r) as shown below
NPV = Present value of cash inflows - Initial investment
When NPV is used both inflows and outflows are measured in terms of
45
present dollars For a project that has cash outflows beyond the initial investment the
net present value of a project would be found by subtracting the present value of
outflows from the present value of inflows When NPV is used to make accept reject
decisions the decision criteria are as follows
If the NPV is greater than $0 accept the project
If the NPV is less than $0 reject the project
If the NPV is greater than $0 the firm will earn a return greater than its cost of
capital Such action should increase the market value of the firm and therefore the
wealth of its owners by an amount equal to the NPV (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
296 INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN (IRR)
The internal rate of return (IRR) is one of the most widely used capital
budgeting techniques The internal rate of return (IRR) is the discount rate that
equates the NPV of an investment opportunity with $0 (because the present value of
cash inflows equals the initial investment) It is the rate of return that the firm will
earn if it invests in the project and receives the given cash inflows (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 401)
When IRR is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the decision criteria are as
follows
If the IRR is greater than the cost of capital accept the project
46
If the IRR is less than the cost of capital reject the project
To calculate IRR Most financial calculators have a pre-programmed IRR
function that can be used to simplify the IRR calculation With these calculators you
merely punch in all cash flows just as if to calculate NPV and then depress IRR to
find the internal rate of return Computer software including spreadsheets is also
available for simplifying these calculations All NPV and IRR values presented in
this and subsequent chapters are obtained by using these functions on a popular
financial calculator (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 402)
297 COST OF GOOD SOLD (COGS)
Cost of goods sold is the direct costs attributable to the production of the
goods sold by a company This amount includes the cost of the materials used in
creating the good along with the direct labor costs used to produce the good It
excludes indirect expenses such as distribution costs and sales force costs
COGS is the costs that go into creating the products that a company sells
therefore the only costs included in the measure are those that are directly tied to the
production of the products For example the COGS for an automaker would include
the material costs for the parts that go into making the car along with the labor costs
used to put the car together The cost of sending the cars to dealerships and the cost of
the labor used to sell the car would be excluded
The exact costs included in the COGS calculation will differ from one type
of business to another The cost of goods attributed to a companys products are
47
expensed as the company sells these goods In summary for manufacturers COGS is
the cost of buying raw materials and manufacturing finished products For retailers
itrsquos the cost of obtaining or buying the products sold to customers If the company is
in a service industry COGS is the cost of the service it offers
48
49
50
24
25 PORTER FIVE FORCES MODEL
To analyze the structure of the business Five Forces Model is one of the
suggested frameworks to define the industry advantage and competitive advantage
with industry structure as the key to determinant it (Grimm Curtis M et al 200651)
Figure 23 Five Forces Model
Source Grimm Curtis Met al 2006
1 Threat new entrant
There are several factors that affect the threat of the new entry as the
following
a Entry barriers This is the ability of the product to enter the market If
the entry barriers are high it means the threat of the new entrant are
low and if the entry barriers are low the threat of new entrant are high
25
b Customer demand When the customer demand of product and service
are high threat of the possibility of new entrant is high since the
industry not be able to handle
c Product or service differentiation If the product can make
differentiation with new innovation then the threat is high
2 Threat of substitute products or service
The threat of substitute increased if there is competitor that can offer
better competitive price to the market
3 Bargaining power of customer
There are several factors that affect the bargaining power of customer as
the following
a Reputation When the product or service has a good reputation the
bargaining power of supplier will be low since the customer will have
no choice to select other product
b Switching cost High switching cost means the customer not easy to
switch to other competitor
c Quality of product and service Customers will buy the better quality
of the product even though the price is the same
d The number of the other industry competitor If the numbers of the
competitor are low the bargaining power of the customer also low
When the numbers of the competitors are high then the bargaining
power of the customer will be high
26
e Dependency to the product or service The bargaining power of the
customer will be low if a product have the ability to create a
dependency to the customer
4 Bargaining power of suppliers
There are some factors that affect the bargaining power of suppliers as the
following
a The number of supplier If the number of the supplier of the industry
are low then the bargaining power of the supplier are high and if the
number of the supplier are high then the bargaining power of supplier
are low
b Switching cost High switching cost in the product and service then it
is hard to change to another supplier
c Quality of the product serviceIt is very common to switch to another
supplier once the quality of product and service are low on the other
hand if the quality of the product and service are high there is not a n
option to change to other supplier
d Product or service availability The bargaining power of supplier will
be low if the availability of the product is high
e Image of the supplier If the supplier has a great image and status in
the industry then it will follow by the higher bargaining power
5 Intensity of competitive rivalry
Intensity of the industry will be high when there is other service and
products operate that involve many players which can be dominant or similar
27
26 SWOT ANALYSIS
A Way to monitoring the external and internal marketing environment is by using
SWOT analysis (Kotler Keller 2012 70) In their book Osterwalder and Pigneur
(2010 224) mentioned that a SWOT analysis in the business model yields two
results
1 Provides a snapshot of where is our business are (strength and weakness as
internal environment)
2 Suggest some future trajectories (opportunities and threats as external
environment)
SWOT analysis is such an important part in the process of designing business model
prototypes
A business unit must monitor key macro environment forces and significant
micro environment factors that affect is ability to earn profits An opportunity is the
are of buyer need an interest that a company has a high probability of profitability
satisfying Meanwhile a threat is a challenge posed by an unfavorable trend or
development that in the absence of defensive marketing action would led to lower
sales or profit (Kotler Keller 2012 71)
Meanwhile as an evaluation the business itself has to looking to its strength
and weaknesses By looking on these points the business could consider whether it
should limit itself to those opportunities for which it possesses the required strength
or consider those that might require it to find or develop new strength
28
261 TOWS MATRIX
Based on the journal from Heinz Weihrich (1982) Tows Matrix is a variant of
the classic business tool SWOT Analysis TOWS and SWOT are acronyms for
different arrangements of the words Strengths Weaknesses Opportunities and
Threats
Here are four basic strategies depending on the prevalence of the analyzed
group of factors (positive or negative) in the environment and within the company
SO situation - maxi-maxi strategy This situation applies to the company for
which dominates strengths in the environment and opportunities within This
situation corresponds to the maxi-maxi strategy strong expansion and
diversified development
WO situation - mini-maxi strategy In this situation company has the more
vulnerabilities - weaknesses but its environment gives more opportunities
The strategy should include the use of these opportunities while reducing or
correcting weaknesses within the organization
ST situation - maxi-mini strategy The source of development difficulties for
the company are unfavorable external conditions (prevalence of threats) The
company may use large internal strengths in attempt to overcome threats from
environment
WT situation - mini-mini strategy The company in this case is devoid of any
development opportunities It operates in hostile environments and its
29
potential for change is small It does not have significant strengths which
could withstand threats Mini-mini strategy boils down to a pessimistic
version of the liquidation or in optimistic situation - to strive for survival or
merger with another organization
Figure 24 TOWS Matrix Source Weihrich (1982)
27 MARKETING THEORY
The American Marketing Association define marketing as the activity set of
institutions and process for creating communication delivering and exchanging
offerings that have value for customers clients partners and society at large (Kotler
Keller 2012 27) Peter Drucker a leading management theorist said that the aim of
marketing is to make selling superfluous Successful marketing need and
30
understanding creating delivering capturing and sustaining customer value The
marketing plan is the central instrument for directing and coordinating the marketing
effort
271 Marketing Management
Based on (Kotler amp Amstrong 2010) the marketing management is analysis
planning implementation and programs control that made for created developed
and maintenance the transaction for gain the benefit based on the company purposed
Company management consist of demand that relationship with the customers
272 Segmenting Targeting Positioning
Based on (Kotler 2001) there are many consumers with differential needs so
the company must share the market choose good segmentation and also made some
appropriate strategy to gain a big benefit than other competitors Those strategies
process consist of there point which are
1 Market Segmentation
Segmentation is the share consumer activity into a more homogenous group m
hopes of a response is obtained such as buy wear accept and believe On the
practice segmentation market is the process share market into group
consumer based on their needs characteristic behavior and differentiation
mix market (Kasali 203) Based on (Kotler 2003) there are 3 main
segmentations of variable which are
31
a Geographic segmentation
Dividing market into different geographical units such as nations
states regions countries cities and neighborhoods
b Demographic segmentation
Dividing market into groups based on demographic variables such as
age gender family size family life cycle income occupation
education religion race and nationality
c Psychographic segmentation
Dividing a market into different groups based on social class lifestyle
or personality characteristic
Based on (Kotler 2003) that the market segment can drive so the
segment of the market must have 5 characteristics which are
Measurable size of the segment purchasing power of the
segment we want to reach and the last one is characteristic of
the segment can be measurable
Substantial a segment becomes the unity of homogeny group
that have a power to gain benefit if the program and marketing
drive by these groups
Accessible the segment that must be reach and served
effectively
32
Differentiable that the segments can be separate by conceptual
and respond differently to the program and the different
elements of the marketing mix
Actionable the program have made effectively that must be
implemented to attract and serve the segments
2 Market Targeting
These methods purpose to establish target market evaluation process begins
with the attractiveness of each market segment and has one or more segments
most benefit to be entered Based on (Kotler 2003) these are 5 patterns that
we can used to enter the market which are
a Single segment concentration
Concentrate with one segment the company get the knowledge
about what the market needs that to be the reach target market
and get a strong minded of consumers in that segment This
pattern have a high risk if there are saturation occurs in this
segment the company faces the risk of losing the entire market
b Selective specialization
On this pattern the company can choose the segment market
that where segment must gain the benefit The advantage of
this pattern are the ability of the company to reduce the risk
lower
c Product specialization
33
This pattern showed the company produced the goods which
will be sold in some segments
d Market specialization
The market showed that company produced the goods and sell
to the one segment the advantages if this pattern the company
have a high reputation from the consumer that segment market
have been entered
e Full market coverage
On this pattern the company try to reach whole market with
produced what consumer needs with the differential product to
gain the whole market the entered
3 Market Positioning
Market positioning is the activity of the company to place their product on the
market so their product get a clear position distinguishable as well as more
expected than competing production the minds of the target consumers that
will provide huge benefits in the target market
Based on (Kotler 2003) the company must avoid the four main errors in
placing market position which are
a Under positioning
It is mean the placement too low that causing superficial
picture of the product so consumer have a low response to the
product
b Over positioning
34
The placement is too high so it can cause the false perception
from consumers on the price of the product so consumers are
reluctant to buy because they think price is too high
c Confused positioning
Confusing placement of the product because the company too
often change their market position
d Doubtful positioning
Dubious product placement the effect of this position the
consumers distrust of the product
273 Marketing Mix
Based on (Kotler ampAmstrong 2010) marketing mix is a unity of the tools of
marketing that the tactical as well as directed and used by the company to produce the
desired response target market Marketing mix is a modern marketing theory
Marketing mix defined as the set of marketing tools that the form use to pursue its
marketing objective in the target market (Kotler 1994 98) Based on the Journal
Marketing by Chai Lee Goi Marketing mix is not scientific theory but a conceptual
framework that identifies the principal decision making manager make in configuring
their offerings to suit consumersrsquo needs (Lee Chai Goi 2009 1) To gain the benefit
for the company marketing mix is the weapon that company usually used to get the
change on the market That changed was grouped by four strategies named ldquo4Psrdquo
that consist of product price place and promotion
35
Product
Product is goods or services that company offered to the market
Price
Price is the several money that consumer must pay to buy a product
Place
Place (distribution) not only represent that the product can achieve or known
but also activity that company do for the product the produced easy to get at
the market and consumers
Promotion
Is the activity that company do to communicate their product and get the
consumer to reach their product Consist of advertising events sponsorship
and other activity are summarized in the Integrated Marketing
Communication (IMC)
Booms and Bitner is suggested 3 other elements beides the traditional 4Prsquos by
Kotler for service business which are (wwwlenamarketingnet 2013)
Physical Evidence
Is about where the service is being delivered from This element will
differentiate the company with other
Process
This element of the marketing mix looks at the used to deliver the service
36
People
People are essential ingredients in service provision recruiting and training
the right staff is required to create a competitive advantage
28 OPERATIONAL MANAGEMENT 281 THE SERVICE DESIGN PROCESS Service design is more comprehensive and occurs more often than product
design The inherent variability of service processes requires that the service system
be carefully designed The service concept defines the target customer and the desired
customer experience The service design process must be different and unique from
others to make the product selling point It also defines how onersquos service is
different from others and how it will compete in the marketplace Sometimes
services are successful because their service concept fills a previously unoccupied
niche or differs from the generally accepted mode of operation (Rusell amp Taylor
2011 193)
37
Figure 25 The Service Design Process Source Rusell amp Taylor2011
From the service concept a service package is created to meet customer
needs The package consists of a mixture of physical items sensual
benefits and psychological benefits Effective service design recognizes and
defines all the components of a service package Finding the appropriate mix of
physical items and sensual and psychological benefits and designing them to be
consistent with each other and the service concept is also important (Rusell amp
Taylor 2011 194) From the service package service specifications are developed
for performance design and delivery Performance specifications outline
expectations and requirements for general and specific customers
Performance specifications are converted into design specifications and finally
delivery specifications Design specifications must describe the service in
sufficient detail for the desired service experience to be replicated for different
individuals at numerous locations The specifications typically consist of
38
activities to be performed skill requirements and guidelines for service
providers and cost and time estimates Facility size location and layoutas well
as equipment needs are also included
29 FINANCIAL THEORY 291 BALANCE SHEET
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 62) The balance sheet presents a
summary statement of the firmrsquos financial position at a given time The statement
balances the firmrsquos assets (what it owns) against its financing which can be either
debt (what it owes) or equity (what was provided by owners) Below is the example
of balance sheet from Bartlettrsquos Company
Figure 26 Bartlett Company Balance Sheets Source Gitman amp Zitter 2012
39
The assets are listed from the most liquid (cash) ndash down to the least liquid
Marketable securities are very liquid short-term investments held by the firm
Because they are highly liquid marketable securities are viewed as a form of cash
(ldquonear cashrdquo) Accounts receivable represent the total monies owed the firm by its
customers on credit sales Inventories include raw materials work in process
(partially finished goods) and finished goods held by the firm The entry for gross
fixed assets is the original cost of all fixed (long-term) assets owned by the firm Net
fixed assets represent the difference between gross fixed assets and accumulated
depreciation ndash the total expense recorded for the depreciation of fixed assets The net
value of fixed assets is called their book value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
The liabilities and equity accounts are listed from short-term to long-
term Current liabilities include accounts payable amounts owed for credit
purchases by the firm notes payable outstanding short-term loans typically
from commercial banks and accruals amounts owed for services for which a bill
may not or will not be received Examples of accruals include taxes due the
government and wages due employees Long-term debt represents debt for which
payment is not due in the current year Stockholdersrsquo equity represents the
ownersrsquo claims on the firm The preferred stock entry shows the historical
proceeds from the sale of preferred stock(Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
40
292 INCOME STATEMENT
The income statement provides a financial summary of the firmrsquos operating
results during a specified period Most common are income statements covering a 1-
year period ending at a specified date ordinarily December 31 of the calendar year
Many large firms however operate on a 12-month financial cycle or fiscal year that
ends at a time other than December 31 In addition monthly income statements are
typically prepared for use by management and quarterly statements must be made
available to the stockholders of publicly owned corporations (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 59-60) The example of income statement is shown below
Figure 27 Bartlett Company Income
Statement Source GitmanampZitter2012
293 CASH FLOW ANALYSIS
A cash flow statement is one of the most important financial statements for a
project or business The statement can be as simple as a one page analysis or may
41
involve several schedules that feed information into a central statement A cash flow
statement is a listing of the flows of cash into and out of the business or project
Many cash flows are constructed with multiple time periods
For example it may list monthly cash inflows and outflows over a yearrsquos time
It not only projects the cash balance remaining at the end of the year but also
the cash balance for each month (wwwextensioniastateedu 2013) Some cash
flow budgets are constructed so that we can monitor the accuracy of our projections
These budgets allow us to make monthly cash flow projections for the coming year
and also enter actual inflows and outflows as we progress through the year This
will allow us to compare your projections to your actual cash flows and make
adjustments to the projections for the remainder of the year
Figure 28 Example of
Cash Flow Source
Gitman ampZitter 2012
Even though cash flow and profitability are closely related they are different
42
A cash flow statement lists cash inflows and cash outflows while the income
statement lists income and expenses A cash flow statement shows liquidity while an
income statement shows profitability
294 PAYBACK PERIOD
Payback periods are commonly used to evaluate proposed investments The
payback period is the amount of time required for the firm to recover its initial
investment in a project as calculated from cash inflows The payback period can be
found by dividing the initial investment by the annual cash inflow When the
payback period is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the following decision
criteria apply
If the payback period is less than the maximum acceptable payback
period accept the project
If the payback period is greater than the maximum acceptable payback
period reject the project
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 393) the length of the maximum
acceptable payback period is determined by management This value is set
subjectively on the basis of a number of factors including the type of project
(expansion replacement or renewal other) the perceived risk of the project and the
perceived relationship between the payback period and the share value It is simply a
value that management feels on average will result in value-creating investment
decisions
43
By measuring how quickly the firm recovers its initial investment the
payback period also gives implicit consideration to the timing of cash flows and
therefore to the time value of money Because it can be viewed as a measure of
risk exposure many firms use the payback period as a decision criterion or as a
supplement to other decision techniques The longer the firm must wait to recover
its invested funds the greater the possibility of a calamity Hence the shorter the
payback period the lower the firmrsquos risk exposure A second weakness is that this
approach fails to take fully into account the time factor in the value of money A
third weakness of payback is its failure to recognize cash flows that occur after the
payback period (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 394-396)
Figure 29 Calculation of
Payback Period Source
Gitman amp Zitter 2012
44
295 NET PRESENT VALUE (NPV)
The method used by most large companies to evaluate investment projects is
called net present value (NPV) The intuition behind the NPV method is simple
When firms make investments they are spending money that they obtained in one
form or another from investors Investors expect a return on the money that they give
to firms so a firm should undertake an investment only if the present value of the
cash flow that the investment generates is greater than the cost of making the
investment in the first place
Because the NPV method takes into account the time value of investorsrsquo
money it is a more sophisticated capital budgeting technique than the payback rule
The NPV method discounts the firmrsquos cash flows at the firmrsquos cost of capital This
rate is the minimum return that must be earned on a project to satisfy the firmrsquos
investors Projects with lower returns fail to meet investorsrsquo expectations and
therefore decrease firm value and projects with higher returns increase firm
value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
The net present value (NPV) is found by subtracting a projectrsquos initial
investment (CF0) from the present value of its cash inflows (CFt) discounted at a
rate equal to the firmrsquos cost of capital (r) as shown below
NPV = Present value of cash inflows - Initial investment
When NPV is used both inflows and outflows are measured in terms of
45
present dollars For a project that has cash outflows beyond the initial investment the
net present value of a project would be found by subtracting the present value of
outflows from the present value of inflows When NPV is used to make accept reject
decisions the decision criteria are as follows
If the NPV is greater than $0 accept the project
If the NPV is less than $0 reject the project
If the NPV is greater than $0 the firm will earn a return greater than its cost of
capital Such action should increase the market value of the firm and therefore the
wealth of its owners by an amount equal to the NPV (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
296 INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN (IRR)
The internal rate of return (IRR) is one of the most widely used capital
budgeting techniques The internal rate of return (IRR) is the discount rate that
equates the NPV of an investment opportunity with $0 (because the present value of
cash inflows equals the initial investment) It is the rate of return that the firm will
earn if it invests in the project and receives the given cash inflows (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 401)
When IRR is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the decision criteria are as
follows
If the IRR is greater than the cost of capital accept the project
46
If the IRR is less than the cost of capital reject the project
To calculate IRR Most financial calculators have a pre-programmed IRR
function that can be used to simplify the IRR calculation With these calculators you
merely punch in all cash flows just as if to calculate NPV and then depress IRR to
find the internal rate of return Computer software including spreadsheets is also
available for simplifying these calculations All NPV and IRR values presented in
this and subsequent chapters are obtained by using these functions on a popular
financial calculator (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 402)
297 COST OF GOOD SOLD (COGS)
Cost of goods sold is the direct costs attributable to the production of the
goods sold by a company This amount includes the cost of the materials used in
creating the good along with the direct labor costs used to produce the good It
excludes indirect expenses such as distribution costs and sales force costs
COGS is the costs that go into creating the products that a company sells
therefore the only costs included in the measure are those that are directly tied to the
production of the products For example the COGS for an automaker would include
the material costs for the parts that go into making the car along with the labor costs
used to put the car together The cost of sending the cars to dealerships and the cost of
the labor used to sell the car would be excluded
The exact costs included in the COGS calculation will differ from one type
of business to another The cost of goods attributed to a companys products are
47
expensed as the company sells these goods In summary for manufacturers COGS is
the cost of buying raw materials and manufacturing finished products For retailers
itrsquos the cost of obtaining or buying the products sold to customers If the company is
in a service industry COGS is the cost of the service it offers
48
49
50
25
b Customer demand When the customer demand of product and service
are high threat of the possibility of new entrant is high since the
industry not be able to handle
c Product or service differentiation If the product can make
differentiation with new innovation then the threat is high
2 Threat of substitute products or service
The threat of substitute increased if there is competitor that can offer
better competitive price to the market
3 Bargaining power of customer
There are several factors that affect the bargaining power of customer as
the following
a Reputation When the product or service has a good reputation the
bargaining power of supplier will be low since the customer will have
no choice to select other product
b Switching cost High switching cost means the customer not easy to
switch to other competitor
c Quality of product and service Customers will buy the better quality
of the product even though the price is the same
d The number of the other industry competitor If the numbers of the
competitor are low the bargaining power of the customer also low
When the numbers of the competitors are high then the bargaining
power of the customer will be high
26
e Dependency to the product or service The bargaining power of the
customer will be low if a product have the ability to create a
dependency to the customer
4 Bargaining power of suppliers
There are some factors that affect the bargaining power of suppliers as the
following
a The number of supplier If the number of the supplier of the industry
are low then the bargaining power of the supplier are high and if the
number of the supplier are high then the bargaining power of supplier
are low
b Switching cost High switching cost in the product and service then it
is hard to change to another supplier
c Quality of the product serviceIt is very common to switch to another
supplier once the quality of product and service are low on the other
hand if the quality of the product and service are high there is not a n
option to change to other supplier
d Product or service availability The bargaining power of supplier will
be low if the availability of the product is high
e Image of the supplier If the supplier has a great image and status in
the industry then it will follow by the higher bargaining power
5 Intensity of competitive rivalry
Intensity of the industry will be high when there is other service and
products operate that involve many players which can be dominant or similar
27
26 SWOT ANALYSIS
A Way to monitoring the external and internal marketing environment is by using
SWOT analysis (Kotler Keller 2012 70) In their book Osterwalder and Pigneur
(2010 224) mentioned that a SWOT analysis in the business model yields two
results
1 Provides a snapshot of where is our business are (strength and weakness as
internal environment)
2 Suggest some future trajectories (opportunities and threats as external
environment)
SWOT analysis is such an important part in the process of designing business model
prototypes
A business unit must monitor key macro environment forces and significant
micro environment factors that affect is ability to earn profits An opportunity is the
are of buyer need an interest that a company has a high probability of profitability
satisfying Meanwhile a threat is a challenge posed by an unfavorable trend or
development that in the absence of defensive marketing action would led to lower
sales or profit (Kotler Keller 2012 71)
Meanwhile as an evaluation the business itself has to looking to its strength
and weaknesses By looking on these points the business could consider whether it
should limit itself to those opportunities for which it possesses the required strength
or consider those that might require it to find or develop new strength
28
261 TOWS MATRIX
Based on the journal from Heinz Weihrich (1982) Tows Matrix is a variant of
the classic business tool SWOT Analysis TOWS and SWOT are acronyms for
different arrangements of the words Strengths Weaknesses Opportunities and
Threats
Here are four basic strategies depending on the prevalence of the analyzed
group of factors (positive or negative) in the environment and within the company
SO situation - maxi-maxi strategy This situation applies to the company for
which dominates strengths in the environment and opportunities within This
situation corresponds to the maxi-maxi strategy strong expansion and
diversified development
WO situation - mini-maxi strategy In this situation company has the more
vulnerabilities - weaknesses but its environment gives more opportunities
The strategy should include the use of these opportunities while reducing or
correcting weaknesses within the organization
ST situation - maxi-mini strategy The source of development difficulties for
the company are unfavorable external conditions (prevalence of threats) The
company may use large internal strengths in attempt to overcome threats from
environment
WT situation - mini-mini strategy The company in this case is devoid of any
development opportunities It operates in hostile environments and its
29
potential for change is small It does not have significant strengths which
could withstand threats Mini-mini strategy boils down to a pessimistic
version of the liquidation or in optimistic situation - to strive for survival or
merger with another organization
Figure 24 TOWS Matrix Source Weihrich (1982)
27 MARKETING THEORY
The American Marketing Association define marketing as the activity set of
institutions and process for creating communication delivering and exchanging
offerings that have value for customers clients partners and society at large (Kotler
Keller 2012 27) Peter Drucker a leading management theorist said that the aim of
marketing is to make selling superfluous Successful marketing need and
30
understanding creating delivering capturing and sustaining customer value The
marketing plan is the central instrument for directing and coordinating the marketing
effort
271 Marketing Management
Based on (Kotler amp Amstrong 2010) the marketing management is analysis
planning implementation and programs control that made for created developed
and maintenance the transaction for gain the benefit based on the company purposed
Company management consist of demand that relationship with the customers
272 Segmenting Targeting Positioning
Based on (Kotler 2001) there are many consumers with differential needs so
the company must share the market choose good segmentation and also made some
appropriate strategy to gain a big benefit than other competitors Those strategies
process consist of there point which are
1 Market Segmentation
Segmentation is the share consumer activity into a more homogenous group m
hopes of a response is obtained such as buy wear accept and believe On the
practice segmentation market is the process share market into group
consumer based on their needs characteristic behavior and differentiation
mix market (Kasali 203) Based on (Kotler 2003) there are 3 main
segmentations of variable which are
31
a Geographic segmentation
Dividing market into different geographical units such as nations
states regions countries cities and neighborhoods
b Demographic segmentation
Dividing market into groups based on demographic variables such as
age gender family size family life cycle income occupation
education religion race and nationality
c Psychographic segmentation
Dividing a market into different groups based on social class lifestyle
or personality characteristic
Based on (Kotler 2003) that the market segment can drive so the
segment of the market must have 5 characteristics which are
Measurable size of the segment purchasing power of the
segment we want to reach and the last one is characteristic of
the segment can be measurable
Substantial a segment becomes the unity of homogeny group
that have a power to gain benefit if the program and marketing
drive by these groups
Accessible the segment that must be reach and served
effectively
32
Differentiable that the segments can be separate by conceptual
and respond differently to the program and the different
elements of the marketing mix
Actionable the program have made effectively that must be
implemented to attract and serve the segments
2 Market Targeting
These methods purpose to establish target market evaluation process begins
with the attractiveness of each market segment and has one or more segments
most benefit to be entered Based on (Kotler 2003) these are 5 patterns that
we can used to enter the market which are
a Single segment concentration
Concentrate with one segment the company get the knowledge
about what the market needs that to be the reach target market
and get a strong minded of consumers in that segment This
pattern have a high risk if there are saturation occurs in this
segment the company faces the risk of losing the entire market
b Selective specialization
On this pattern the company can choose the segment market
that where segment must gain the benefit The advantage of
this pattern are the ability of the company to reduce the risk
lower
c Product specialization
33
This pattern showed the company produced the goods which
will be sold in some segments
d Market specialization
The market showed that company produced the goods and sell
to the one segment the advantages if this pattern the company
have a high reputation from the consumer that segment market
have been entered
e Full market coverage
On this pattern the company try to reach whole market with
produced what consumer needs with the differential product to
gain the whole market the entered
3 Market Positioning
Market positioning is the activity of the company to place their product on the
market so their product get a clear position distinguishable as well as more
expected than competing production the minds of the target consumers that
will provide huge benefits in the target market
Based on (Kotler 2003) the company must avoid the four main errors in
placing market position which are
a Under positioning
It is mean the placement too low that causing superficial
picture of the product so consumer have a low response to the
product
b Over positioning
34
The placement is too high so it can cause the false perception
from consumers on the price of the product so consumers are
reluctant to buy because they think price is too high
c Confused positioning
Confusing placement of the product because the company too
often change their market position
d Doubtful positioning
Dubious product placement the effect of this position the
consumers distrust of the product
273 Marketing Mix
Based on (Kotler ampAmstrong 2010) marketing mix is a unity of the tools of
marketing that the tactical as well as directed and used by the company to produce the
desired response target market Marketing mix is a modern marketing theory
Marketing mix defined as the set of marketing tools that the form use to pursue its
marketing objective in the target market (Kotler 1994 98) Based on the Journal
Marketing by Chai Lee Goi Marketing mix is not scientific theory but a conceptual
framework that identifies the principal decision making manager make in configuring
their offerings to suit consumersrsquo needs (Lee Chai Goi 2009 1) To gain the benefit
for the company marketing mix is the weapon that company usually used to get the
change on the market That changed was grouped by four strategies named ldquo4Psrdquo
that consist of product price place and promotion
35
Product
Product is goods or services that company offered to the market
Price
Price is the several money that consumer must pay to buy a product
Place
Place (distribution) not only represent that the product can achieve or known
but also activity that company do for the product the produced easy to get at
the market and consumers
Promotion
Is the activity that company do to communicate their product and get the
consumer to reach their product Consist of advertising events sponsorship
and other activity are summarized in the Integrated Marketing
Communication (IMC)
Booms and Bitner is suggested 3 other elements beides the traditional 4Prsquos by
Kotler for service business which are (wwwlenamarketingnet 2013)
Physical Evidence
Is about where the service is being delivered from This element will
differentiate the company with other
Process
This element of the marketing mix looks at the used to deliver the service
36
People
People are essential ingredients in service provision recruiting and training
the right staff is required to create a competitive advantage
28 OPERATIONAL MANAGEMENT 281 THE SERVICE DESIGN PROCESS Service design is more comprehensive and occurs more often than product
design The inherent variability of service processes requires that the service system
be carefully designed The service concept defines the target customer and the desired
customer experience The service design process must be different and unique from
others to make the product selling point It also defines how onersquos service is
different from others and how it will compete in the marketplace Sometimes
services are successful because their service concept fills a previously unoccupied
niche or differs from the generally accepted mode of operation (Rusell amp Taylor
2011 193)
37
Figure 25 The Service Design Process Source Rusell amp Taylor2011
From the service concept a service package is created to meet customer
needs The package consists of a mixture of physical items sensual
benefits and psychological benefits Effective service design recognizes and
defines all the components of a service package Finding the appropriate mix of
physical items and sensual and psychological benefits and designing them to be
consistent with each other and the service concept is also important (Rusell amp
Taylor 2011 194) From the service package service specifications are developed
for performance design and delivery Performance specifications outline
expectations and requirements for general and specific customers
Performance specifications are converted into design specifications and finally
delivery specifications Design specifications must describe the service in
sufficient detail for the desired service experience to be replicated for different
individuals at numerous locations The specifications typically consist of
38
activities to be performed skill requirements and guidelines for service
providers and cost and time estimates Facility size location and layoutas well
as equipment needs are also included
29 FINANCIAL THEORY 291 BALANCE SHEET
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 62) The balance sheet presents a
summary statement of the firmrsquos financial position at a given time The statement
balances the firmrsquos assets (what it owns) against its financing which can be either
debt (what it owes) or equity (what was provided by owners) Below is the example
of balance sheet from Bartlettrsquos Company
Figure 26 Bartlett Company Balance Sheets Source Gitman amp Zitter 2012
39
The assets are listed from the most liquid (cash) ndash down to the least liquid
Marketable securities are very liquid short-term investments held by the firm
Because they are highly liquid marketable securities are viewed as a form of cash
(ldquonear cashrdquo) Accounts receivable represent the total monies owed the firm by its
customers on credit sales Inventories include raw materials work in process
(partially finished goods) and finished goods held by the firm The entry for gross
fixed assets is the original cost of all fixed (long-term) assets owned by the firm Net
fixed assets represent the difference between gross fixed assets and accumulated
depreciation ndash the total expense recorded for the depreciation of fixed assets The net
value of fixed assets is called their book value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
The liabilities and equity accounts are listed from short-term to long-
term Current liabilities include accounts payable amounts owed for credit
purchases by the firm notes payable outstanding short-term loans typically
from commercial banks and accruals amounts owed for services for which a bill
may not or will not be received Examples of accruals include taxes due the
government and wages due employees Long-term debt represents debt for which
payment is not due in the current year Stockholdersrsquo equity represents the
ownersrsquo claims on the firm The preferred stock entry shows the historical
proceeds from the sale of preferred stock(Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
40
292 INCOME STATEMENT
The income statement provides a financial summary of the firmrsquos operating
results during a specified period Most common are income statements covering a 1-
year period ending at a specified date ordinarily December 31 of the calendar year
Many large firms however operate on a 12-month financial cycle or fiscal year that
ends at a time other than December 31 In addition monthly income statements are
typically prepared for use by management and quarterly statements must be made
available to the stockholders of publicly owned corporations (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 59-60) The example of income statement is shown below
Figure 27 Bartlett Company Income
Statement Source GitmanampZitter2012
293 CASH FLOW ANALYSIS
A cash flow statement is one of the most important financial statements for a
project or business The statement can be as simple as a one page analysis or may
41
involve several schedules that feed information into a central statement A cash flow
statement is a listing of the flows of cash into and out of the business or project
Many cash flows are constructed with multiple time periods
For example it may list monthly cash inflows and outflows over a yearrsquos time
It not only projects the cash balance remaining at the end of the year but also
the cash balance for each month (wwwextensioniastateedu 2013) Some cash
flow budgets are constructed so that we can monitor the accuracy of our projections
These budgets allow us to make monthly cash flow projections for the coming year
and also enter actual inflows and outflows as we progress through the year This
will allow us to compare your projections to your actual cash flows and make
adjustments to the projections for the remainder of the year
Figure 28 Example of
Cash Flow Source
Gitman ampZitter 2012
Even though cash flow and profitability are closely related they are different
42
A cash flow statement lists cash inflows and cash outflows while the income
statement lists income and expenses A cash flow statement shows liquidity while an
income statement shows profitability
294 PAYBACK PERIOD
Payback periods are commonly used to evaluate proposed investments The
payback period is the amount of time required for the firm to recover its initial
investment in a project as calculated from cash inflows The payback period can be
found by dividing the initial investment by the annual cash inflow When the
payback period is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the following decision
criteria apply
If the payback period is less than the maximum acceptable payback
period accept the project
If the payback period is greater than the maximum acceptable payback
period reject the project
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 393) the length of the maximum
acceptable payback period is determined by management This value is set
subjectively on the basis of a number of factors including the type of project
(expansion replacement or renewal other) the perceived risk of the project and the
perceived relationship between the payback period and the share value It is simply a
value that management feels on average will result in value-creating investment
decisions
43
By measuring how quickly the firm recovers its initial investment the
payback period also gives implicit consideration to the timing of cash flows and
therefore to the time value of money Because it can be viewed as a measure of
risk exposure many firms use the payback period as a decision criterion or as a
supplement to other decision techniques The longer the firm must wait to recover
its invested funds the greater the possibility of a calamity Hence the shorter the
payback period the lower the firmrsquos risk exposure A second weakness is that this
approach fails to take fully into account the time factor in the value of money A
third weakness of payback is its failure to recognize cash flows that occur after the
payback period (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 394-396)
Figure 29 Calculation of
Payback Period Source
Gitman amp Zitter 2012
44
295 NET PRESENT VALUE (NPV)
The method used by most large companies to evaluate investment projects is
called net present value (NPV) The intuition behind the NPV method is simple
When firms make investments they are spending money that they obtained in one
form or another from investors Investors expect a return on the money that they give
to firms so a firm should undertake an investment only if the present value of the
cash flow that the investment generates is greater than the cost of making the
investment in the first place
Because the NPV method takes into account the time value of investorsrsquo
money it is a more sophisticated capital budgeting technique than the payback rule
The NPV method discounts the firmrsquos cash flows at the firmrsquos cost of capital This
rate is the minimum return that must be earned on a project to satisfy the firmrsquos
investors Projects with lower returns fail to meet investorsrsquo expectations and
therefore decrease firm value and projects with higher returns increase firm
value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
The net present value (NPV) is found by subtracting a projectrsquos initial
investment (CF0) from the present value of its cash inflows (CFt) discounted at a
rate equal to the firmrsquos cost of capital (r) as shown below
NPV = Present value of cash inflows - Initial investment
When NPV is used both inflows and outflows are measured in terms of
45
present dollars For a project that has cash outflows beyond the initial investment the
net present value of a project would be found by subtracting the present value of
outflows from the present value of inflows When NPV is used to make accept reject
decisions the decision criteria are as follows
If the NPV is greater than $0 accept the project
If the NPV is less than $0 reject the project
If the NPV is greater than $0 the firm will earn a return greater than its cost of
capital Such action should increase the market value of the firm and therefore the
wealth of its owners by an amount equal to the NPV (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
296 INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN (IRR)
The internal rate of return (IRR) is one of the most widely used capital
budgeting techniques The internal rate of return (IRR) is the discount rate that
equates the NPV of an investment opportunity with $0 (because the present value of
cash inflows equals the initial investment) It is the rate of return that the firm will
earn if it invests in the project and receives the given cash inflows (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 401)
When IRR is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the decision criteria are as
follows
If the IRR is greater than the cost of capital accept the project
46
If the IRR is less than the cost of capital reject the project
To calculate IRR Most financial calculators have a pre-programmed IRR
function that can be used to simplify the IRR calculation With these calculators you
merely punch in all cash flows just as if to calculate NPV and then depress IRR to
find the internal rate of return Computer software including spreadsheets is also
available for simplifying these calculations All NPV and IRR values presented in
this and subsequent chapters are obtained by using these functions on a popular
financial calculator (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 402)
297 COST OF GOOD SOLD (COGS)
Cost of goods sold is the direct costs attributable to the production of the
goods sold by a company This amount includes the cost of the materials used in
creating the good along with the direct labor costs used to produce the good It
excludes indirect expenses such as distribution costs and sales force costs
COGS is the costs that go into creating the products that a company sells
therefore the only costs included in the measure are those that are directly tied to the
production of the products For example the COGS for an automaker would include
the material costs for the parts that go into making the car along with the labor costs
used to put the car together The cost of sending the cars to dealerships and the cost of
the labor used to sell the car would be excluded
The exact costs included in the COGS calculation will differ from one type
of business to another The cost of goods attributed to a companys products are
47
expensed as the company sells these goods In summary for manufacturers COGS is
the cost of buying raw materials and manufacturing finished products For retailers
itrsquos the cost of obtaining or buying the products sold to customers If the company is
in a service industry COGS is the cost of the service it offers
48
49
50
26
e Dependency to the product or service The bargaining power of the
customer will be low if a product have the ability to create a
dependency to the customer
4 Bargaining power of suppliers
There are some factors that affect the bargaining power of suppliers as the
following
a The number of supplier If the number of the supplier of the industry
are low then the bargaining power of the supplier are high and if the
number of the supplier are high then the bargaining power of supplier
are low
b Switching cost High switching cost in the product and service then it
is hard to change to another supplier
c Quality of the product serviceIt is very common to switch to another
supplier once the quality of product and service are low on the other
hand if the quality of the product and service are high there is not a n
option to change to other supplier
d Product or service availability The bargaining power of supplier will
be low if the availability of the product is high
e Image of the supplier If the supplier has a great image and status in
the industry then it will follow by the higher bargaining power
5 Intensity of competitive rivalry
Intensity of the industry will be high when there is other service and
products operate that involve many players which can be dominant or similar
27
26 SWOT ANALYSIS
A Way to monitoring the external and internal marketing environment is by using
SWOT analysis (Kotler Keller 2012 70) In their book Osterwalder and Pigneur
(2010 224) mentioned that a SWOT analysis in the business model yields two
results
1 Provides a snapshot of where is our business are (strength and weakness as
internal environment)
2 Suggest some future trajectories (opportunities and threats as external
environment)
SWOT analysis is such an important part in the process of designing business model
prototypes
A business unit must monitor key macro environment forces and significant
micro environment factors that affect is ability to earn profits An opportunity is the
are of buyer need an interest that a company has a high probability of profitability
satisfying Meanwhile a threat is a challenge posed by an unfavorable trend or
development that in the absence of defensive marketing action would led to lower
sales or profit (Kotler Keller 2012 71)
Meanwhile as an evaluation the business itself has to looking to its strength
and weaknesses By looking on these points the business could consider whether it
should limit itself to those opportunities for which it possesses the required strength
or consider those that might require it to find or develop new strength
28
261 TOWS MATRIX
Based on the journal from Heinz Weihrich (1982) Tows Matrix is a variant of
the classic business tool SWOT Analysis TOWS and SWOT are acronyms for
different arrangements of the words Strengths Weaknesses Opportunities and
Threats
Here are four basic strategies depending on the prevalence of the analyzed
group of factors (positive or negative) in the environment and within the company
SO situation - maxi-maxi strategy This situation applies to the company for
which dominates strengths in the environment and opportunities within This
situation corresponds to the maxi-maxi strategy strong expansion and
diversified development
WO situation - mini-maxi strategy In this situation company has the more
vulnerabilities - weaknesses but its environment gives more opportunities
The strategy should include the use of these opportunities while reducing or
correcting weaknesses within the organization
ST situation - maxi-mini strategy The source of development difficulties for
the company are unfavorable external conditions (prevalence of threats) The
company may use large internal strengths in attempt to overcome threats from
environment
WT situation - mini-mini strategy The company in this case is devoid of any
development opportunities It operates in hostile environments and its
29
potential for change is small It does not have significant strengths which
could withstand threats Mini-mini strategy boils down to a pessimistic
version of the liquidation or in optimistic situation - to strive for survival or
merger with another organization
Figure 24 TOWS Matrix Source Weihrich (1982)
27 MARKETING THEORY
The American Marketing Association define marketing as the activity set of
institutions and process for creating communication delivering and exchanging
offerings that have value for customers clients partners and society at large (Kotler
Keller 2012 27) Peter Drucker a leading management theorist said that the aim of
marketing is to make selling superfluous Successful marketing need and
30
understanding creating delivering capturing and sustaining customer value The
marketing plan is the central instrument for directing and coordinating the marketing
effort
271 Marketing Management
Based on (Kotler amp Amstrong 2010) the marketing management is analysis
planning implementation and programs control that made for created developed
and maintenance the transaction for gain the benefit based on the company purposed
Company management consist of demand that relationship with the customers
272 Segmenting Targeting Positioning
Based on (Kotler 2001) there are many consumers with differential needs so
the company must share the market choose good segmentation and also made some
appropriate strategy to gain a big benefit than other competitors Those strategies
process consist of there point which are
1 Market Segmentation
Segmentation is the share consumer activity into a more homogenous group m
hopes of a response is obtained such as buy wear accept and believe On the
practice segmentation market is the process share market into group
consumer based on their needs characteristic behavior and differentiation
mix market (Kasali 203) Based on (Kotler 2003) there are 3 main
segmentations of variable which are
31
a Geographic segmentation
Dividing market into different geographical units such as nations
states regions countries cities and neighborhoods
b Demographic segmentation
Dividing market into groups based on demographic variables such as
age gender family size family life cycle income occupation
education religion race and nationality
c Psychographic segmentation
Dividing a market into different groups based on social class lifestyle
or personality characteristic
Based on (Kotler 2003) that the market segment can drive so the
segment of the market must have 5 characteristics which are
Measurable size of the segment purchasing power of the
segment we want to reach and the last one is characteristic of
the segment can be measurable
Substantial a segment becomes the unity of homogeny group
that have a power to gain benefit if the program and marketing
drive by these groups
Accessible the segment that must be reach and served
effectively
32
Differentiable that the segments can be separate by conceptual
and respond differently to the program and the different
elements of the marketing mix
Actionable the program have made effectively that must be
implemented to attract and serve the segments
2 Market Targeting
These methods purpose to establish target market evaluation process begins
with the attractiveness of each market segment and has one or more segments
most benefit to be entered Based on (Kotler 2003) these are 5 patterns that
we can used to enter the market which are
a Single segment concentration
Concentrate with one segment the company get the knowledge
about what the market needs that to be the reach target market
and get a strong minded of consumers in that segment This
pattern have a high risk if there are saturation occurs in this
segment the company faces the risk of losing the entire market
b Selective specialization
On this pattern the company can choose the segment market
that where segment must gain the benefit The advantage of
this pattern are the ability of the company to reduce the risk
lower
c Product specialization
33
This pattern showed the company produced the goods which
will be sold in some segments
d Market specialization
The market showed that company produced the goods and sell
to the one segment the advantages if this pattern the company
have a high reputation from the consumer that segment market
have been entered
e Full market coverage
On this pattern the company try to reach whole market with
produced what consumer needs with the differential product to
gain the whole market the entered
3 Market Positioning
Market positioning is the activity of the company to place their product on the
market so their product get a clear position distinguishable as well as more
expected than competing production the minds of the target consumers that
will provide huge benefits in the target market
Based on (Kotler 2003) the company must avoid the four main errors in
placing market position which are
a Under positioning
It is mean the placement too low that causing superficial
picture of the product so consumer have a low response to the
product
b Over positioning
34
The placement is too high so it can cause the false perception
from consumers on the price of the product so consumers are
reluctant to buy because they think price is too high
c Confused positioning
Confusing placement of the product because the company too
often change their market position
d Doubtful positioning
Dubious product placement the effect of this position the
consumers distrust of the product
273 Marketing Mix
Based on (Kotler ampAmstrong 2010) marketing mix is a unity of the tools of
marketing that the tactical as well as directed and used by the company to produce the
desired response target market Marketing mix is a modern marketing theory
Marketing mix defined as the set of marketing tools that the form use to pursue its
marketing objective in the target market (Kotler 1994 98) Based on the Journal
Marketing by Chai Lee Goi Marketing mix is not scientific theory but a conceptual
framework that identifies the principal decision making manager make in configuring
their offerings to suit consumersrsquo needs (Lee Chai Goi 2009 1) To gain the benefit
for the company marketing mix is the weapon that company usually used to get the
change on the market That changed was grouped by four strategies named ldquo4Psrdquo
that consist of product price place and promotion
35
Product
Product is goods or services that company offered to the market
Price
Price is the several money that consumer must pay to buy a product
Place
Place (distribution) not only represent that the product can achieve or known
but also activity that company do for the product the produced easy to get at
the market and consumers
Promotion
Is the activity that company do to communicate their product and get the
consumer to reach their product Consist of advertising events sponsorship
and other activity are summarized in the Integrated Marketing
Communication (IMC)
Booms and Bitner is suggested 3 other elements beides the traditional 4Prsquos by
Kotler for service business which are (wwwlenamarketingnet 2013)
Physical Evidence
Is about where the service is being delivered from This element will
differentiate the company with other
Process
This element of the marketing mix looks at the used to deliver the service
36
People
People are essential ingredients in service provision recruiting and training
the right staff is required to create a competitive advantage
28 OPERATIONAL MANAGEMENT 281 THE SERVICE DESIGN PROCESS Service design is more comprehensive and occurs more often than product
design The inherent variability of service processes requires that the service system
be carefully designed The service concept defines the target customer and the desired
customer experience The service design process must be different and unique from
others to make the product selling point It also defines how onersquos service is
different from others and how it will compete in the marketplace Sometimes
services are successful because their service concept fills a previously unoccupied
niche or differs from the generally accepted mode of operation (Rusell amp Taylor
2011 193)
37
Figure 25 The Service Design Process Source Rusell amp Taylor2011
From the service concept a service package is created to meet customer
needs The package consists of a mixture of physical items sensual
benefits and psychological benefits Effective service design recognizes and
defines all the components of a service package Finding the appropriate mix of
physical items and sensual and psychological benefits and designing them to be
consistent with each other and the service concept is also important (Rusell amp
Taylor 2011 194) From the service package service specifications are developed
for performance design and delivery Performance specifications outline
expectations and requirements for general and specific customers
Performance specifications are converted into design specifications and finally
delivery specifications Design specifications must describe the service in
sufficient detail for the desired service experience to be replicated for different
individuals at numerous locations The specifications typically consist of
38
activities to be performed skill requirements and guidelines for service
providers and cost and time estimates Facility size location and layoutas well
as equipment needs are also included
29 FINANCIAL THEORY 291 BALANCE SHEET
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 62) The balance sheet presents a
summary statement of the firmrsquos financial position at a given time The statement
balances the firmrsquos assets (what it owns) against its financing which can be either
debt (what it owes) or equity (what was provided by owners) Below is the example
of balance sheet from Bartlettrsquos Company
Figure 26 Bartlett Company Balance Sheets Source Gitman amp Zitter 2012
39
The assets are listed from the most liquid (cash) ndash down to the least liquid
Marketable securities are very liquid short-term investments held by the firm
Because they are highly liquid marketable securities are viewed as a form of cash
(ldquonear cashrdquo) Accounts receivable represent the total monies owed the firm by its
customers on credit sales Inventories include raw materials work in process
(partially finished goods) and finished goods held by the firm The entry for gross
fixed assets is the original cost of all fixed (long-term) assets owned by the firm Net
fixed assets represent the difference between gross fixed assets and accumulated
depreciation ndash the total expense recorded for the depreciation of fixed assets The net
value of fixed assets is called their book value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
The liabilities and equity accounts are listed from short-term to long-
term Current liabilities include accounts payable amounts owed for credit
purchases by the firm notes payable outstanding short-term loans typically
from commercial banks and accruals amounts owed for services for which a bill
may not or will not be received Examples of accruals include taxes due the
government and wages due employees Long-term debt represents debt for which
payment is not due in the current year Stockholdersrsquo equity represents the
ownersrsquo claims on the firm The preferred stock entry shows the historical
proceeds from the sale of preferred stock(Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
40
292 INCOME STATEMENT
The income statement provides a financial summary of the firmrsquos operating
results during a specified period Most common are income statements covering a 1-
year period ending at a specified date ordinarily December 31 of the calendar year
Many large firms however operate on a 12-month financial cycle or fiscal year that
ends at a time other than December 31 In addition monthly income statements are
typically prepared for use by management and quarterly statements must be made
available to the stockholders of publicly owned corporations (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 59-60) The example of income statement is shown below
Figure 27 Bartlett Company Income
Statement Source GitmanampZitter2012
293 CASH FLOW ANALYSIS
A cash flow statement is one of the most important financial statements for a
project or business The statement can be as simple as a one page analysis or may
41
involve several schedules that feed information into a central statement A cash flow
statement is a listing of the flows of cash into and out of the business or project
Many cash flows are constructed with multiple time periods
For example it may list monthly cash inflows and outflows over a yearrsquos time
It not only projects the cash balance remaining at the end of the year but also
the cash balance for each month (wwwextensioniastateedu 2013) Some cash
flow budgets are constructed so that we can monitor the accuracy of our projections
These budgets allow us to make monthly cash flow projections for the coming year
and also enter actual inflows and outflows as we progress through the year This
will allow us to compare your projections to your actual cash flows and make
adjustments to the projections for the remainder of the year
Figure 28 Example of
Cash Flow Source
Gitman ampZitter 2012
Even though cash flow and profitability are closely related they are different
42
A cash flow statement lists cash inflows and cash outflows while the income
statement lists income and expenses A cash flow statement shows liquidity while an
income statement shows profitability
294 PAYBACK PERIOD
Payback periods are commonly used to evaluate proposed investments The
payback period is the amount of time required for the firm to recover its initial
investment in a project as calculated from cash inflows The payback period can be
found by dividing the initial investment by the annual cash inflow When the
payback period is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the following decision
criteria apply
If the payback period is less than the maximum acceptable payback
period accept the project
If the payback period is greater than the maximum acceptable payback
period reject the project
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 393) the length of the maximum
acceptable payback period is determined by management This value is set
subjectively on the basis of a number of factors including the type of project
(expansion replacement or renewal other) the perceived risk of the project and the
perceived relationship between the payback period and the share value It is simply a
value that management feels on average will result in value-creating investment
decisions
43
By measuring how quickly the firm recovers its initial investment the
payback period also gives implicit consideration to the timing of cash flows and
therefore to the time value of money Because it can be viewed as a measure of
risk exposure many firms use the payback period as a decision criterion or as a
supplement to other decision techniques The longer the firm must wait to recover
its invested funds the greater the possibility of a calamity Hence the shorter the
payback period the lower the firmrsquos risk exposure A second weakness is that this
approach fails to take fully into account the time factor in the value of money A
third weakness of payback is its failure to recognize cash flows that occur after the
payback period (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 394-396)
Figure 29 Calculation of
Payback Period Source
Gitman amp Zitter 2012
44
295 NET PRESENT VALUE (NPV)
The method used by most large companies to evaluate investment projects is
called net present value (NPV) The intuition behind the NPV method is simple
When firms make investments they are spending money that they obtained in one
form or another from investors Investors expect a return on the money that they give
to firms so a firm should undertake an investment only if the present value of the
cash flow that the investment generates is greater than the cost of making the
investment in the first place
Because the NPV method takes into account the time value of investorsrsquo
money it is a more sophisticated capital budgeting technique than the payback rule
The NPV method discounts the firmrsquos cash flows at the firmrsquos cost of capital This
rate is the minimum return that must be earned on a project to satisfy the firmrsquos
investors Projects with lower returns fail to meet investorsrsquo expectations and
therefore decrease firm value and projects with higher returns increase firm
value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
The net present value (NPV) is found by subtracting a projectrsquos initial
investment (CF0) from the present value of its cash inflows (CFt) discounted at a
rate equal to the firmrsquos cost of capital (r) as shown below
NPV = Present value of cash inflows - Initial investment
When NPV is used both inflows and outflows are measured in terms of
45
present dollars For a project that has cash outflows beyond the initial investment the
net present value of a project would be found by subtracting the present value of
outflows from the present value of inflows When NPV is used to make accept reject
decisions the decision criteria are as follows
If the NPV is greater than $0 accept the project
If the NPV is less than $0 reject the project
If the NPV is greater than $0 the firm will earn a return greater than its cost of
capital Such action should increase the market value of the firm and therefore the
wealth of its owners by an amount equal to the NPV (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
296 INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN (IRR)
The internal rate of return (IRR) is one of the most widely used capital
budgeting techniques The internal rate of return (IRR) is the discount rate that
equates the NPV of an investment opportunity with $0 (because the present value of
cash inflows equals the initial investment) It is the rate of return that the firm will
earn if it invests in the project and receives the given cash inflows (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 401)
When IRR is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the decision criteria are as
follows
If the IRR is greater than the cost of capital accept the project
46
If the IRR is less than the cost of capital reject the project
To calculate IRR Most financial calculators have a pre-programmed IRR
function that can be used to simplify the IRR calculation With these calculators you
merely punch in all cash flows just as if to calculate NPV and then depress IRR to
find the internal rate of return Computer software including spreadsheets is also
available for simplifying these calculations All NPV and IRR values presented in
this and subsequent chapters are obtained by using these functions on a popular
financial calculator (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 402)
297 COST OF GOOD SOLD (COGS)
Cost of goods sold is the direct costs attributable to the production of the
goods sold by a company This amount includes the cost of the materials used in
creating the good along with the direct labor costs used to produce the good It
excludes indirect expenses such as distribution costs and sales force costs
COGS is the costs that go into creating the products that a company sells
therefore the only costs included in the measure are those that are directly tied to the
production of the products For example the COGS for an automaker would include
the material costs for the parts that go into making the car along with the labor costs
used to put the car together The cost of sending the cars to dealerships and the cost of
the labor used to sell the car would be excluded
The exact costs included in the COGS calculation will differ from one type
of business to another The cost of goods attributed to a companys products are
47
expensed as the company sells these goods In summary for manufacturers COGS is
the cost of buying raw materials and manufacturing finished products For retailers
itrsquos the cost of obtaining or buying the products sold to customers If the company is
in a service industry COGS is the cost of the service it offers
48
49
50
27
26 SWOT ANALYSIS
A Way to monitoring the external and internal marketing environment is by using
SWOT analysis (Kotler Keller 2012 70) In their book Osterwalder and Pigneur
(2010 224) mentioned that a SWOT analysis in the business model yields two
results
1 Provides a snapshot of where is our business are (strength and weakness as
internal environment)
2 Suggest some future trajectories (opportunities and threats as external
environment)
SWOT analysis is such an important part in the process of designing business model
prototypes
A business unit must monitor key macro environment forces and significant
micro environment factors that affect is ability to earn profits An opportunity is the
are of buyer need an interest that a company has a high probability of profitability
satisfying Meanwhile a threat is a challenge posed by an unfavorable trend or
development that in the absence of defensive marketing action would led to lower
sales or profit (Kotler Keller 2012 71)
Meanwhile as an evaluation the business itself has to looking to its strength
and weaknesses By looking on these points the business could consider whether it
should limit itself to those opportunities for which it possesses the required strength
or consider those that might require it to find or develop new strength
28
261 TOWS MATRIX
Based on the journal from Heinz Weihrich (1982) Tows Matrix is a variant of
the classic business tool SWOT Analysis TOWS and SWOT are acronyms for
different arrangements of the words Strengths Weaknesses Opportunities and
Threats
Here are four basic strategies depending on the prevalence of the analyzed
group of factors (positive or negative) in the environment and within the company
SO situation - maxi-maxi strategy This situation applies to the company for
which dominates strengths in the environment and opportunities within This
situation corresponds to the maxi-maxi strategy strong expansion and
diversified development
WO situation - mini-maxi strategy In this situation company has the more
vulnerabilities - weaknesses but its environment gives more opportunities
The strategy should include the use of these opportunities while reducing or
correcting weaknesses within the organization
ST situation - maxi-mini strategy The source of development difficulties for
the company are unfavorable external conditions (prevalence of threats) The
company may use large internal strengths in attempt to overcome threats from
environment
WT situation - mini-mini strategy The company in this case is devoid of any
development opportunities It operates in hostile environments and its
29
potential for change is small It does not have significant strengths which
could withstand threats Mini-mini strategy boils down to a pessimistic
version of the liquidation or in optimistic situation - to strive for survival or
merger with another organization
Figure 24 TOWS Matrix Source Weihrich (1982)
27 MARKETING THEORY
The American Marketing Association define marketing as the activity set of
institutions and process for creating communication delivering and exchanging
offerings that have value for customers clients partners and society at large (Kotler
Keller 2012 27) Peter Drucker a leading management theorist said that the aim of
marketing is to make selling superfluous Successful marketing need and
30
understanding creating delivering capturing and sustaining customer value The
marketing plan is the central instrument for directing and coordinating the marketing
effort
271 Marketing Management
Based on (Kotler amp Amstrong 2010) the marketing management is analysis
planning implementation and programs control that made for created developed
and maintenance the transaction for gain the benefit based on the company purposed
Company management consist of demand that relationship with the customers
272 Segmenting Targeting Positioning
Based on (Kotler 2001) there are many consumers with differential needs so
the company must share the market choose good segmentation and also made some
appropriate strategy to gain a big benefit than other competitors Those strategies
process consist of there point which are
1 Market Segmentation
Segmentation is the share consumer activity into a more homogenous group m
hopes of a response is obtained such as buy wear accept and believe On the
practice segmentation market is the process share market into group
consumer based on their needs characteristic behavior and differentiation
mix market (Kasali 203) Based on (Kotler 2003) there are 3 main
segmentations of variable which are
31
a Geographic segmentation
Dividing market into different geographical units such as nations
states regions countries cities and neighborhoods
b Demographic segmentation
Dividing market into groups based on demographic variables such as
age gender family size family life cycle income occupation
education religion race and nationality
c Psychographic segmentation
Dividing a market into different groups based on social class lifestyle
or personality characteristic
Based on (Kotler 2003) that the market segment can drive so the
segment of the market must have 5 characteristics which are
Measurable size of the segment purchasing power of the
segment we want to reach and the last one is characteristic of
the segment can be measurable
Substantial a segment becomes the unity of homogeny group
that have a power to gain benefit if the program and marketing
drive by these groups
Accessible the segment that must be reach and served
effectively
32
Differentiable that the segments can be separate by conceptual
and respond differently to the program and the different
elements of the marketing mix
Actionable the program have made effectively that must be
implemented to attract and serve the segments
2 Market Targeting
These methods purpose to establish target market evaluation process begins
with the attractiveness of each market segment and has one or more segments
most benefit to be entered Based on (Kotler 2003) these are 5 patterns that
we can used to enter the market which are
a Single segment concentration
Concentrate with one segment the company get the knowledge
about what the market needs that to be the reach target market
and get a strong minded of consumers in that segment This
pattern have a high risk if there are saturation occurs in this
segment the company faces the risk of losing the entire market
b Selective specialization
On this pattern the company can choose the segment market
that where segment must gain the benefit The advantage of
this pattern are the ability of the company to reduce the risk
lower
c Product specialization
33
This pattern showed the company produced the goods which
will be sold in some segments
d Market specialization
The market showed that company produced the goods and sell
to the one segment the advantages if this pattern the company
have a high reputation from the consumer that segment market
have been entered
e Full market coverage
On this pattern the company try to reach whole market with
produced what consumer needs with the differential product to
gain the whole market the entered
3 Market Positioning
Market positioning is the activity of the company to place their product on the
market so their product get a clear position distinguishable as well as more
expected than competing production the minds of the target consumers that
will provide huge benefits in the target market
Based on (Kotler 2003) the company must avoid the four main errors in
placing market position which are
a Under positioning
It is mean the placement too low that causing superficial
picture of the product so consumer have a low response to the
product
b Over positioning
34
The placement is too high so it can cause the false perception
from consumers on the price of the product so consumers are
reluctant to buy because they think price is too high
c Confused positioning
Confusing placement of the product because the company too
often change their market position
d Doubtful positioning
Dubious product placement the effect of this position the
consumers distrust of the product
273 Marketing Mix
Based on (Kotler ampAmstrong 2010) marketing mix is a unity of the tools of
marketing that the tactical as well as directed and used by the company to produce the
desired response target market Marketing mix is a modern marketing theory
Marketing mix defined as the set of marketing tools that the form use to pursue its
marketing objective in the target market (Kotler 1994 98) Based on the Journal
Marketing by Chai Lee Goi Marketing mix is not scientific theory but a conceptual
framework that identifies the principal decision making manager make in configuring
their offerings to suit consumersrsquo needs (Lee Chai Goi 2009 1) To gain the benefit
for the company marketing mix is the weapon that company usually used to get the
change on the market That changed was grouped by four strategies named ldquo4Psrdquo
that consist of product price place and promotion
35
Product
Product is goods or services that company offered to the market
Price
Price is the several money that consumer must pay to buy a product
Place
Place (distribution) not only represent that the product can achieve or known
but also activity that company do for the product the produced easy to get at
the market and consumers
Promotion
Is the activity that company do to communicate their product and get the
consumer to reach their product Consist of advertising events sponsorship
and other activity are summarized in the Integrated Marketing
Communication (IMC)
Booms and Bitner is suggested 3 other elements beides the traditional 4Prsquos by
Kotler for service business which are (wwwlenamarketingnet 2013)
Physical Evidence
Is about where the service is being delivered from This element will
differentiate the company with other
Process
This element of the marketing mix looks at the used to deliver the service
36
People
People are essential ingredients in service provision recruiting and training
the right staff is required to create a competitive advantage
28 OPERATIONAL MANAGEMENT 281 THE SERVICE DESIGN PROCESS Service design is more comprehensive and occurs more often than product
design The inherent variability of service processes requires that the service system
be carefully designed The service concept defines the target customer and the desired
customer experience The service design process must be different and unique from
others to make the product selling point It also defines how onersquos service is
different from others and how it will compete in the marketplace Sometimes
services are successful because their service concept fills a previously unoccupied
niche or differs from the generally accepted mode of operation (Rusell amp Taylor
2011 193)
37
Figure 25 The Service Design Process Source Rusell amp Taylor2011
From the service concept a service package is created to meet customer
needs The package consists of a mixture of physical items sensual
benefits and psychological benefits Effective service design recognizes and
defines all the components of a service package Finding the appropriate mix of
physical items and sensual and psychological benefits and designing them to be
consistent with each other and the service concept is also important (Rusell amp
Taylor 2011 194) From the service package service specifications are developed
for performance design and delivery Performance specifications outline
expectations and requirements for general and specific customers
Performance specifications are converted into design specifications and finally
delivery specifications Design specifications must describe the service in
sufficient detail for the desired service experience to be replicated for different
individuals at numerous locations The specifications typically consist of
38
activities to be performed skill requirements and guidelines for service
providers and cost and time estimates Facility size location and layoutas well
as equipment needs are also included
29 FINANCIAL THEORY 291 BALANCE SHEET
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 62) The balance sheet presents a
summary statement of the firmrsquos financial position at a given time The statement
balances the firmrsquos assets (what it owns) against its financing which can be either
debt (what it owes) or equity (what was provided by owners) Below is the example
of balance sheet from Bartlettrsquos Company
Figure 26 Bartlett Company Balance Sheets Source Gitman amp Zitter 2012
39
The assets are listed from the most liquid (cash) ndash down to the least liquid
Marketable securities are very liquid short-term investments held by the firm
Because they are highly liquid marketable securities are viewed as a form of cash
(ldquonear cashrdquo) Accounts receivable represent the total monies owed the firm by its
customers on credit sales Inventories include raw materials work in process
(partially finished goods) and finished goods held by the firm The entry for gross
fixed assets is the original cost of all fixed (long-term) assets owned by the firm Net
fixed assets represent the difference between gross fixed assets and accumulated
depreciation ndash the total expense recorded for the depreciation of fixed assets The net
value of fixed assets is called their book value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
The liabilities and equity accounts are listed from short-term to long-
term Current liabilities include accounts payable amounts owed for credit
purchases by the firm notes payable outstanding short-term loans typically
from commercial banks and accruals amounts owed for services for which a bill
may not or will not be received Examples of accruals include taxes due the
government and wages due employees Long-term debt represents debt for which
payment is not due in the current year Stockholdersrsquo equity represents the
ownersrsquo claims on the firm The preferred stock entry shows the historical
proceeds from the sale of preferred stock(Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
40
292 INCOME STATEMENT
The income statement provides a financial summary of the firmrsquos operating
results during a specified period Most common are income statements covering a 1-
year period ending at a specified date ordinarily December 31 of the calendar year
Many large firms however operate on a 12-month financial cycle or fiscal year that
ends at a time other than December 31 In addition monthly income statements are
typically prepared for use by management and quarterly statements must be made
available to the stockholders of publicly owned corporations (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 59-60) The example of income statement is shown below
Figure 27 Bartlett Company Income
Statement Source GitmanampZitter2012
293 CASH FLOW ANALYSIS
A cash flow statement is one of the most important financial statements for a
project or business The statement can be as simple as a one page analysis or may
41
involve several schedules that feed information into a central statement A cash flow
statement is a listing of the flows of cash into and out of the business or project
Many cash flows are constructed with multiple time periods
For example it may list monthly cash inflows and outflows over a yearrsquos time
It not only projects the cash balance remaining at the end of the year but also
the cash balance for each month (wwwextensioniastateedu 2013) Some cash
flow budgets are constructed so that we can monitor the accuracy of our projections
These budgets allow us to make monthly cash flow projections for the coming year
and also enter actual inflows and outflows as we progress through the year This
will allow us to compare your projections to your actual cash flows and make
adjustments to the projections for the remainder of the year
Figure 28 Example of
Cash Flow Source
Gitman ampZitter 2012
Even though cash flow and profitability are closely related they are different
42
A cash flow statement lists cash inflows and cash outflows while the income
statement lists income and expenses A cash flow statement shows liquidity while an
income statement shows profitability
294 PAYBACK PERIOD
Payback periods are commonly used to evaluate proposed investments The
payback period is the amount of time required for the firm to recover its initial
investment in a project as calculated from cash inflows The payback period can be
found by dividing the initial investment by the annual cash inflow When the
payback period is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the following decision
criteria apply
If the payback period is less than the maximum acceptable payback
period accept the project
If the payback period is greater than the maximum acceptable payback
period reject the project
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 393) the length of the maximum
acceptable payback period is determined by management This value is set
subjectively on the basis of a number of factors including the type of project
(expansion replacement or renewal other) the perceived risk of the project and the
perceived relationship between the payback period and the share value It is simply a
value that management feels on average will result in value-creating investment
decisions
43
By measuring how quickly the firm recovers its initial investment the
payback period also gives implicit consideration to the timing of cash flows and
therefore to the time value of money Because it can be viewed as a measure of
risk exposure many firms use the payback period as a decision criterion or as a
supplement to other decision techniques The longer the firm must wait to recover
its invested funds the greater the possibility of a calamity Hence the shorter the
payback period the lower the firmrsquos risk exposure A second weakness is that this
approach fails to take fully into account the time factor in the value of money A
third weakness of payback is its failure to recognize cash flows that occur after the
payback period (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 394-396)
Figure 29 Calculation of
Payback Period Source
Gitman amp Zitter 2012
44
295 NET PRESENT VALUE (NPV)
The method used by most large companies to evaluate investment projects is
called net present value (NPV) The intuition behind the NPV method is simple
When firms make investments they are spending money that they obtained in one
form or another from investors Investors expect a return on the money that they give
to firms so a firm should undertake an investment only if the present value of the
cash flow that the investment generates is greater than the cost of making the
investment in the first place
Because the NPV method takes into account the time value of investorsrsquo
money it is a more sophisticated capital budgeting technique than the payback rule
The NPV method discounts the firmrsquos cash flows at the firmrsquos cost of capital This
rate is the minimum return that must be earned on a project to satisfy the firmrsquos
investors Projects with lower returns fail to meet investorsrsquo expectations and
therefore decrease firm value and projects with higher returns increase firm
value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
The net present value (NPV) is found by subtracting a projectrsquos initial
investment (CF0) from the present value of its cash inflows (CFt) discounted at a
rate equal to the firmrsquos cost of capital (r) as shown below
NPV = Present value of cash inflows - Initial investment
When NPV is used both inflows and outflows are measured in terms of
45
present dollars For a project that has cash outflows beyond the initial investment the
net present value of a project would be found by subtracting the present value of
outflows from the present value of inflows When NPV is used to make accept reject
decisions the decision criteria are as follows
If the NPV is greater than $0 accept the project
If the NPV is less than $0 reject the project
If the NPV is greater than $0 the firm will earn a return greater than its cost of
capital Such action should increase the market value of the firm and therefore the
wealth of its owners by an amount equal to the NPV (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
296 INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN (IRR)
The internal rate of return (IRR) is one of the most widely used capital
budgeting techniques The internal rate of return (IRR) is the discount rate that
equates the NPV of an investment opportunity with $0 (because the present value of
cash inflows equals the initial investment) It is the rate of return that the firm will
earn if it invests in the project and receives the given cash inflows (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 401)
When IRR is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the decision criteria are as
follows
If the IRR is greater than the cost of capital accept the project
46
If the IRR is less than the cost of capital reject the project
To calculate IRR Most financial calculators have a pre-programmed IRR
function that can be used to simplify the IRR calculation With these calculators you
merely punch in all cash flows just as if to calculate NPV and then depress IRR to
find the internal rate of return Computer software including spreadsheets is also
available for simplifying these calculations All NPV and IRR values presented in
this and subsequent chapters are obtained by using these functions on a popular
financial calculator (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 402)
297 COST OF GOOD SOLD (COGS)
Cost of goods sold is the direct costs attributable to the production of the
goods sold by a company This amount includes the cost of the materials used in
creating the good along with the direct labor costs used to produce the good It
excludes indirect expenses such as distribution costs and sales force costs
COGS is the costs that go into creating the products that a company sells
therefore the only costs included in the measure are those that are directly tied to the
production of the products For example the COGS for an automaker would include
the material costs for the parts that go into making the car along with the labor costs
used to put the car together The cost of sending the cars to dealerships and the cost of
the labor used to sell the car would be excluded
The exact costs included in the COGS calculation will differ from one type
of business to another The cost of goods attributed to a companys products are
47
expensed as the company sells these goods In summary for manufacturers COGS is
the cost of buying raw materials and manufacturing finished products For retailers
itrsquos the cost of obtaining or buying the products sold to customers If the company is
in a service industry COGS is the cost of the service it offers
48
49
50
28
261 TOWS MATRIX
Based on the journal from Heinz Weihrich (1982) Tows Matrix is a variant of
the classic business tool SWOT Analysis TOWS and SWOT are acronyms for
different arrangements of the words Strengths Weaknesses Opportunities and
Threats
Here are four basic strategies depending on the prevalence of the analyzed
group of factors (positive or negative) in the environment and within the company
SO situation - maxi-maxi strategy This situation applies to the company for
which dominates strengths in the environment and opportunities within This
situation corresponds to the maxi-maxi strategy strong expansion and
diversified development
WO situation - mini-maxi strategy In this situation company has the more
vulnerabilities - weaknesses but its environment gives more opportunities
The strategy should include the use of these opportunities while reducing or
correcting weaknesses within the organization
ST situation - maxi-mini strategy The source of development difficulties for
the company are unfavorable external conditions (prevalence of threats) The
company may use large internal strengths in attempt to overcome threats from
environment
WT situation - mini-mini strategy The company in this case is devoid of any
development opportunities It operates in hostile environments and its
29
potential for change is small It does not have significant strengths which
could withstand threats Mini-mini strategy boils down to a pessimistic
version of the liquidation or in optimistic situation - to strive for survival or
merger with another organization
Figure 24 TOWS Matrix Source Weihrich (1982)
27 MARKETING THEORY
The American Marketing Association define marketing as the activity set of
institutions and process for creating communication delivering and exchanging
offerings that have value for customers clients partners and society at large (Kotler
Keller 2012 27) Peter Drucker a leading management theorist said that the aim of
marketing is to make selling superfluous Successful marketing need and
30
understanding creating delivering capturing and sustaining customer value The
marketing plan is the central instrument for directing and coordinating the marketing
effort
271 Marketing Management
Based on (Kotler amp Amstrong 2010) the marketing management is analysis
planning implementation and programs control that made for created developed
and maintenance the transaction for gain the benefit based on the company purposed
Company management consist of demand that relationship with the customers
272 Segmenting Targeting Positioning
Based on (Kotler 2001) there are many consumers with differential needs so
the company must share the market choose good segmentation and also made some
appropriate strategy to gain a big benefit than other competitors Those strategies
process consist of there point which are
1 Market Segmentation
Segmentation is the share consumer activity into a more homogenous group m
hopes of a response is obtained such as buy wear accept and believe On the
practice segmentation market is the process share market into group
consumer based on their needs characteristic behavior and differentiation
mix market (Kasali 203) Based on (Kotler 2003) there are 3 main
segmentations of variable which are
31
a Geographic segmentation
Dividing market into different geographical units such as nations
states regions countries cities and neighborhoods
b Demographic segmentation
Dividing market into groups based on demographic variables such as
age gender family size family life cycle income occupation
education religion race and nationality
c Psychographic segmentation
Dividing a market into different groups based on social class lifestyle
or personality characteristic
Based on (Kotler 2003) that the market segment can drive so the
segment of the market must have 5 characteristics which are
Measurable size of the segment purchasing power of the
segment we want to reach and the last one is characteristic of
the segment can be measurable
Substantial a segment becomes the unity of homogeny group
that have a power to gain benefit if the program and marketing
drive by these groups
Accessible the segment that must be reach and served
effectively
32
Differentiable that the segments can be separate by conceptual
and respond differently to the program and the different
elements of the marketing mix
Actionable the program have made effectively that must be
implemented to attract and serve the segments
2 Market Targeting
These methods purpose to establish target market evaluation process begins
with the attractiveness of each market segment and has one or more segments
most benefit to be entered Based on (Kotler 2003) these are 5 patterns that
we can used to enter the market which are
a Single segment concentration
Concentrate with one segment the company get the knowledge
about what the market needs that to be the reach target market
and get a strong minded of consumers in that segment This
pattern have a high risk if there are saturation occurs in this
segment the company faces the risk of losing the entire market
b Selective specialization
On this pattern the company can choose the segment market
that where segment must gain the benefit The advantage of
this pattern are the ability of the company to reduce the risk
lower
c Product specialization
33
This pattern showed the company produced the goods which
will be sold in some segments
d Market specialization
The market showed that company produced the goods and sell
to the one segment the advantages if this pattern the company
have a high reputation from the consumer that segment market
have been entered
e Full market coverage
On this pattern the company try to reach whole market with
produced what consumer needs with the differential product to
gain the whole market the entered
3 Market Positioning
Market positioning is the activity of the company to place their product on the
market so their product get a clear position distinguishable as well as more
expected than competing production the minds of the target consumers that
will provide huge benefits in the target market
Based on (Kotler 2003) the company must avoid the four main errors in
placing market position which are
a Under positioning
It is mean the placement too low that causing superficial
picture of the product so consumer have a low response to the
product
b Over positioning
34
The placement is too high so it can cause the false perception
from consumers on the price of the product so consumers are
reluctant to buy because they think price is too high
c Confused positioning
Confusing placement of the product because the company too
often change their market position
d Doubtful positioning
Dubious product placement the effect of this position the
consumers distrust of the product
273 Marketing Mix
Based on (Kotler ampAmstrong 2010) marketing mix is a unity of the tools of
marketing that the tactical as well as directed and used by the company to produce the
desired response target market Marketing mix is a modern marketing theory
Marketing mix defined as the set of marketing tools that the form use to pursue its
marketing objective in the target market (Kotler 1994 98) Based on the Journal
Marketing by Chai Lee Goi Marketing mix is not scientific theory but a conceptual
framework that identifies the principal decision making manager make in configuring
their offerings to suit consumersrsquo needs (Lee Chai Goi 2009 1) To gain the benefit
for the company marketing mix is the weapon that company usually used to get the
change on the market That changed was grouped by four strategies named ldquo4Psrdquo
that consist of product price place and promotion
35
Product
Product is goods or services that company offered to the market
Price
Price is the several money that consumer must pay to buy a product
Place
Place (distribution) not only represent that the product can achieve or known
but also activity that company do for the product the produced easy to get at
the market and consumers
Promotion
Is the activity that company do to communicate their product and get the
consumer to reach their product Consist of advertising events sponsorship
and other activity are summarized in the Integrated Marketing
Communication (IMC)
Booms and Bitner is suggested 3 other elements beides the traditional 4Prsquos by
Kotler for service business which are (wwwlenamarketingnet 2013)
Physical Evidence
Is about where the service is being delivered from This element will
differentiate the company with other
Process
This element of the marketing mix looks at the used to deliver the service
36
People
People are essential ingredients in service provision recruiting and training
the right staff is required to create a competitive advantage
28 OPERATIONAL MANAGEMENT 281 THE SERVICE DESIGN PROCESS Service design is more comprehensive and occurs more often than product
design The inherent variability of service processes requires that the service system
be carefully designed The service concept defines the target customer and the desired
customer experience The service design process must be different and unique from
others to make the product selling point It also defines how onersquos service is
different from others and how it will compete in the marketplace Sometimes
services are successful because their service concept fills a previously unoccupied
niche or differs from the generally accepted mode of operation (Rusell amp Taylor
2011 193)
37
Figure 25 The Service Design Process Source Rusell amp Taylor2011
From the service concept a service package is created to meet customer
needs The package consists of a mixture of physical items sensual
benefits and psychological benefits Effective service design recognizes and
defines all the components of a service package Finding the appropriate mix of
physical items and sensual and psychological benefits and designing them to be
consistent with each other and the service concept is also important (Rusell amp
Taylor 2011 194) From the service package service specifications are developed
for performance design and delivery Performance specifications outline
expectations and requirements for general and specific customers
Performance specifications are converted into design specifications and finally
delivery specifications Design specifications must describe the service in
sufficient detail for the desired service experience to be replicated for different
individuals at numerous locations The specifications typically consist of
38
activities to be performed skill requirements and guidelines for service
providers and cost and time estimates Facility size location and layoutas well
as equipment needs are also included
29 FINANCIAL THEORY 291 BALANCE SHEET
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 62) The balance sheet presents a
summary statement of the firmrsquos financial position at a given time The statement
balances the firmrsquos assets (what it owns) against its financing which can be either
debt (what it owes) or equity (what was provided by owners) Below is the example
of balance sheet from Bartlettrsquos Company
Figure 26 Bartlett Company Balance Sheets Source Gitman amp Zitter 2012
39
The assets are listed from the most liquid (cash) ndash down to the least liquid
Marketable securities are very liquid short-term investments held by the firm
Because they are highly liquid marketable securities are viewed as a form of cash
(ldquonear cashrdquo) Accounts receivable represent the total monies owed the firm by its
customers on credit sales Inventories include raw materials work in process
(partially finished goods) and finished goods held by the firm The entry for gross
fixed assets is the original cost of all fixed (long-term) assets owned by the firm Net
fixed assets represent the difference between gross fixed assets and accumulated
depreciation ndash the total expense recorded for the depreciation of fixed assets The net
value of fixed assets is called their book value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
The liabilities and equity accounts are listed from short-term to long-
term Current liabilities include accounts payable amounts owed for credit
purchases by the firm notes payable outstanding short-term loans typically
from commercial banks and accruals amounts owed for services for which a bill
may not or will not be received Examples of accruals include taxes due the
government and wages due employees Long-term debt represents debt for which
payment is not due in the current year Stockholdersrsquo equity represents the
ownersrsquo claims on the firm The preferred stock entry shows the historical
proceeds from the sale of preferred stock(Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
40
292 INCOME STATEMENT
The income statement provides a financial summary of the firmrsquos operating
results during a specified period Most common are income statements covering a 1-
year period ending at a specified date ordinarily December 31 of the calendar year
Many large firms however operate on a 12-month financial cycle or fiscal year that
ends at a time other than December 31 In addition monthly income statements are
typically prepared for use by management and quarterly statements must be made
available to the stockholders of publicly owned corporations (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 59-60) The example of income statement is shown below
Figure 27 Bartlett Company Income
Statement Source GitmanampZitter2012
293 CASH FLOW ANALYSIS
A cash flow statement is one of the most important financial statements for a
project or business The statement can be as simple as a one page analysis or may
41
involve several schedules that feed information into a central statement A cash flow
statement is a listing of the flows of cash into and out of the business or project
Many cash flows are constructed with multiple time periods
For example it may list monthly cash inflows and outflows over a yearrsquos time
It not only projects the cash balance remaining at the end of the year but also
the cash balance for each month (wwwextensioniastateedu 2013) Some cash
flow budgets are constructed so that we can monitor the accuracy of our projections
These budgets allow us to make monthly cash flow projections for the coming year
and also enter actual inflows and outflows as we progress through the year This
will allow us to compare your projections to your actual cash flows and make
adjustments to the projections for the remainder of the year
Figure 28 Example of
Cash Flow Source
Gitman ampZitter 2012
Even though cash flow and profitability are closely related they are different
42
A cash flow statement lists cash inflows and cash outflows while the income
statement lists income and expenses A cash flow statement shows liquidity while an
income statement shows profitability
294 PAYBACK PERIOD
Payback periods are commonly used to evaluate proposed investments The
payback period is the amount of time required for the firm to recover its initial
investment in a project as calculated from cash inflows The payback period can be
found by dividing the initial investment by the annual cash inflow When the
payback period is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the following decision
criteria apply
If the payback period is less than the maximum acceptable payback
period accept the project
If the payback period is greater than the maximum acceptable payback
period reject the project
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 393) the length of the maximum
acceptable payback period is determined by management This value is set
subjectively on the basis of a number of factors including the type of project
(expansion replacement or renewal other) the perceived risk of the project and the
perceived relationship between the payback period and the share value It is simply a
value that management feels on average will result in value-creating investment
decisions
43
By measuring how quickly the firm recovers its initial investment the
payback period also gives implicit consideration to the timing of cash flows and
therefore to the time value of money Because it can be viewed as a measure of
risk exposure many firms use the payback period as a decision criterion or as a
supplement to other decision techniques The longer the firm must wait to recover
its invested funds the greater the possibility of a calamity Hence the shorter the
payback period the lower the firmrsquos risk exposure A second weakness is that this
approach fails to take fully into account the time factor in the value of money A
third weakness of payback is its failure to recognize cash flows that occur after the
payback period (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 394-396)
Figure 29 Calculation of
Payback Period Source
Gitman amp Zitter 2012
44
295 NET PRESENT VALUE (NPV)
The method used by most large companies to evaluate investment projects is
called net present value (NPV) The intuition behind the NPV method is simple
When firms make investments they are spending money that they obtained in one
form or another from investors Investors expect a return on the money that they give
to firms so a firm should undertake an investment only if the present value of the
cash flow that the investment generates is greater than the cost of making the
investment in the first place
Because the NPV method takes into account the time value of investorsrsquo
money it is a more sophisticated capital budgeting technique than the payback rule
The NPV method discounts the firmrsquos cash flows at the firmrsquos cost of capital This
rate is the minimum return that must be earned on a project to satisfy the firmrsquos
investors Projects with lower returns fail to meet investorsrsquo expectations and
therefore decrease firm value and projects with higher returns increase firm
value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
The net present value (NPV) is found by subtracting a projectrsquos initial
investment (CF0) from the present value of its cash inflows (CFt) discounted at a
rate equal to the firmrsquos cost of capital (r) as shown below
NPV = Present value of cash inflows - Initial investment
When NPV is used both inflows and outflows are measured in terms of
45
present dollars For a project that has cash outflows beyond the initial investment the
net present value of a project would be found by subtracting the present value of
outflows from the present value of inflows When NPV is used to make accept reject
decisions the decision criteria are as follows
If the NPV is greater than $0 accept the project
If the NPV is less than $0 reject the project
If the NPV is greater than $0 the firm will earn a return greater than its cost of
capital Such action should increase the market value of the firm and therefore the
wealth of its owners by an amount equal to the NPV (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
296 INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN (IRR)
The internal rate of return (IRR) is one of the most widely used capital
budgeting techniques The internal rate of return (IRR) is the discount rate that
equates the NPV of an investment opportunity with $0 (because the present value of
cash inflows equals the initial investment) It is the rate of return that the firm will
earn if it invests in the project and receives the given cash inflows (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 401)
When IRR is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the decision criteria are as
follows
If the IRR is greater than the cost of capital accept the project
46
If the IRR is less than the cost of capital reject the project
To calculate IRR Most financial calculators have a pre-programmed IRR
function that can be used to simplify the IRR calculation With these calculators you
merely punch in all cash flows just as if to calculate NPV and then depress IRR to
find the internal rate of return Computer software including spreadsheets is also
available for simplifying these calculations All NPV and IRR values presented in
this and subsequent chapters are obtained by using these functions on a popular
financial calculator (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 402)
297 COST OF GOOD SOLD (COGS)
Cost of goods sold is the direct costs attributable to the production of the
goods sold by a company This amount includes the cost of the materials used in
creating the good along with the direct labor costs used to produce the good It
excludes indirect expenses such as distribution costs and sales force costs
COGS is the costs that go into creating the products that a company sells
therefore the only costs included in the measure are those that are directly tied to the
production of the products For example the COGS for an automaker would include
the material costs for the parts that go into making the car along with the labor costs
used to put the car together The cost of sending the cars to dealerships and the cost of
the labor used to sell the car would be excluded
The exact costs included in the COGS calculation will differ from one type
of business to another The cost of goods attributed to a companys products are
47
expensed as the company sells these goods In summary for manufacturers COGS is
the cost of buying raw materials and manufacturing finished products For retailers
itrsquos the cost of obtaining or buying the products sold to customers If the company is
in a service industry COGS is the cost of the service it offers
48
49
50
29
potential for change is small It does not have significant strengths which
could withstand threats Mini-mini strategy boils down to a pessimistic
version of the liquidation or in optimistic situation - to strive for survival or
merger with another organization
Figure 24 TOWS Matrix Source Weihrich (1982)
27 MARKETING THEORY
The American Marketing Association define marketing as the activity set of
institutions and process for creating communication delivering and exchanging
offerings that have value for customers clients partners and society at large (Kotler
Keller 2012 27) Peter Drucker a leading management theorist said that the aim of
marketing is to make selling superfluous Successful marketing need and
30
understanding creating delivering capturing and sustaining customer value The
marketing plan is the central instrument for directing and coordinating the marketing
effort
271 Marketing Management
Based on (Kotler amp Amstrong 2010) the marketing management is analysis
planning implementation and programs control that made for created developed
and maintenance the transaction for gain the benefit based on the company purposed
Company management consist of demand that relationship with the customers
272 Segmenting Targeting Positioning
Based on (Kotler 2001) there are many consumers with differential needs so
the company must share the market choose good segmentation and also made some
appropriate strategy to gain a big benefit than other competitors Those strategies
process consist of there point which are
1 Market Segmentation
Segmentation is the share consumer activity into a more homogenous group m
hopes of a response is obtained such as buy wear accept and believe On the
practice segmentation market is the process share market into group
consumer based on their needs characteristic behavior and differentiation
mix market (Kasali 203) Based on (Kotler 2003) there are 3 main
segmentations of variable which are
31
a Geographic segmentation
Dividing market into different geographical units such as nations
states regions countries cities and neighborhoods
b Demographic segmentation
Dividing market into groups based on demographic variables such as
age gender family size family life cycle income occupation
education religion race and nationality
c Psychographic segmentation
Dividing a market into different groups based on social class lifestyle
or personality characteristic
Based on (Kotler 2003) that the market segment can drive so the
segment of the market must have 5 characteristics which are
Measurable size of the segment purchasing power of the
segment we want to reach and the last one is characteristic of
the segment can be measurable
Substantial a segment becomes the unity of homogeny group
that have a power to gain benefit if the program and marketing
drive by these groups
Accessible the segment that must be reach and served
effectively
32
Differentiable that the segments can be separate by conceptual
and respond differently to the program and the different
elements of the marketing mix
Actionable the program have made effectively that must be
implemented to attract and serve the segments
2 Market Targeting
These methods purpose to establish target market evaluation process begins
with the attractiveness of each market segment and has one or more segments
most benefit to be entered Based on (Kotler 2003) these are 5 patterns that
we can used to enter the market which are
a Single segment concentration
Concentrate with one segment the company get the knowledge
about what the market needs that to be the reach target market
and get a strong minded of consumers in that segment This
pattern have a high risk if there are saturation occurs in this
segment the company faces the risk of losing the entire market
b Selective specialization
On this pattern the company can choose the segment market
that where segment must gain the benefit The advantage of
this pattern are the ability of the company to reduce the risk
lower
c Product specialization
33
This pattern showed the company produced the goods which
will be sold in some segments
d Market specialization
The market showed that company produced the goods and sell
to the one segment the advantages if this pattern the company
have a high reputation from the consumer that segment market
have been entered
e Full market coverage
On this pattern the company try to reach whole market with
produced what consumer needs with the differential product to
gain the whole market the entered
3 Market Positioning
Market positioning is the activity of the company to place their product on the
market so their product get a clear position distinguishable as well as more
expected than competing production the minds of the target consumers that
will provide huge benefits in the target market
Based on (Kotler 2003) the company must avoid the four main errors in
placing market position which are
a Under positioning
It is mean the placement too low that causing superficial
picture of the product so consumer have a low response to the
product
b Over positioning
34
The placement is too high so it can cause the false perception
from consumers on the price of the product so consumers are
reluctant to buy because they think price is too high
c Confused positioning
Confusing placement of the product because the company too
often change their market position
d Doubtful positioning
Dubious product placement the effect of this position the
consumers distrust of the product
273 Marketing Mix
Based on (Kotler ampAmstrong 2010) marketing mix is a unity of the tools of
marketing that the tactical as well as directed and used by the company to produce the
desired response target market Marketing mix is a modern marketing theory
Marketing mix defined as the set of marketing tools that the form use to pursue its
marketing objective in the target market (Kotler 1994 98) Based on the Journal
Marketing by Chai Lee Goi Marketing mix is not scientific theory but a conceptual
framework that identifies the principal decision making manager make in configuring
their offerings to suit consumersrsquo needs (Lee Chai Goi 2009 1) To gain the benefit
for the company marketing mix is the weapon that company usually used to get the
change on the market That changed was grouped by four strategies named ldquo4Psrdquo
that consist of product price place and promotion
35
Product
Product is goods or services that company offered to the market
Price
Price is the several money that consumer must pay to buy a product
Place
Place (distribution) not only represent that the product can achieve or known
but also activity that company do for the product the produced easy to get at
the market and consumers
Promotion
Is the activity that company do to communicate their product and get the
consumer to reach their product Consist of advertising events sponsorship
and other activity are summarized in the Integrated Marketing
Communication (IMC)
Booms and Bitner is suggested 3 other elements beides the traditional 4Prsquos by
Kotler for service business which are (wwwlenamarketingnet 2013)
Physical Evidence
Is about where the service is being delivered from This element will
differentiate the company with other
Process
This element of the marketing mix looks at the used to deliver the service
36
People
People are essential ingredients in service provision recruiting and training
the right staff is required to create a competitive advantage
28 OPERATIONAL MANAGEMENT 281 THE SERVICE DESIGN PROCESS Service design is more comprehensive and occurs more often than product
design The inherent variability of service processes requires that the service system
be carefully designed The service concept defines the target customer and the desired
customer experience The service design process must be different and unique from
others to make the product selling point It also defines how onersquos service is
different from others and how it will compete in the marketplace Sometimes
services are successful because their service concept fills a previously unoccupied
niche or differs from the generally accepted mode of operation (Rusell amp Taylor
2011 193)
37
Figure 25 The Service Design Process Source Rusell amp Taylor2011
From the service concept a service package is created to meet customer
needs The package consists of a mixture of physical items sensual
benefits and psychological benefits Effective service design recognizes and
defines all the components of a service package Finding the appropriate mix of
physical items and sensual and psychological benefits and designing them to be
consistent with each other and the service concept is also important (Rusell amp
Taylor 2011 194) From the service package service specifications are developed
for performance design and delivery Performance specifications outline
expectations and requirements for general and specific customers
Performance specifications are converted into design specifications and finally
delivery specifications Design specifications must describe the service in
sufficient detail for the desired service experience to be replicated for different
individuals at numerous locations The specifications typically consist of
38
activities to be performed skill requirements and guidelines for service
providers and cost and time estimates Facility size location and layoutas well
as equipment needs are also included
29 FINANCIAL THEORY 291 BALANCE SHEET
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 62) The balance sheet presents a
summary statement of the firmrsquos financial position at a given time The statement
balances the firmrsquos assets (what it owns) against its financing which can be either
debt (what it owes) or equity (what was provided by owners) Below is the example
of balance sheet from Bartlettrsquos Company
Figure 26 Bartlett Company Balance Sheets Source Gitman amp Zitter 2012
39
The assets are listed from the most liquid (cash) ndash down to the least liquid
Marketable securities are very liquid short-term investments held by the firm
Because they are highly liquid marketable securities are viewed as a form of cash
(ldquonear cashrdquo) Accounts receivable represent the total monies owed the firm by its
customers on credit sales Inventories include raw materials work in process
(partially finished goods) and finished goods held by the firm The entry for gross
fixed assets is the original cost of all fixed (long-term) assets owned by the firm Net
fixed assets represent the difference between gross fixed assets and accumulated
depreciation ndash the total expense recorded for the depreciation of fixed assets The net
value of fixed assets is called their book value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
The liabilities and equity accounts are listed from short-term to long-
term Current liabilities include accounts payable amounts owed for credit
purchases by the firm notes payable outstanding short-term loans typically
from commercial banks and accruals amounts owed for services for which a bill
may not or will not be received Examples of accruals include taxes due the
government and wages due employees Long-term debt represents debt for which
payment is not due in the current year Stockholdersrsquo equity represents the
ownersrsquo claims on the firm The preferred stock entry shows the historical
proceeds from the sale of preferred stock(Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
40
292 INCOME STATEMENT
The income statement provides a financial summary of the firmrsquos operating
results during a specified period Most common are income statements covering a 1-
year period ending at a specified date ordinarily December 31 of the calendar year
Many large firms however operate on a 12-month financial cycle or fiscal year that
ends at a time other than December 31 In addition monthly income statements are
typically prepared for use by management and quarterly statements must be made
available to the stockholders of publicly owned corporations (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 59-60) The example of income statement is shown below
Figure 27 Bartlett Company Income
Statement Source GitmanampZitter2012
293 CASH FLOW ANALYSIS
A cash flow statement is one of the most important financial statements for a
project or business The statement can be as simple as a one page analysis or may
41
involve several schedules that feed information into a central statement A cash flow
statement is a listing of the flows of cash into and out of the business or project
Many cash flows are constructed with multiple time periods
For example it may list monthly cash inflows and outflows over a yearrsquos time
It not only projects the cash balance remaining at the end of the year but also
the cash balance for each month (wwwextensioniastateedu 2013) Some cash
flow budgets are constructed so that we can monitor the accuracy of our projections
These budgets allow us to make monthly cash flow projections for the coming year
and also enter actual inflows and outflows as we progress through the year This
will allow us to compare your projections to your actual cash flows and make
adjustments to the projections for the remainder of the year
Figure 28 Example of
Cash Flow Source
Gitman ampZitter 2012
Even though cash flow and profitability are closely related they are different
42
A cash flow statement lists cash inflows and cash outflows while the income
statement lists income and expenses A cash flow statement shows liquidity while an
income statement shows profitability
294 PAYBACK PERIOD
Payback periods are commonly used to evaluate proposed investments The
payback period is the amount of time required for the firm to recover its initial
investment in a project as calculated from cash inflows The payback period can be
found by dividing the initial investment by the annual cash inflow When the
payback period is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the following decision
criteria apply
If the payback period is less than the maximum acceptable payback
period accept the project
If the payback period is greater than the maximum acceptable payback
period reject the project
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 393) the length of the maximum
acceptable payback period is determined by management This value is set
subjectively on the basis of a number of factors including the type of project
(expansion replacement or renewal other) the perceived risk of the project and the
perceived relationship between the payback period and the share value It is simply a
value that management feels on average will result in value-creating investment
decisions
43
By measuring how quickly the firm recovers its initial investment the
payback period also gives implicit consideration to the timing of cash flows and
therefore to the time value of money Because it can be viewed as a measure of
risk exposure many firms use the payback period as a decision criterion or as a
supplement to other decision techniques The longer the firm must wait to recover
its invested funds the greater the possibility of a calamity Hence the shorter the
payback period the lower the firmrsquos risk exposure A second weakness is that this
approach fails to take fully into account the time factor in the value of money A
third weakness of payback is its failure to recognize cash flows that occur after the
payback period (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 394-396)
Figure 29 Calculation of
Payback Period Source
Gitman amp Zitter 2012
44
295 NET PRESENT VALUE (NPV)
The method used by most large companies to evaluate investment projects is
called net present value (NPV) The intuition behind the NPV method is simple
When firms make investments they are spending money that they obtained in one
form or another from investors Investors expect a return on the money that they give
to firms so a firm should undertake an investment only if the present value of the
cash flow that the investment generates is greater than the cost of making the
investment in the first place
Because the NPV method takes into account the time value of investorsrsquo
money it is a more sophisticated capital budgeting technique than the payback rule
The NPV method discounts the firmrsquos cash flows at the firmrsquos cost of capital This
rate is the minimum return that must be earned on a project to satisfy the firmrsquos
investors Projects with lower returns fail to meet investorsrsquo expectations and
therefore decrease firm value and projects with higher returns increase firm
value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
The net present value (NPV) is found by subtracting a projectrsquos initial
investment (CF0) from the present value of its cash inflows (CFt) discounted at a
rate equal to the firmrsquos cost of capital (r) as shown below
NPV = Present value of cash inflows - Initial investment
When NPV is used both inflows and outflows are measured in terms of
45
present dollars For a project that has cash outflows beyond the initial investment the
net present value of a project would be found by subtracting the present value of
outflows from the present value of inflows When NPV is used to make accept reject
decisions the decision criteria are as follows
If the NPV is greater than $0 accept the project
If the NPV is less than $0 reject the project
If the NPV is greater than $0 the firm will earn a return greater than its cost of
capital Such action should increase the market value of the firm and therefore the
wealth of its owners by an amount equal to the NPV (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
296 INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN (IRR)
The internal rate of return (IRR) is one of the most widely used capital
budgeting techniques The internal rate of return (IRR) is the discount rate that
equates the NPV of an investment opportunity with $0 (because the present value of
cash inflows equals the initial investment) It is the rate of return that the firm will
earn if it invests in the project and receives the given cash inflows (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 401)
When IRR is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the decision criteria are as
follows
If the IRR is greater than the cost of capital accept the project
46
If the IRR is less than the cost of capital reject the project
To calculate IRR Most financial calculators have a pre-programmed IRR
function that can be used to simplify the IRR calculation With these calculators you
merely punch in all cash flows just as if to calculate NPV and then depress IRR to
find the internal rate of return Computer software including spreadsheets is also
available for simplifying these calculations All NPV and IRR values presented in
this and subsequent chapters are obtained by using these functions on a popular
financial calculator (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 402)
297 COST OF GOOD SOLD (COGS)
Cost of goods sold is the direct costs attributable to the production of the
goods sold by a company This amount includes the cost of the materials used in
creating the good along with the direct labor costs used to produce the good It
excludes indirect expenses such as distribution costs and sales force costs
COGS is the costs that go into creating the products that a company sells
therefore the only costs included in the measure are those that are directly tied to the
production of the products For example the COGS for an automaker would include
the material costs for the parts that go into making the car along with the labor costs
used to put the car together The cost of sending the cars to dealerships and the cost of
the labor used to sell the car would be excluded
The exact costs included in the COGS calculation will differ from one type
of business to another The cost of goods attributed to a companys products are
47
expensed as the company sells these goods In summary for manufacturers COGS is
the cost of buying raw materials and manufacturing finished products For retailers
itrsquos the cost of obtaining or buying the products sold to customers If the company is
in a service industry COGS is the cost of the service it offers
48
49
50
30
understanding creating delivering capturing and sustaining customer value The
marketing plan is the central instrument for directing and coordinating the marketing
effort
271 Marketing Management
Based on (Kotler amp Amstrong 2010) the marketing management is analysis
planning implementation and programs control that made for created developed
and maintenance the transaction for gain the benefit based on the company purposed
Company management consist of demand that relationship with the customers
272 Segmenting Targeting Positioning
Based on (Kotler 2001) there are many consumers with differential needs so
the company must share the market choose good segmentation and also made some
appropriate strategy to gain a big benefit than other competitors Those strategies
process consist of there point which are
1 Market Segmentation
Segmentation is the share consumer activity into a more homogenous group m
hopes of a response is obtained such as buy wear accept and believe On the
practice segmentation market is the process share market into group
consumer based on their needs characteristic behavior and differentiation
mix market (Kasali 203) Based on (Kotler 2003) there are 3 main
segmentations of variable which are
31
a Geographic segmentation
Dividing market into different geographical units such as nations
states regions countries cities and neighborhoods
b Demographic segmentation
Dividing market into groups based on demographic variables such as
age gender family size family life cycle income occupation
education religion race and nationality
c Psychographic segmentation
Dividing a market into different groups based on social class lifestyle
or personality characteristic
Based on (Kotler 2003) that the market segment can drive so the
segment of the market must have 5 characteristics which are
Measurable size of the segment purchasing power of the
segment we want to reach and the last one is characteristic of
the segment can be measurable
Substantial a segment becomes the unity of homogeny group
that have a power to gain benefit if the program and marketing
drive by these groups
Accessible the segment that must be reach and served
effectively
32
Differentiable that the segments can be separate by conceptual
and respond differently to the program and the different
elements of the marketing mix
Actionable the program have made effectively that must be
implemented to attract and serve the segments
2 Market Targeting
These methods purpose to establish target market evaluation process begins
with the attractiveness of each market segment and has one or more segments
most benefit to be entered Based on (Kotler 2003) these are 5 patterns that
we can used to enter the market which are
a Single segment concentration
Concentrate with one segment the company get the knowledge
about what the market needs that to be the reach target market
and get a strong minded of consumers in that segment This
pattern have a high risk if there are saturation occurs in this
segment the company faces the risk of losing the entire market
b Selective specialization
On this pattern the company can choose the segment market
that where segment must gain the benefit The advantage of
this pattern are the ability of the company to reduce the risk
lower
c Product specialization
33
This pattern showed the company produced the goods which
will be sold in some segments
d Market specialization
The market showed that company produced the goods and sell
to the one segment the advantages if this pattern the company
have a high reputation from the consumer that segment market
have been entered
e Full market coverage
On this pattern the company try to reach whole market with
produced what consumer needs with the differential product to
gain the whole market the entered
3 Market Positioning
Market positioning is the activity of the company to place their product on the
market so their product get a clear position distinguishable as well as more
expected than competing production the minds of the target consumers that
will provide huge benefits in the target market
Based on (Kotler 2003) the company must avoid the four main errors in
placing market position which are
a Under positioning
It is mean the placement too low that causing superficial
picture of the product so consumer have a low response to the
product
b Over positioning
34
The placement is too high so it can cause the false perception
from consumers on the price of the product so consumers are
reluctant to buy because they think price is too high
c Confused positioning
Confusing placement of the product because the company too
often change their market position
d Doubtful positioning
Dubious product placement the effect of this position the
consumers distrust of the product
273 Marketing Mix
Based on (Kotler ampAmstrong 2010) marketing mix is a unity of the tools of
marketing that the tactical as well as directed and used by the company to produce the
desired response target market Marketing mix is a modern marketing theory
Marketing mix defined as the set of marketing tools that the form use to pursue its
marketing objective in the target market (Kotler 1994 98) Based on the Journal
Marketing by Chai Lee Goi Marketing mix is not scientific theory but a conceptual
framework that identifies the principal decision making manager make in configuring
their offerings to suit consumersrsquo needs (Lee Chai Goi 2009 1) To gain the benefit
for the company marketing mix is the weapon that company usually used to get the
change on the market That changed was grouped by four strategies named ldquo4Psrdquo
that consist of product price place and promotion
35
Product
Product is goods or services that company offered to the market
Price
Price is the several money that consumer must pay to buy a product
Place
Place (distribution) not only represent that the product can achieve or known
but also activity that company do for the product the produced easy to get at
the market and consumers
Promotion
Is the activity that company do to communicate their product and get the
consumer to reach their product Consist of advertising events sponsorship
and other activity are summarized in the Integrated Marketing
Communication (IMC)
Booms and Bitner is suggested 3 other elements beides the traditional 4Prsquos by
Kotler for service business which are (wwwlenamarketingnet 2013)
Physical Evidence
Is about where the service is being delivered from This element will
differentiate the company with other
Process
This element of the marketing mix looks at the used to deliver the service
36
People
People are essential ingredients in service provision recruiting and training
the right staff is required to create a competitive advantage
28 OPERATIONAL MANAGEMENT 281 THE SERVICE DESIGN PROCESS Service design is more comprehensive and occurs more often than product
design The inherent variability of service processes requires that the service system
be carefully designed The service concept defines the target customer and the desired
customer experience The service design process must be different and unique from
others to make the product selling point It also defines how onersquos service is
different from others and how it will compete in the marketplace Sometimes
services are successful because their service concept fills a previously unoccupied
niche or differs from the generally accepted mode of operation (Rusell amp Taylor
2011 193)
37
Figure 25 The Service Design Process Source Rusell amp Taylor2011
From the service concept a service package is created to meet customer
needs The package consists of a mixture of physical items sensual
benefits and psychological benefits Effective service design recognizes and
defines all the components of a service package Finding the appropriate mix of
physical items and sensual and psychological benefits and designing them to be
consistent with each other and the service concept is also important (Rusell amp
Taylor 2011 194) From the service package service specifications are developed
for performance design and delivery Performance specifications outline
expectations and requirements for general and specific customers
Performance specifications are converted into design specifications and finally
delivery specifications Design specifications must describe the service in
sufficient detail for the desired service experience to be replicated for different
individuals at numerous locations The specifications typically consist of
38
activities to be performed skill requirements and guidelines for service
providers and cost and time estimates Facility size location and layoutas well
as equipment needs are also included
29 FINANCIAL THEORY 291 BALANCE SHEET
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 62) The balance sheet presents a
summary statement of the firmrsquos financial position at a given time The statement
balances the firmrsquos assets (what it owns) against its financing which can be either
debt (what it owes) or equity (what was provided by owners) Below is the example
of balance sheet from Bartlettrsquos Company
Figure 26 Bartlett Company Balance Sheets Source Gitman amp Zitter 2012
39
The assets are listed from the most liquid (cash) ndash down to the least liquid
Marketable securities are very liquid short-term investments held by the firm
Because they are highly liquid marketable securities are viewed as a form of cash
(ldquonear cashrdquo) Accounts receivable represent the total monies owed the firm by its
customers on credit sales Inventories include raw materials work in process
(partially finished goods) and finished goods held by the firm The entry for gross
fixed assets is the original cost of all fixed (long-term) assets owned by the firm Net
fixed assets represent the difference between gross fixed assets and accumulated
depreciation ndash the total expense recorded for the depreciation of fixed assets The net
value of fixed assets is called their book value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
The liabilities and equity accounts are listed from short-term to long-
term Current liabilities include accounts payable amounts owed for credit
purchases by the firm notes payable outstanding short-term loans typically
from commercial banks and accruals amounts owed for services for which a bill
may not or will not be received Examples of accruals include taxes due the
government and wages due employees Long-term debt represents debt for which
payment is not due in the current year Stockholdersrsquo equity represents the
ownersrsquo claims on the firm The preferred stock entry shows the historical
proceeds from the sale of preferred stock(Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
40
292 INCOME STATEMENT
The income statement provides a financial summary of the firmrsquos operating
results during a specified period Most common are income statements covering a 1-
year period ending at a specified date ordinarily December 31 of the calendar year
Many large firms however operate on a 12-month financial cycle or fiscal year that
ends at a time other than December 31 In addition monthly income statements are
typically prepared for use by management and quarterly statements must be made
available to the stockholders of publicly owned corporations (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 59-60) The example of income statement is shown below
Figure 27 Bartlett Company Income
Statement Source GitmanampZitter2012
293 CASH FLOW ANALYSIS
A cash flow statement is one of the most important financial statements for a
project or business The statement can be as simple as a one page analysis or may
41
involve several schedules that feed information into a central statement A cash flow
statement is a listing of the flows of cash into and out of the business or project
Many cash flows are constructed with multiple time periods
For example it may list monthly cash inflows and outflows over a yearrsquos time
It not only projects the cash balance remaining at the end of the year but also
the cash balance for each month (wwwextensioniastateedu 2013) Some cash
flow budgets are constructed so that we can monitor the accuracy of our projections
These budgets allow us to make monthly cash flow projections for the coming year
and also enter actual inflows and outflows as we progress through the year This
will allow us to compare your projections to your actual cash flows and make
adjustments to the projections for the remainder of the year
Figure 28 Example of
Cash Flow Source
Gitman ampZitter 2012
Even though cash flow and profitability are closely related they are different
42
A cash flow statement lists cash inflows and cash outflows while the income
statement lists income and expenses A cash flow statement shows liquidity while an
income statement shows profitability
294 PAYBACK PERIOD
Payback periods are commonly used to evaluate proposed investments The
payback period is the amount of time required for the firm to recover its initial
investment in a project as calculated from cash inflows The payback period can be
found by dividing the initial investment by the annual cash inflow When the
payback period is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the following decision
criteria apply
If the payback period is less than the maximum acceptable payback
period accept the project
If the payback period is greater than the maximum acceptable payback
period reject the project
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 393) the length of the maximum
acceptable payback period is determined by management This value is set
subjectively on the basis of a number of factors including the type of project
(expansion replacement or renewal other) the perceived risk of the project and the
perceived relationship between the payback period and the share value It is simply a
value that management feels on average will result in value-creating investment
decisions
43
By measuring how quickly the firm recovers its initial investment the
payback period also gives implicit consideration to the timing of cash flows and
therefore to the time value of money Because it can be viewed as a measure of
risk exposure many firms use the payback period as a decision criterion or as a
supplement to other decision techniques The longer the firm must wait to recover
its invested funds the greater the possibility of a calamity Hence the shorter the
payback period the lower the firmrsquos risk exposure A second weakness is that this
approach fails to take fully into account the time factor in the value of money A
third weakness of payback is its failure to recognize cash flows that occur after the
payback period (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 394-396)
Figure 29 Calculation of
Payback Period Source
Gitman amp Zitter 2012
44
295 NET PRESENT VALUE (NPV)
The method used by most large companies to evaluate investment projects is
called net present value (NPV) The intuition behind the NPV method is simple
When firms make investments they are spending money that they obtained in one
form or another from investors Investors expect a return on the money that they give
to firms so a firm should undertake an investment only if the present value of the
cash flow that the investment generates is greater than the cost of making the
investment in the first place
Because the NPV method takes into account the time value of investorsrsquo
money it is a more sophisticated capital budgeting technique than the payback rule
The NPV method discounts the firmrsquos cash flows at the firmrsquos cost of capital This
rate is the minimum return that must be earned on a project to satisfy the firmrsquos
investors Projects with lower returns fail to meet investorsrsquo expectations and
therefore decrease firm value and projects with higher returns increase firm
value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
The net present value (NPV) is found by subtracting a projectrsquos initial
investment (CF0) from the present value of its cash inflows (CFt) discounted at a
rate equal to the firmrsquos cost of capital (r) as shown below
NPV = Present value of cash inflows - Initial investment
When NPV is used both inflows and outflows are measured in terms of
45
present dollars For a project that has cash outflows beyond the initial investment the
net present value of a project would be found by subtracting the present value of
outflows from the present value of inflows When NPV is used to make accept reject
decisions the decision criteria are as follows
If the NPV is greater than $0 accept the project
If the NPV is less than $0 reject the project
If the NPV is greater than $0 the firm will earn a return greater than its cost of
capital Such action should increase the market value of the firm and therefore the
wealth of its owners by an amount equal to the NPV (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
296 INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN (IRR)
The internal rate of return (IRR) is one of the most widely used capital
budgeting techniques The internal rate of return (IRR) is the discount rate that
equates the NPV of an investment opportunity with $0 (because the present value of
cash inflows equals the initial investment) It is the rate of return that the firm will
earn if it invests in the project and receives the given cash inflows (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 401)
When IRR is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the decision criteria are as
follows
If the IRR is greater than the cost of capital accept the project
46
If the IRR is less than the cost of capital reject the project
To calculate IRR Most financial calculators have a pre-programmed IRR
function that can be used to simplify the IRR calculation With these calculators you
merely punch in all cash flows just as if to calculate NPV and then depress IRR to
find the internal rate of return Computer software including spreadsheets is also
available for simplifying these calculations All NPV and IRR values presented in
this and subsequent chapters are obtained by using these functions on a popular
financial calculator (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 402)
297 COST OF GOOD SOLD (COGS)
Cost of goods sold is the direct costs attributable to the production of the
goods sold by a company This amount includes the cost of the materials used in
creating the good along with the direct labor costs used to produce the good It
excludes indirect expenses such as distribution costs and sales force costs
COGS is the costs that go into creating the products that a company sells
therefore the only costs included in the measure are those that are directly tied to the
production of the products For example the COGS for an automaker would include
the material costs for the parts that go into making the car along with the labor costs
used to put the car together The cost of sending the cars to dealerships and the cost of
the labor used to sell the car would be excluded
The exact costs included in the COGS calculation will differ from one type
of business to another The cost of goods attributed to a companys products are
47
expensed as the company sells these goods In summary for manufacturers COGS is
the cost of buying raw materials and manufacturing finished products For retailers
itrsquos the cost of obtaining or buying the products sold to customers If the company is
in a service industry COGS is the cost of the service it offers
48
49
50
31
a Geographic segmentation
Dividing market into different geographical units such as nations
states regions countries cities and neighborhoods
b Demographic segmentation
Dividing market into groups based on demographic variables such as
age gender family size family life cycle income occupation
education religion race and nationality
c Psychographic segmentation
Dividing a market into different groups based on social class lifestyle
or personality characteristic
Based on (Kotler 2003) that the market segment can drive so the
segment of the market must have 5 characteristics which are
Measurable size of the segment purchasing power of the
segment we want to reach and the last one is characteristic of
the segment can be measurable
Substantial a segment becomes the unity of homogeny group
that have a power to gain benefit if the program and marketing
drive by these groups
Accessible the segment that must be reach and served
effectively
32
Differentiable that the segments can be separate by conceptual
and respond differently to the program and the different
elements of the marketing mix
Actionable the program have made effectively that must be
implemented to attract and serve the segments
2 Market Targeting
These methods purpose to establish target market evaluation process begins
with the attractiveness of each market segment and has one or more segments
most benefit to be entered Based on (Kotler 2003) these are 5 patterns that
we can used to enter the market which are
a Single segment concentration
Concentrate with one segment the company get the knowledge
about what the market needs that to be the reach target market
and get a strong minded of consumers in that segment This
pattern have a high risk if there are saturation occurs in this
segment the company faces the risk of losing the entire market
b Selective specialization
On this pattern the company can choose the segment market
that where segment must gain the benefit The advantage of
this pattern are the ability of the company to reduce the risk
lower
c Product specialization
33
This pattern showed the company produced the goods which
will be sold in some segments
d Market specialization
The market showed that company produced the goods and sell
to the one segment the advantages if this pattern the company
have a high reputation from the consumer that segment market
have been entered
e Full market coverage
On this pattern the company try to reach whole market with
produced what consumer needs with the differential product to
gain the whole market the entered
3 Market Positioning
Market positioning is the activity of the company to place their product on the
market so their product get a clear position distinguishable as well as more
expected than competing production the minds of the target consumers that
will provide huge benefits in the target market
Based on (Kotler 2003) the company must avoid the four main errors in
placing market position which are
a Under positioning
It is mean the placement too low that causing superficial
picture of the product so consumer have a low response to the
product
b Over positioning
34
The placement is too high so it can cause the false perception
from consumers on the price of the product so consumers are
reluctant to buy because they think price is too high
c Confused positioning
Confusing placement of the product because the company too
often change their market position
d Doubtful positioning
Dubious product placement the effect of this position the
consumers distrust of the product
273 Marketing Mix
Based on (Kotler ampAmstrong 2010) marketing mix is a unity of the tools of
marketing that the tactical as well as directed and used by the company to produce the
desired response target market Marketing mix is a modern marketing theory
Marketing mix defined as the set of marketing tools that the form use to pursue its
marketing objective in the target market (Kotler 1994 98) Based on the Journal
Marketing by Chai Lee Goi Marketing mix is not scientific theory but a conceptual
framework that identifies the principal decision making manager make in configuring
their offerings to suit consumersrsquo needs (Lee Chai Goi 2009 1) To gain the benefit
for the company marketing mix is the weapon that company usually used to get the
change on the market That changed was grouped by four strategies named ldquo4Psrdquo
that consist of product price place and promotion
35
Product
Product is goods or services that company offered to the market
Price
Price is the several money that consumer must pay to buy a product
Place
Place (distribution) not only represent that the product can achieve or known
but also activity that company do for the product the produced easy to get at
the market and consumers
Promotion
Is the activity that company do to communicate their product and get the
consumer to reach their product Consist of advertising events sponsorship
and other activity are summarized in the Integrated Marketing
Communication (IMC)
Booms and Bitner is suggested 3 other elements beides the traditional 4Prsquos by
Kotler for service business which are (wwwlenamarketingnet 2013)
Physical Evidence
Is about where the service is being delivered from This element will
differentiate the company with other
Process
This element of the marketing mix looks at the used to deliver the service
36
People
People are essential ingredients in service provision recruiting and training
the right staff is required to create a competitive advantage
28 OPERATIONAL MANAGEMENT 281 THE SERVICE DESIGN PROCESS Service design is more comprehensive and occurs more often than product
design The inherent variability of service processes requires that the service system
be carefully designed The service concept defines the target customer and the desired
customer experience The service design process must be different and unique from
others to make the product selling point It also defines how onersquos service is
different from others and how it will compete in the marketplace Sometimes
services are successful because their service concept fills a previously unoccupied
niche or differs from the generally accepted mode of operation (Rusell amp Taylor
2011 193)
37
Figure 25 The Service Design Process Source Rusell amp Taylor2011
From the service concept a service package is created to meet customer
needs The package consists of a mixture of physical items sensual
benefits and psychological benefits Effective service design recognizes and
defines all the components of a service package Finding the appropriate mix of
physical items and sensual and psychological benefits and designing them to be
consistent with each other and the service concept is also important (Rusell amp
Taylor 2011 194) From the service package service specifications are developed
for performance design and delivery Performance specifications outline
expectations and requirements for general and specific customers
Performance specifications are converted into design specifications and finally
delivery specifications Design specifications must describe the service in
sufficient detail for the desired service experience to be replicated for different
individuals at numerous locations The specifications typically consist of
38
activities to be performed skill requirements and guidelines for service
providers and cost and time estimates Facility size location and layoutas well
as equipment needs are also included
29 FINANCIAL THEORY 291 BALANCE SHEET
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 62) The balance sheet presents a
summary statement of the firmrsquos financial position at a given time The statement
balances the firmrsquos assets (what it owns) against its financing which can be either
debt (what it owes) or equity (what was provided by owners) Below is the example
of balance sheet from Bartlettrsquos Company
Figure 26 Bartlett Company Balance Sheets Source Gitman amp Zitter 2012
39
The assets are listed from the most liquid (cash) ndash down to the least liquid
Marketable securities are very liquid short-term investments held by the firm
Because they are highly liquid marketable securities are viewed as a form of cash
(ldquonear cashrdquo) Accounts receivable represent the total monies owed the firm by its
customers on credit sales Inventories include raw materials work in process
(partially finished goods) and finished goods held by the firm The entry for gross
fixed assets is the original cost of all fixed (long-term) assets owned by the firm Net
fixed assets represent the difference between gross fixed assets and accumulated
depreciation ndash the total expense recorded for the depreciation of fixed assets The net
value of fixed assets is called their book value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
The liabilities and equity accounts are listed from short-term to long-
term Current liabilities include accounts payable amounts owed for credit
purchases by the firm notes payable outstanding short-term loans typically
from commercial banks and accruals amounts owed for services for which a bill
may not or will not be received Examples of accruals include taxes due the
government and wages due employees Long-term debt represents debt for which
payment is not due in the current year Stockholdersrsquo equity represents the
ownersrsquo claims on the firm The preferred stock entry shows the historical
proceeds from the sale of preferred stock(Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
40
292 INCOME STATEMENT
The income statement provides a financial summary of the firmrsquos operating
results during a specified period Most common are income statements covering a 1-
year period ending at a specified date ordinarily December 31 of the calendar year
Many large firms however operate on a 12-month financial cycle or fiscal year that
ends at a time other than December 31 In addition monthly income statements are
typically prepared for use by management and quarterly statements must be made
available to the stockholders of publicly owned corporations (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 59-60) The example of income statement is shown below
Figure 27 Bartlett Company Income
Statement Source GitmanampZitter2012
293 CASH FLOW ANALYSIS
A cash flow statement is one of the most important financial statements for a
project or business The statement can be as simple as a one page analysis or may
41
involve several schedules that feed information into a central statement A cash flow
statement is a listing of the flows of cash into and out of the business or project
Many cash flows are constructed with multiple time periods
For example it may list monthly cash inflows and outflows over a yearrsquos time
It not only projects the cash balance remaining at the end of the year but also
the cash balance for each month (wwwextensioniastateedu 2013) Some cash
flow budgets are constructed so that we can monitor the accuracy of our projections
These budgets allow us to make monthly cash flow projections for the coming year
and also enter actual inflows and outflows as we progress through the year This
will allow us to compare your projections to your actual cash flows and make
adjustments to the projections for the remainder of the year
Figure 28 Example of
Cash Flow Source
Gitman ampZitter 2012
Even though cash flow and profitability are closely related they are different
42
A cash flow statement lists cash inflows and cash outflows while the income
statement lists income and expenses A cash flow statement shows liquidity while an
income statement shows profitability
294 PAYBACK PERIOD
Payback periods are commonly used to evaluate proposed investments The
payback period is the amount of time required for the firm to recover its initial
investment in a project as calculated from cash inflows The payback period can be
found by dividing the initial investment by the annual cash inflow When the
payback period is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the following decision
criteria apply
If the payback period is less than the maximum acceptable payback
period accept the project
If the payback period is greater than the maximum acceptable payback
period reject the project
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 393) the length of the maximum
acceptable payback period is determined by management This value is set
subjectively on the basis of a number of factors including the type of project
(expansion replacement or renewal other) the perceived risk of the project and the
perceived relationship between the payback period and the share value It is simply a
value that management feels on average will result in value-creating investment
decisions
43
By measuring how quickly the firm recovers its initial investment the
payback period also gives implicit consideration to the timing of cash flows and
therefore to the time value of money Because it can be viewed as a measure of
risk exposure many firms use the payback period as a decision criterion or as a
supplement to other decision techniques The longer the firm must wait to recover
its invested funds the greater the possibility of a calamity Hence the shorter the
payback period the lower the firmrsquos risk exposure A second weakness is that this
approach fails to take fully into account the time factor in the value of money A
third weakness of payback is its failure to recognize cash flows that occur after the
payback period (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 394-396)
Figure 29 Calculation of
Payback Period Source
Gitman amp Zitter 2012
44
295 NET PRESENT VALUE (NPV)
The method used by most large companies to evaluate investment projects is
called net present value (NPV) The intuition behind the NPV method is simple
When firms make investments they are spending money that they obtained in one
form or another from investors Investors expect a return on the money that they give
to firms so a firm should undertake an investment only if the present value of the
cash flow that the investment generates is greater than the cost of making the
investment in the first place
Because the NPV method takes into account the time value of investorsrsquo
money it is a more sophisticated capital budgeting technique than the payback rule
The NPV method discounts the firmrsquos cash flows at the firmrsquos cost of capital This
rate is the minimum return that must be earned on a project to satisfy the firmrsquos
investors Projects with lower returns fail to meet investorsrsquo expectations and
therefore decrease firm value and projects with higher returns increase firm
value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
The net present value (NPV) is found by subtracting a projectrsquos initial
investment (CF0) from the present value of its cash inflows (CFt) discounted at a
rate equal to the firmrsquos cost of capital (r) as shown below
NPV = Present value of cash inflows - Initial investment
When NPV is used both inflows and outflows are measured in terms of
45
present dollars For a project that has cash outflows beyond the initial investment the
net present value of a project would be found by subtracting the present value of
outflows from the present value of inflows When NPV is used to make accept reject
decisions the decision criteria are as follows
If the NPV is greater than $0 accept the project
If the NPV is less than $0 reject the project
If the NPV is greater than $0 the firm will earn a return greater than its cost of
capital Such action should increase the market value of the firm and therefore the
wealth of its owners by an amount equal to the NPV (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
296 INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN (IRR)
The internal rate of return (IRR) is one of the most widely used capital
budgeting techniques The internal rate of return (IRR) is the discount rate that
equates the NPV of an investment opportunity with $0 (because the present value of
cash inflows equals the initial investment) It is the rate of return that the firm will
earn if it invests in the project and receives the given cash inflows (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 401)
When IRR is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the decision criteria are as
follows
If the IRR is greater than the cost of capital accept the project
46
If the IRR is less than the cost of capital reject the project
To calculate IRR Most financial calculators have a pre-programmed IRR
function that can be used to simplify the IRR calculation With these calculators you
merely punch in all cash flows just as if to calculate NPV and then depress IRR to
find the internal rate of return Computer software including spreadsheets is also
available for simplifying these calculations All NPV and IRR values presented in
this and subsequent chapters are obtained by using these functions on a popular
financial calculator (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 402)
297 COST OF GOOD SOLD (COGS)
Cost of goods sold is the direct costs attributable to the production of the
goods sold by a company This amount includes the cost of the materials used in
creating the good along with the direct labor costs used to produce the good It
excludes indirect expenses such as distribution costs and sales force costs
COGS is the costs that go into creating the products that a company sells
therefore the only costs included in the measure are those that are directly tied to the
production of the products For example the COGS for an automaker would include
the material costs for the parts that go into making the car along with the labor costs
used to put the car together The cost of sending the cars to dealerships and the cost of
the labor used to sell the car would be excluded
The exact costs included in the COGS calculation will differ from one type
of business to another The cost of goods attributed to a companys products are
47
expensed as the company sells these goods In summary for manufacturers COGS is
the cost of buying raw materials and manufacturing finished products For retailers
itrsquos the cost of obtaining or buying the products sold to customers If the company is
in a service industry COGS is the cost of the service it offers
48
49
50
32
Differentiable that the segments can be separate by conceptual
and respond differently to the program and the different
elements of the marketing mix
Actionable the program have made effectively that must be
implemented to attract and serve the segments
2 Market Targeting
These methods purpose to establish target market evaluation process begins
with the attractiveness of each market segment and has one or more segments
most benefit to be entered Based on (Kotler 2003) these are 5 patterns that
we can used to enter the market which are
a Single segment concentration
Concentrate with one segment the company get the knowledge
about what the market needs that to be the reach target market
and get a strong minded of consumers in that segment This
pattern have a high risk if there are saturation occurs in this
segment the company faces the risk of losing the entire market
b Selective specialization
On this pattern the company can choose the segment market
that where segment must gain the benefit The advantage of
this pattern are the ability of the company to reduce the risk
lower
c Product specialization
33
This pattern showed the company produced the goods which
will be sold in some segments
d Market specialization
The market showed that company produced the goods and sell
to the one segment the advantages if this pattern the company
have a high reputation from the consumer that segment market
have been entered
e Full market coverage
On this pattern the company try to reach whole market with
produced what consumer needs with the differential product to
gain the whole market the entered
3 Market Positioning
Market positioning is the activity of the company to place their product on the
market so their product get a clear position distinguishable as well as more
expected than competing production the minds of the target consumers that
will provide huge benefits in the target market
Based on (Kotler 2003) the company must avoid the four main errors in
placing market position which are
a Under positioning
It is mean the placement too low that causing superficial
picture of the product so consumer have a low response to the
product
b Over positioning
34
The placement is too high so it can cause the false perception
from consumers on the price of the product so consumers are
reluctant to buy because they think price is too high
c Confused positioning
Confusing placement of the product because the company too
often change their market position
d Doubtful positioning
Dubious product placement the effect of this position the
consumers distrust of the product
273 Marketing Mix
Based on (Kotler ampAmstrong 2010) marketing mix is a unity of the tools of
marketing that the tactical as well as directed and used by the company to produce the
desired response target market Marketing mix is a modern marketing theory
Marketing mix defined as the set of marketing tools that the form use to pursue its
marketing objective in the target market (Kotler 1994 98) Based on the Journal
Marketing by Chai Lee Goi Marketing mix is not scientific theory but a conceptual
framework that identifies the principal decision making manager make in configuring
their offerings to suit consumersrsquo needs (Lee Chai Goi 2009 1) To gain the benefit
for the company marketing mix is the weapon that company usually used to get the
change on the market That changed was grouped by four strategies named ldquo4Psrdquo
that consist of product price place and promotion
35
Product
Product is goods or services that company offered to the market
Price
Price is the several money that consumer must pay to buy a product
Place
Place (distribution) not only represent that the product can achieve or known
but also activity that company do for the product the produced easy to get at
the market and consumers
Promotion
Is the activity that company do to communicate their product and get the
consumer to reach their product Consist of advertising events sponsorship
and other activity are summarized in the Integrated Marketing
Communication (IMC)
Booms and Bitner is suggested 3 other elements beides the traditional 4Prsquos by
Kotler for service business which are (wwwlenamarketingnet 2013)
Physical Evidence
Is about where the service is being delivered from This element will
differentiate the company with other
Process
This element of the marketing mix looks at the used to deliver the service
36
People
People are essential ingredients in service provision recruiting and training
the right staff is required to create a competitive advantage
28 OPERATIONAL MANAGEMENT 281 THE SERVICE DESIGN PROCESS Service design is more comprehensive and occurs more often than product
design The inherent variability of service processes requires that the service system
be carefully designed The service concept defines the target customer and the desired
customer experience The service design process must be different and unique from
others to make the product selling point It also defines how onersquos service is
different from others and how it will compete in the marketplace Sometimes
services are successful because their service concept fills a previously unoccupied
niche or differs from the generally accepted mode of operation (Rusell amp Taylor
2011 193)
37
Figure 25 The Service Design Process Source Rusell amp Taylor2011
From the service concept a service package is created to meet customer
needs The package consists of a mixture of physical items sensual
benefits and psychological benefits Effective service design recognizes and
defines all the components of a service package Finding the appropriate mix of
physical items and sensual and psychological benefits and designing them to be
consistent with each other and the service concept is also important (Rusell amp
Taylor 2011 194) From the service package service specifications are developed
for performance design and delivery Performance specifications outline
expectations and requirements for general and specific customers
Performance specifications are converted into design specifications and finally
delivery specifications Design specifications must describe the service in
sufficient detail for the desired service experience to be replicated for different
individuals at numerous locations The specifications typically consist of
38
activities to be performed skill requirements and guidelines for service
providers and cost and time estimates Facility size location and layoutas well
as equipment needs are also included
29 FINANCIAL THEORY 291 BALANCE SHEET
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 62) The balance sheet presents a
summary statement of the firmrsquos financial position at a given time The statement
balances the firmrsquos assets (what it owns) against its financing which can be either
debt (what it owes) or equity (what was provided by owners) Below is the example
of balance sheet from Bartlettrsquos Company
Figure 26 Bartlett Company Balance Sheets Source Gitman amp Zitter 2012
39
The assets are listed from the most liquid (cash) ndash down to the least liquid
Marketable securities are very liquid short-term investments held by the firm
Because they are highly liquid marketable securities are viewed as a form of cash
(ldquonear cashrdquo) Accounts receivable represent the total monies owed the firm by its
customers on credit sales Inventories include raw materials work in process
(partially finished goods) and finished goods held by the firm The entry for gross
fixed assets is the original cost of all fixed (long-term) assets owned by the firm Net
fixed assets represent the difference between gross fixed assets and accumulated
depreciation ndash the total expense recorded for the depreciation of fixed assets The net
value of fixed assets is called their book value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
The liabilities and equity accounts are listed from short-term to long-
term Current liabilities include accounts payable amounts owed for credit
purchases by the firm notes payable outstanding short-term loans typically
from commercial banks and accruals amounts owed for services for which a bill
may not or will not be received Examples of accruals include taxes due the
government and wages due employees Long-term debt represents debt for which
payment is not due in the current year Stockholdersrsquo equity represents the
ownersrsquo claims on the firm The preferred stock entry shows the historical
proceeds from the sale of preferred stock(Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
40
292 INCOME STATEMENT
The income statement provides a financial summary of the firmrsquos operating
results during a specified period Most common are income statements covering a 1-
year period ending at a specified date ordinarily December 31 of the calendar year
Many large firms however operate on a 12-month financial cycle or fiscal year that
ends at a time other than December 31 In addition monthly income statements are
typically prepared for use by management and quarterly statements must be made
available to the stockholders of publicly owned corporations (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 59-60) The example of income statement is shown below
Figure 27 Bartlett Company Income
Statement Source GitmanampZitter2012
293 CASH FLOW ANALYSIS
A cash flow statement is one of the most important financial statements for a
project or business The statement can be as simple as a one page analysis or may
41
involve several schedules that feed information into a central statement A cash flow
statement is a listing of the flows of cash into and out of the business or project
Many cash flows are constructed with multiple time periods
For example it may list monthly cash inflows and outflows over a yearrsquos time
It not only projects the cash balance remaining at the end of the year but also
the cash balance for each month (wwwextensioniastateedu 2013) Some cash
flow budgets are constructed so that we can monitor the accuracy of our projections
These budgets allow us to make monthly cash flow projections for the coming year
and also enter actual inflows and outflows as we progress through the year This
will allow us to compare your projections to your actual cash flows and make
adjustments to the projections for the remainder of the year
Figure 28 Example of
Cash Flow Source
Gitman ampZitter 2012
Even though cash flow and profitability are closely related they are different
42
A cash flow statement lists cash inflows and cash outflows while the income
statement lists income and expenses A cash flow statement shows liquidity while an
income statement shows profitability
294 PAYBACK PERIOD
Payback periods are commonly used to evaluate proposed investments The
payback period is the amount of time required for the firm to recover its initial
investment in a project as calculated from cash inflows The payback period can be
found by dividing the initial investment by the annual cash inflow When the
payback period is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the following decision
criteria apply
If the payback period is less than the maximum acceptable payback
period accept the project
If the payback period is greater than the maximum acceptable payback
period reject the project
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 393) the length of the maximum
acceptable payback period is determined by management This value is set
subjectively on the basis of a number of factors including the type of project
(expansion replacement or renewal other) the perceived risk of the project and the
perceived relationship between the payback period and the share value It is simply a
value that management feels on average will result in value-creating investment
decisions
43
By measuring how quickly the firm recovers its initial investment the
payback period also gives implicit consideration to the timing of cash flows and
therefore to the time value of money Because it can be viewed as a measure of
risk exposure many firms use the payback period as a decision criterion or as a
supplement to other decision techniques The longer the firm must wait to recover
its invested funds the greater the possibility of a calamity Hence the shorter the
payback period the lower the firmrsquos risk exposure A second weakness is that this
approach fails to take fully into account the time factor in the value of money A
third weakness of payback is its failure to recognize cash flows that occur after the
payback period (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 394-396)
Figure 29 Calculation of
Payback Period Source
Gitman amp Zitter 2012
44
295 NET PRESENT VALUE (NPV)
The method used by most large companies to evaluate investment projects is
called net present value (NPV) The intuition behind the NPV method is simple
When firms make investments they are spending money that they obtained in one
form or another from investors Investors expect a return on the money that they give
to firms so a firm should undertake an investment only if the present value of the
cash flow that the investment generates is greater than the cost of making the
investment in the first place
Because the NPV method takes into account the time value of investorsrsquo
money it is a more sophisticated capital budgeting technique than the payback rule
The NPV method discounts the firmrsquos cash flows at the firmrsquos cost of capital This
rate is the minimum return that must be earned on a project to satisfy the firmrsquos
investors Projects with lower returns fail to meet investorsrsquo expectations and
therefore decrease firm value and projects with higher returns increase firm
value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
The net present value (NPV) is found by subtracting a projectrsquos initial
investment (CF0) from the present value of its cash inflows (CFt) discounted at a
rate equal to the firmrsquos cost of capital (r) as shown below
NPV = Present value of cash inflows - Initial investment
When NPV is used both inflows and outflows are measured in terms of
45
present dollars For a project that has cash outflows beyond the initial investment the
net present value of a project would be found by subtracting the present value of
outflows from the present value of inflows When NPV is used to make accept reject
decisions the decision criteria are as follows
If the NPV is greater than $0 accept the project
If the NPV is less than $0 reject the project
If the NPV is greater than $0 the firm will earn a return greater than its cost of
capital Such action should increase the market value of the firm and therefore the
wealth of its owners by an amount equal to the NPV (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
296 INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN (IRR)
The internal rate of return (IRR) is one of the most widely used capital
budgeting techniques The internal rate of return (IRR) is the discount rate that
equates the NPV of an investment opportunity with $0 (because the present value of
cash inflows equals the initial investment) It is the rate of return that the firm will
earn if it invests in the project and receives the given cash inflows (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 401)
When IRR is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the decision criteria are as
follows
If the IRR is greater than the cost of capital accept the project
46
If the IRR is less than the cost of capital reject the project
To calculate IRR Most financial calculators have a pre-programmed IRR
function that can be used to simplify the IRR calculation With these calculators you
merely punch in all cash flows just as if to calculate NPV and then depress IRR to
find the internal rate of return Computer software including spreadsheets is also
available for simplifying these calculations All NPV and IRR values presented in
this and subsequent chapters are obtained by using these functions on a popular
financial calculator (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 402)
297 COST OF GOOD SOLD (COGS)
Cost of goods sold is the direct costs attributable to the production of the
goods sold by a company This amount includes the cost of the materials used in
creating the good along with the direct labor costs used to produce the good It
excludes indirect expenses such as distribution costs and sales force costs
COGS is the costs that go into creating the products that a company sells
therefore the only costs included in the measure are those that are directly tied to the
production of the products For example the COGS for an automaker would include
the material costs for the parts that go into making the car along with the labor costs
used to put the car together The cost of sending the cars to dealerships and the cost of
the labor used to sell the car would be excluded
The exact costs included in the COGS calculation will differ from one type
of business to another The cost of goods attributed to a companys products are
47
expensed as the company sells these goods In summary for manufacturers COGS is
the cost of buying raw materials and manufacturing finished products For retailers
itrsquos the cost of obtaining or buying the products sold to customers If the company is
in a service industry COGS is the cost of the service it offers
48
49
50
33
This pattern showed the company produced the goods which
will be sold in some segments
d Market specialization
The market showed that company produced the goods and sell
to the one segment the advantages if this pattern the company
have a high reputation from the consumer that segment market
have been entered
e Full market coverage
On this pattern the company try to reach whole market with
produced what consumer needs with the differential product to
gain the whole market the entered
3 Market Positioning
Market positioning is the activity of the company to place their product on the
market so their product get a clear position distinguishable as well as more
expected than competing production the minds of the target consumers that
will provide huge benefits in the target market
Based on (Kotler 2003) the company must avoid the four main errors in
placing market position which are
a Under positioning
It is mean the placement too low that causing superficial
picture of the product so consumer have a low response to the
product
b Over positioning
34
The placement is too high so it can cause the false perception
from consumers on the price of the product so consumers are
reluctant to buy because they think price is too high
c Confused positioning
Confusing placement of the product because the company too
often change their market position
d Doubtful positioning
Dubious product placement the effect of this position the
consumers distrust of the product
273 Marketing Mix
Based on (Kotler ampAmstrong 2010) marketing mix is a unity of the tools of
marketing that the tactical as well as directed and used by the company to produce the
desired response target market Marketing mix is a modern marketing theory
Marketing mix defined as the set of marketing tools that the form use to pursue its
marketing objective in the target market (Kotler 1994 98) Based on the Journal
Marketing by Chai Lee Goi Marketing mix is not scientific theory but a conceptual
framework that identifies the principal decision making manager make in configuring
their offerings to suit consumersrsquo needs (Lee Chai Goi 2009 1) To gain the benefit
for the company marketing mix is the weapon that company usually used to get the
change on the market That changed was grouped by four strategies named ldquo4Psrdquo
that consist of product price place and promotion
35
Product
Product is goods or services that company offered to the market
Price
Price is the several money that consumer must pay to buy a product
Place
Place (distribution) not only represent that the product can achieve or known
but also activity that company do for the product the produced easy to get at
the market and consumers
Promotion
Is the activity that company do to communicate their product and get the
consumer to reach their product Consist of advertising events sponsorship
and other activity are summarized in the Integrated Marketing
Communication (IMC)
Booms and Bitner is suggested 3 other elements beides the traditional 4Prsquos by
Kotler for service business which are (wwwlenamarketingnet 2013)
Physical Evidence
Is about where the service is being delivered from This element will
differentiate the company with other
Process
This element of the marketing mix looks at the used to deliver the service
36
People
People are essential ingredients in service provision recruiting and training
the right staff is required to create a competitive advantage
28 OPERATIONAL MANAGEMENT 281 THE SERVICE DESIGN PROCESS Service design is more comprehensive and occurs more often than product
design The inherent variability of service processes requires that the service system
be carefully designed The service concept defines the target customer and the desired
customer experience The service design process must be different and unique from
others to make the product selling point It also defines how onersquos service is
different from others and how it will compete in the marketplace Sometimes
services are successful because their service concept fills a previously unoccupied
niche or differs from the generally accepted mode of operation (Rusell amp Taylor
2011 193)
37
Figure 25 The Service Design Process Source Rusell amp Taylor2011
From the service concept a service package is created to meet customer
needs The package consists of a mixture of physical items sensual
benefits and psychological benefits Effective service design recognizes and
defines all the components of a service package Finding the appropriate mix of
physical items and sensual and psychological benefits and designing them to be
consistent with each other and the service concept is also important (Rusell amp
Taylor 2011 194) From the service package service specifications are developed
for performance design and delivery Performance specifications outline
expectations and requirements for general and specific customers
Performance specifications are converted into design specifications and finally
delivery specifications Design specifications must describe the service in
sufficient detail for the desired service experience to be replicated for different
individuals at numerous locations The specifications typically consist of
38
activities to be performed skill requirements and guidelines for service
providers and cost and time estimates Facility size location and layoutas well
as equipment needs are also included
29 FINANCIAL THEORY 291 BALANCE SHEET
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 62) The balance sheet presents a
summary statement of the firmrsquos financial position at a given time The statement
balances the firmrsquos assets (what it owns) against its financing which can be either
debt (what it owes) or equity (what was provided by owners) Below is the example
of balance sheet from Bartlettrsquos Company
Figure 26 Bartlett Company Balance Sheets Source Gitman amp Zitter 2012
39
The assets are listed from the most liquid (cash) ndash down to the least liquid
Marketable securities are very liquid short-term investments held by the firm
Because they are highly liquid marketable securities are viewed as a form of cash
(ldquonear cashrdquo) Accounts receivable represent the total monies owed the firm by its
customers on credit sales Inventories include raw materials work in process
(partially finished goods) and finished goods held by the firm The entry for gross
fixed assets is the original cost of all fixed (long-term) assets owned by the firm Net
fixed assets represent the difference between gross fixed assets and accumulated
depreciation ndash the total expense recorded for the depreciation of fixed assets The net
value of fixed assets is called their book value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
The liabilities and equity accounts are listed from short-term to long-
term Current liabilities include accounts payable amounts owed for credit
purchases by the firm notes payable outstanding short-term loans typically
from commercial banks and accruals amounts owed for services for which a bill
may not or will not be received Examples of accruals include taxes due the
government and wages due employees Long-term debt represents debt for which
payment is not due in the current year Stockholdersrsquo equity represents the
ownersrsquo claims on the firm The preferred stock entry shows the historical
proceeds from the sale of preferred stock(Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
40
292 INCOME STATEMENT
The income statement provides a financial summary of the firmrsquos operating
results during a specified period Most common are income statements covering a 1-
year period ending at a specified date ordinarily December 31 of the calendar year
Many large firms however operate on a 12-month financial cycle or fiscal year that
ends at a time other than December 31 In addition monthly income statements are
typically prepared for use by management and quarterly statements must be made
available to the stockholders of publicly owned corporations (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 59-60) The example of income statement is shown below
Figure 27 Bartlett Company Income
Statement Source GitmanampZitter2012
293 CASH FLOW ANALYSIS
A cash flow statement is one of the most important financial statements for a
project or business The statement can be as simple as a one page analysis or may
41
involve several schedules that feed information into a central statement A cash flow
statement is a listing of the flows of cash into and out of the business or project
Many cash flows are constructed with multiple time periods
For example it may list monthly cash inflows and outflows over a yearrsquos time
It not only projects the cash balance remaining at the end of the year but also
the cash balance for each month (wwwextensioniastateedu 2013) Some cash
flow budgets are constructed so that we can monitor the accuracy of our projections
These budgets allow us to make monthly cash flow projections for the coming year
and also enter actual inflows and outflows as we progress through the year This
will allow us to compare your projections to your actual cash flows and make
adjustments to the projections for the remainder of the year
Figure 28 Example of
Cash Flow Source
Gitman ampZitter 2012
Even though cash flow and profitability are closely related they are different
42
A cash flow statement lists cash inflows and cash outflows while the income
statement lists income and expenses A cash flow statement shows liquidity while an
income statement shows profitability
294 PAYBACK PERIOD
Payback periods are commonly used to evaluate proposed investments The
payback period is the amount of time required for the firm to recover its initial
investment in a project as calculated from cash inflows The payback period can be
found by dividing the initial investment by the annual cash inflow When the
payback period is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the following decision
criteria apply
If the payback period is less than the maximum acceptable payback
period accept the project
If the payback period is greater than the maximum acceptable payback
period reject the project
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 393) the length of the maximum
acceptable payback period is determined by management This value is set
subjectively on the basis of a number of factors including the type of project
(expansion replacement or renewal other) the perceived risk of the project and the
perceived relationship between the payback period and the share value It is simply a
value that management feels on average will result in value-creating investment
decisions
43
By measuring how quickly the firm recovers its initial investment the
payback period also gives implicit consideration to the timing of cash flows and
therefore to the time value of money Because it can be viewed as a measure of
risk exposure many firms use the payback period as a decision criterion or as a
supplement to other decision techniques The longer the firm must wait to recover
its invested funds the greater the possibility of a calamity Hence the shorter the
payback period the lower the firmrsquos risk exposure A second weakness is that this
approach fails to take fully into account the time factor in the value of money A
third weakness of payback is its failure to recognize cash flows that occur after the
payback period (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 394-396)
Figure 29 Calculation of
Payback Period Source
Gitman amp Zitter 2012
44
295 NET PRESENT VALUE (NPV)
The method used by most large companies to evaluate investment projects is
called net present value (NPV) The intuition behind the NPV method is simple
When firms make investments they are spending money that they obtained in one
form or another from investors Investors expect a return on the money that they give
to firms so a firm should undertake an investment only if the present value of the
cash flow that the investment generates is greater than the cost of making the
investment in the first place
Because the NPV method takes into account the time value of investorsrsquo
money it is a more sophisticated capital budgeting technique than the payback rule
The NPV method discounts the firmrsquos cash flows at the firmrsquos cost of capital This
rate is the minimum return that must be earned on a project to satisfy the firmrsquos
investors Projects with lower returns fail to meet investorsrsquo expectations and
therefore decrease firm value and projects with higher returns increase firm
value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
The net present value (NPV) is found by subtracting a projectrsquos initial
investment (CF0) from the present value of its cash inflows (CFt) discounted at a
rate equal to the firmrsquos cost of capital (r) as shown below
NPV = Present value of cash inflows - Initial investment
When NPV is used both inflows and outflows are measured in terms of
45
present dollars For a project that has cash outflows beyond the initial investment the
net present value of a project would be found by subtracting the present value of
outflows from the present value of inflows When NPV is used to make accept reject
decisions the decision criteria are as follows
If the NPV is greater than $0 accept the project
If the NPV is less than $0 reject the project
If the NPV is greater than $0 the firm will earn a return greater than its cost of
capital Such action should increase the market value of the firm and therefore the
wealth of its owners by an amount equal to the NPV (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
296 INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN (IRR)
The internal rate of return (IRR) is one of the most widely used capital
budgeting techniques The internal rate of return (IRR) is the discount rate that
equates the NPV of an investment opportunity with $0 (because the present value of
cash inflows equals the initial investment) It is the rate of return that the firm will
earn if it invests in the project and receives the given cash inflows (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 401)
When IRR is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the decision criteria are as
follows
If the IRR is greater than the cost of capital accept the project
46
If the IRR is less than the cost of capital reject the project
To calculate IRR Most financial calculators have a pre-programmed IRR
function that can be used to simplify the IRR calculation With these calculators you
merely punch in all cash flows just as if to calculate NPV and then depress IRR to
find the internal rate of return Computer software including spreadsheets is also
available for simplifying these calculations All NPV and IRR values presented in
this and subsequent chapters are obtained by using these functions on a popular
financial calculator (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 402)
297 COST OF GOOD SOLD (COGS)
Cost of goods sold is the direct costs attributable to the production of the
goods sold by a company This amount includes the cost of the materials used in
creating the good along with the direct labor costs used to produce the good It
excludes indirect expenses such as distribution costs and sales force costs
COGS is the costs that go into creating the products that a company sells
therefore the only costs included in the measure are those that are directly tied to the
production of the products For example the COGS for an automaker would include
the material costs for the parts that go into making the car along with the labor costs
used to put the car together The cost of sending the cars to dealerships and the cost of
the labor used to sell the car would be excluded
The exact costs included in the COGS calculation will differ from one type
of business to another The cost of goods attributed to a companys products are
47
expensed as the company sells these goods In summary for manufacturers COGS is
the cost of buying raw materials and manufacturing finished products For retailers
itrsquos the cost of obtaining or buying the products sold to customers If the company is
in a service industry COGS is the cost of the service it offers
48
49
50
34
The placement is too high so it can cause the false perception
from consumers on the price of the product so consumers are
reluctant to buy because they think price is too high
c Confused positioning
Confusing placement of the product because the company too
often change their market position
d Doubtful positioning
Dubious product placement the effect of this position the
consumers distrust of the product
273 Marketing Mix
Based on (Kotler ampAmstrong 2010) marketing mix is a unity of the tools of
marketing that the tactical as well as directed and used by the company to produce the
desired response target market Marketing mix is a modern marketing theory
Marketing mix defined as the set of marketing tools that the form use to pursue its
marketing objective in the target market (Kotler 1994 98) Based on the Journal
Marketing by Chai Lee Goi Marketing mix is not scientific theory but a conceptual
framework that identifies the principal decision making manager make in configuring
their offerings to suit consumersrsquo needs (Lee Chai Goi 2009 1) To gain the benefit
for the company marketing mix is the weapon that company usually used to get the
change on the market That changed was grouped by four strategies named ldquo4Psrdquo
that consist of product price place and promotion
35
Product
Product is goods or services that company offered to the market
Price
Price is the several money that consumer must pay to buy a product
Place
Place (distribution) not only represent that the product can achieve or known
but also activity that company do for the product the produced easy to get at
the market and consumers
Promotion
Is the activity that company do to communicate their product and get the
consumer to reach their product Consist of advertising events sponsorship
and other activity are summarized in the Integrated Marketing
Communication (IMC)
Booms and Bitner is suggested 3 other elements beides the traditional 4Prsquos by
Kotler for service business which are (wwwlenamarketingnet 2013)
Physical Evidence
Is about where the service is being delivered from This element will
differentiate the company with other
Process
This element of the marketing mix looks at the used to deliver the service
36
People
People are essential ingredients in service provision recruiting and training
the right staff is required to create a competitive advantage
28 OPERATIONAL MANAGEMENT 281 THE SERVICE DESIGN PROCESS Service design is more comprehensive and occurs more often than product
design The inherent variability of service processes requires that the service system
be carefully designed The service concept defines the target customer and the desired
customer experience The service design process must be different and unique from
others to make the product selling point It also defines how onersquos service is
different from others and how it will compete in the marketplace Sometimes
services are successful because their service concept fills a previously unoccupied
niche or differs from the generally accepted mode of operation (Rusell amp Taylor
2011 193)
37
Figure 25 The Service Design Process Source Rusell amp Taylor2011
From the service concept a service package is created to meet customer
needs The package consists of a mixture of physical items sensual
benefits and psychological benefits Effective service design recognizes and
defines all the components of a service package Finding the appropriate mix of
physical items and sensual and psychological benefits and designing them to be
consistent with each other and the service concept is also important (Rusell amp
Taylor 2011 194) From the service package service specifications are developed
for performance design and delivery Performance specifications outline
expectations and requirements for general and specific customers
Performance specifications are converted into design specifications and finally
delivery specifications Design specifications must describe the service in
sufficient detail for the desired service experience to be replicated for different
individuals at numerous locations The specifications typically consist of
38
activities to be performed skill requirements and guidelines for service
providers and cost and time estimates Facility size location and layoutas well
as equipment needs are also included
29 FINANCIAL THEORY 291 BALANCE SHEET
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 62) The balance sheet presents a
summary statement of the firmrsquos financial position at a given time The statement
balances the firmrsquos assets (what it owns) against its financing which can be either
debt (what it owes) or equity (what was provided by owners) Below is the example
of balance sheet from Bartlettrsquos Company
Figure 26 Bartlett Company Balance Sheets Source Gitman amp Zitter 2012
39
The assets are listed from the most liquid (cash) ndash down to the least liquid
Marketable securities are very liquid short-term investments held by the firm
Because they are highly liquid marketable securities are viewed as a form of cash
(ldquonear cashrdquo) Accounts receivable represent the total monies owed the firm by its
customers on credit sales Inventories include raw materials work in process
(partially finished goods) and finished goods held by the firm The entry for gross
fixed assets is the original cost of all fixed (long-term) assets owned by the firm Net
fixed assets represent the difference between gross fixed assets and accumulated
depreciation ndash the total expense recorded for the depreciation of fixed assets The net
value of fixed assets is called their book value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
The liabilities and equity accounts are listed from short-term to long-
term Current liabilities include accounts payable amounts owed for credit
purchases by the firm notes payable outstanding short-term loans typically
from commercial banks and accruals amounts owed for services for which a bill
may not or will not be received Examples of accruals include taxes due the
government and wages due employees Long-term debt represents debt for which
payment is not due in the current year Stockholdersrsquo equity represents the
ownersrsquo claims on the firm The preferred stock entry shows the historical
proceeds from the sale of preferred stock(Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
40
292 INCOME STATEMENT
The income statement provides a financial summary of the firmrsquos operating
results during a specified period Most common are income statements covering a 1-
year period ending at a specified date ordinarily December 31 of the calendar year
Many large firms however operate on a 12-month financial cycle or fiscal year that
ends at a time other than December 31 In addition monthly income statements are
typically prepared for use by management and quarterly statements must be made
available to the stockholders of publicly owned corporations (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 59-60) The example of income statement is shown below
Figure 27 Bartlett Company Income
Statement Source GitmanampZitter2012
293 CASH FLOW ANALYSIS
A cash flow statement is one of the most important financial statements for a
project or business The statement can be as simple as a one page analysis or may
41
involve several schedules that feed information into a central statement A cash flow
statement is a listing of the flows of cash into and out of the business or project
Many cash flows are constructed with multiple time periods
For example it may list monthly cash inflows and outflows over a yearrsquos time
It not only projects the cash balance remaining at the end of the year but also
the cash balance for each month (wwwextensioniastateedu 2013) Some cash
flow budgets are constructed so that we can monitor the accuracy of our projections
These budgets allow us to make monthly cash flow projections for the coming year
and also enter actual inflows and outflows as we progress through the year This
will allow us to compare your projections to your actual cash flows and make
adjustments to the projections for the remainder of the year
Figure 28 Example of
Cash Flow Source
Gitman ampZitter 2012
Even though cash flow and profitability are closely related they are different
42
A cash flow statement lists cash inflows and cash outflows while the income
statement lists income and expenses A cash flow statement shows liquidity while an
income statement shows profitability
294 PAYBACK PERIOD
Payback periods are commonly used to evaluate proposed investments The
payback period is the amount of time required for the firm to recover its initial
investment in a project as calculated from cash inflows The payback period can be
found by dividing the initial investment by the annual cash inflow When the
payback period is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the following decision
criteria apply
If the payback period is less than the maximum acceptable payback
period accept the project
If the payback period is greater than the maximum acceptable payback
period reject the project
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 393) the length of the maximum
acceptable payback period is determined by management This value is set
subjectively on the basis of a number of factors including the type of project
(expansion replacement or renewal other) the perceived risk of the project and the
perceived relationship between the payback period and the share value It is simply a
value that management feels on average will result in value-creating investment
decisions
43
By measuring how quickly the firm recovers its initial investment the
payback period also gives implicit consideration to the timing of cash flows and
therefore to the time value of money Because it can be viewed as a measure of
risk exposure many firms use the payback period as a decision criterion or as a
supplement to other decision techniques The longer the firm must wait to recover
its invested funds the greater the possibility of a calamity Hence the shorter the
payback period the lower the firmrsquos risk exposure A second weakness is that this
approach fails to take fully into account the time factor in the value of money A
third weakness of payback is its failure to recognize cash flows that occur after the
payback period (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 394-396)
Figure 29 Calculation of
Payback Period Source
Gitman amp Zitter 2012
44
295 NET PRESENT VALUE (NPV)
The method used by most large companies to evaluate investment projects is
called net present value (NPV) The intuition behind the NPV method is simple
When firms make investments they are spending money that they obtained in one
form or another from investors Investors expect a return on the money that they give
to firms so a firm should undertake an investment only if the present value of the
cash flow that the investment generates is greater than the cost of making the
investment in the first place
Because the NPV method takes into account the time value of investorsrsquo
money it is a more sophisticated capital budgeting technique than the payback rule
The NPV method discounts the firmrsquos cash flows at the firmrsquos cost of capital This
rate is the minimum return that must be earned on a project to satisfy the firmrsquos
investors Projects with lower returns fail to meet investorsrsquo expectations and
therefore decrease firm value and projects with higher returns increase firm
value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
The net present value (NPV) is found by subtracting a projectrsquos initial
investment (CF0) from the present value of its cash inflows (CFt) discounted at a
rate equal to the firmrsquos cost of capital (r) as shown below
NPV = Present value of cash inflows - Initial investment
When NPV is used both inflows and outflows are measured in terms of
45
present dollars For a project that has cash outflows beyond the initial investment the
net present value of a project would be found by subtracting the present value of
outflows from the present value of inflows When NPV is used to make accept reject
decisions the decision criteria are as follows
If the NPV is greater than $0 accept the project
If the NPV is less than $0 reject the project
If the NPV is greater than $0 the firm will earn a return greater than its cost of
capital Such action should increase the market value of the firm and therefore the
wealth of its owners by an amount equal to the NPV (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
296 INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN (IRR)
The internal rate of return (IRR) is one of the most widely used capital
budgeting techniques The internal rate of return (IRR) is the discount rate that
equates the NPV of an investment opportunity with $0 (because the present value of
cash inflows equals the initial investment) It is the rate of return that the firm will
earn if it invests in the project and receives the given cash inflows (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 401)
When IRR is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the decision criteria are as
follows
If the IRR is greater than the cost of capital accept the project
46
If the IRR is less than the cost of capital reject the project
To calculate IRR Most financial calculators have a pre-programmed IRR
function that can be used to simplify the IRR calculation With these calculators you
merely punch in all cash flows just as if to calculate NPV and then depress IRR to
find the internal rate of return Computer software including spreadsheets is also
available for simplifying these calculations All NPV and IRR values presented in
this and subsequent chapters are obtained by using these functions on a popular
financial calculator (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 402)
297 COST OF GOOD SOLD (COGS)
Cost of goods sold is the direct costs attributable to the production of the
goods sold by a company This amount includes the cost of the materials used in
creating the good along with the direct labor costs used to produce the good It
excludes indirect expenses such as distribution costs and sales force costs
COGS is the costs that go into creating the products that a company sells
therefore the only costs included in the measure are those that are directly tied to the
production of the products For example the COGS for an automaker would include
the material costs for the parts that go into making the car along with the labor costs
used to put the car together The cost of sending the cars to dealerships and the cost of
the labor used to sell the car would be excluded
The exact costs included in the COGS calculation will differ from one type
of business to another The cost of goods attributed to a companys products are
47
expensed as the company sells these goods In summary for manufacturers COGS is
the cost of buying raw materials and manufacturing finished products For retailers
itrsquos the cost of obtaining or buying the products sold to customers If the company is
in a service industry COGS is the cost of the service it offers
48
49
50
35
Product
Product is goods or services that company offered to the market
Price
Price is the several money that consumer must pay to buy a product
Place
Place (distribution) not only represent that the product can achieve or known
but also activity that company do for the product the produced easy to get at
the market and consumers
Promotion
Is the activity that company do to communicate their product and get the
consumer to reach their product Consist of advertising events sponsorship
and other activity are summarized in the Integrated Marketing
Communication (IMC)
Booms and Bitner is suggested 3 other elements beides the traditional 4Prsquos by
Kotler for service business which are (wwwlenamarketingnet 2013)
Physical Evidence
Is about where the service is being delivered from This element will
differentiate the company with other
Process
This element of the marketing mix looks at the used to deliver the service
36
People
People are essential ingredients in service provision recruiting and training
the right staff is required to create a competitive advantage
28 OPERATIONAL MANAGEMENT 281 THE SERVICE DESIGN PROCESS Service design is more comprehensive and occurs more often than product
design The inherent variability of service processes requires that the service system
be carefully designed The service concept defines the target customer and the desired
customer experience The service design process must be different and unique from
others to make the product selling point It also defines how onersquos service is
different from others and how it will compete in the marketplace Sometimes
services are successful because their service concept fills a previously unoccupied
niche or differs from the generally accepted mode of operation (Rusell amp Taylor
2011 193)
37
Figure 25 The Service Design Process Source Rusell amp Taylor2011
From the service concept a service package is created to meet customer
needs The package consists of a mixture of physical items sensual
benefits and psychological benefits Effective service design recognizes and
defines all the components of a service package Finding the appropriate mix of
physical items and sensual and psychological benefits and designing them to be
consistent with each other and the service concept is also important (Rusell amp
Taylor 2011 194) From the service package service specifications are developed
for performance design and delivery Performance specifications outline
expectations and requirements for general and specific customers
Performance specifications are converted into design specifications and finally
delivery specifications Design specifications must describe the service in
sufficient detail for the desired service experience to be replicated for different
individuals at numerous locations The specifications typically consist of
38
activities to be performed skill requirements and guidelines for service
providers and cost and time estimates Facility size location and layoutas well
as equipment needs are also included
29 FINANCIAL THEORY 291 BALANCE SHEET
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 62) The balance sheet presents a
summary statement of the firmrsquos financial position at a given time The statement
balances the firmrsquos assets (what it owns) against its financing which can be either
debt (what it owes) or equity (what was provided by owners) Below is the example
of balance sheet from Bartlettrsquos Company
Figure 26 Bartlett Company Balance Sheets Source Gitman amp Zitter 2012
39
The assets are listed from the most liquid (cash) ndash down to the least liquid
Marketable securities are very liquid short-term investments held by the firm
Because they are highly liquid marketable securities are viewed as a form of cash
(ldquonear cashrdquo) Accounts receivable represent the total monies owed the firm by its
customers on credit sales Inventories include raw materials work in process
(partially finished goods) and finished goods held by the firm The entry for gross
fixed assets is the original cost of all fixed (long-term) assets owned by the firm Net
fixed assets represent the difference between gross fixed assets and accumulated
depreciation ndash the total expense recorded for the depreciation of fixed assets The net
value of fixed assets is called their book value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
The liabilities and equity accounts are listed from short-term to long-
term Current liabilities include accounts payable amounts owed for credit
purchases by the firm notes payable outstanding short-term loans typically
from commercial banks and accruals amounts owed for services for which a bill
may not or will not be received Examples of accruals include taxes due the
government and wages due employees Long-term debt represents debt for which
payment is not due in the current year Stockholdersrsquo equity represents the
ownersrsquo claims on the firm The preferred stock entry shows the historical
proceeds from the sale of preferred stock(Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
40
292 INCOME STATEMENT
The income statement provides a financial summary of the firmrsquos operating
results during a specified period Most common are income statements covering a 1-
year period ending at a specified date ordinarily December 31 of the calendar year
Many large firms however operate on a 12-month financial cycle or fiscal year that
ends at a time other than December 31 In addition monthly income statements are
typically prepared for use by management and quarterly statements must be made
available to the stockholders of publicly owned corporations (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 59-60) The example of income statement is shown below
Figure 27 Bartlett Company Income
Statement Source GitmanampZitter2012
293 CASH FLOW ANALYSIS
A cash flow statement is one of the most important financial statements for a
project or business The statement can be as simple as a one page analysis or may
41
involve several schedules that feed information into a central statement A cash flow
statement is a listing of the flows of cash into and out of the business or project
Many cash flows are constructed with multiple time periods
For example it may list monthly cash inflows and outflows over a yearrsquos time
It not only projects the cash balance remaining at the end of the year but also
the cash balance for each month (wwwextensioniastateedu 2013) Some cash
flow budgets are constructed so that we can monitor the accuracy of our projections
These budgets allow us to make monthly cash flow projections for the coming year
and also enter actual inflows and outflows as we progress through the year This
will allow us to compare your projections to your actual cash flows and make
adjustments to the projections for the remainder of the year
Figure 28 Example of
Cash Flow Source
Gitman ampZitter 2012
Even though cash flow and profitability are closely related they are different
42
A cash flow statement lists cash inflows and cash outflows while the income
statement lists income and expenses A cash flow statement shows liquidity while an
income statement shows profitability
294 PAYBACK PERIOD
Payback periods are commonly used to evaluate proposed investments The
payback period is the amount of time required for the firm to recover its initial
investment in a project as calculated from cash inflows The payback period can be
found by dividing the initial investment by the annual cash inflow When the
payback period is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the following decision
criteria apply
If the payback period is less than the maximum acceptable payback
period accept the project
If the payback period is greater than the maximum acceptable payback
period reject the project
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 393) the length of the maximum
acceptable payback period is determined by management This value is set
subjectively on the basis of a number of factors including the type of project
(expansion replacement or renewal other) the perceived risk of the project and the
perceived relationship between the payback period and the share value It is simply a
value that management feels on average will result in value-creating investment
decisions
43
By measuring how quickly the firm recovers its initial investment the
payback period also gives implicit consideration to the timing of cash flows and
therefore to the time value of money Because it can be viewed as a measure of
risk exposure many firms use the payback period as a decision criterion or as a
supplement to other decision techniques The longer the firm must wait to recover
its invested funds the greater the possibility of a calamity Hence the shorter the
payback period the lower the firmrsquos risk exposure A second weakness is that this
approach fails to take fully into account the time factor in the value of money A
third weakness of payback is its failure to recognize cash flows that occur after the
payback period (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 394-396)
Figure 29 Calculation of
Payback Period Source
Gitman amp Zitter 2012
44
295 NET PRESENT VALUE (NPV)
The method used by most large companies to evaluate investment projects is
called net present value (NPV) The intuition behind the NPV method is simple
When firms make investments they are spending money that they obtained in one
form or another from investors Investors expect a return on the money that they give
to firms so a firm should undertake an investment only if the present value of the
cash flow that the investment generates is greater than the cost of making the
investment in the first place
Because the NPV method takes into account the time value of investorsrsquo
money it is a more sophisticated capital budgeting technique than the payback rule
The NPV method discounts the firmrsquos cash flows at the firmrsquos cost of capital This
rate is the minimum return that must be earned on a project to satisfy the firmrsquos
investors Projects with lower returns fail to meet investorsrsquo expectations and
therefore decrease firm value and projects with higher returns increase firm
value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
The net present value (NPV) is found by subtracting a projectrsquos initial
investment (CF0) from the present value of its cash inflows (CFt) discounted at a
rate equal to the firmrsquos cost of capital (r) as shown below
NPV = Present value of cash inflows - Initial investment
When NPV is used both inflows and outflows are measured in terms of
45
present dollars For a project that has cash outflows beyond the initial investment the
net present value of a project would be found by subtracting the present value of
outflows from the present value of inflows When NPV is used to make accept reject
decisions the decision criteria are as follows
If the NPV is greater than $0 accept the project
If the NPV is less than $0 reject the project
If the NPV is greater than $0 the firm will earn a return greater than its cost of
capital Such action should increase the market value of the firm and therefore the
wealth of its owners by an amount equal to the NPV (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
296 INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN (IRR)
The internal rate of return (IRR) is one of the most widely used capital
budgeting techniques The internal rate of return (IRR) is the discount rate that
equates the NPV of an investment opportunity with $0 (because the present value of
cash inflows equals the initial investment) It is the rate of return that the firm will
earn if it invests in the project and receives the given cash inflows (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 401)
When IRR is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the decision criteria are as
follows
If the IRR is greater than the cost of capital accept the project
46
If the IRR is less than the cost of capital reject the project
To calculate IRR Most financial calculators have a pre-programmed IRR
function that can be used to simplify the IRR calculation With these calculators you
merely punch in all cash flows just as if to calculate NPV and then depress IRR to
find the internal rate of return Computer software including spreadsheets is also
available for simplifying these calculations All NPV and IRR values presented in
this and subsequent chapters are obtained by using these functions on a popular
financial calculator (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 402)
297 COST OF GOOD SOLD (COGS)
Cost of goods sold is the direct costs attributable to the production of the
goods sold by a company This amount includes the cost of the materials used in
creating the good along with the direct labor costs used to produce the good It
excludes indirect expenses such as distribution costs and sales force costs
COGS is the costs that go into creating the products that a company sells
therefore the only costs included in the measure are those that are directly tied to the
production of the products For example the COGS for an automaker would include
the material costs for the parts that go into making the car along with the labor costs
used to put the car together The cost of sending the cars to dealerships and the cost of
the labor used to sell the car would be excluded
The exact costs included in the COGS calculation will differ from one type
of business to another The cost of goods attributed to a companys products are
47
expensed as the company sells these goods In summary for manufacturers COGS is
the cost of buying raw materials and manufacturing finished products For retailers
itrsquos the cost of obtaining or buying the products sold to customers If the company is
in a service industry COGS is the cost of the service it offers
48
49
50
36
People
People are essential ingredients in service provision recruiting and training
the right staff is required to create a competitive advantage
28 OPERATIONAL MANAGEMENT 281 THE SERVICE DESIGN PROCESS Service design is more comprehensive and occurs more often than product
design The inherent variability of service processes requires that the service system
be carefully designed The service concept defines the target customer and the desired
customer experience The service design process must be different and unique from
others to make the product selling point It also defines how onersquos service is
different from others and how it will compete in the marketplace Sometimes
services are successful because their service concept fills a previously unoccupied
niche or differs from the generally accepted mode of operation (Rusell amp Taylor
2011 193)
37
Figure 25 The Service Design Process Source Rusell amp Taylor2011
From the service concept a service package is created to meet customer
needs The package consists of a mixture of physical items sensual
benefits and psychological benefits Effective service design recognizes and
defines all the components of a service package Finding the appropriate mix of
physical items and sensual and psychological benefits and designing them to be
consistent with each other and the service concept is also important (Rusell amp
Taylor 2011 194) From the service package service specifications are developed
for performance design and delivery Performance specifications outline
expectations and requirements for general and specific customers
Performance specifications are converted into design specifications and finally
delivery specifications Design specifications must describe the service in
sufficient detail for the desired service experience to be replicated for different
individuals at numerous locations The specifications typically consist of
38
activities to be performed skill requirements and guidelines for service
providers and cost and time estimates Facility size location and layoutas well
as equipment needs are also included
29 FINANCIAL THEORY 291 BALANCE SHEET
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 62) The balance sheet presents a
summary statement of the firmrsquos financial position at a given time The statement
balances the firmrsquos assets (what it owns) against its financing which can be either
debt (what it owes) or equity (what was provided by owners) Below is the example
of balance sheet from Bartlettrsquos Company
Figure 26 Bartlett Company Balance Sheets Source Gitman amp Zitter 2012
39
The assets are listed from the most liquid (cash) ndash down to the least liquid
Marketable securities are very liquid short-term investments held by the firm
Because they are highly liquid marketable securities are viewed as a form of cash
(ldquonear cashrdquo) Accounts receivable represent the total monies owed the firm by its
customers on credit sales Inventories include raw materials work in process
(partially finished goods) and finished goods held by the firm The entry for gross
fixed assets is the original cost of all fixed (long-term) assets owned by the firm Net
fixed assets represent the difference between gross fixed assets and accumulated
depreciation ndash the total expense recorded for the depreciation of fixed assets The net
value of fixed assets is called their book value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
The liabilities and equity accounts are listed from short-term to long-
term Current liabilities include accounts payable amounts owed for credit
purchases by the firm notes payable outstanding short-term loans typically
from commercial banks and accruals amounts owed for services for which a bill
may not or will not be received Examples of accruals include taxes due the
government and wages due employees Long-term debt represents debt for which
payment is not due in the current year Stockholdersrsquo equity represents the
ownersrsquo claims on the firm The preferred stock entry shows the historical
proceeds from the sale of preferred stock(Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
40
292 INCOME STATEMENT
The income statement provides a financial summary of the firmrsquos operating
results during a specified period Most common are income statements covering a 1-
year period ending at a specified date ordinarily December 31 of the calendar year
Many large firms however operate on a 12-month financial cycle or fiscal year that
ends at a time other than December 31 In addition monthly income statements are
typically prepared for use by management and quarterly statements must be made
available to the stockholders of publicly owned corporations (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 59-60) The example of income statement is shown below
Figure 27 Bartlett Company Income
Statement Source GitmanampZitter2012
293 CASH FLOW ANALYSIS
A cash flow statement is one of the most important financial statements for a
project or business The statement can be as simple as a one page analysis or may
41
involve several schedules that feed information into a central statement A cash flow
statement is a listing of the flows of cash into and out of the business or project
Many cash flows are constructed with multiple time periods
For example it may list monthly cash inflows and outflows over a yearrsquos time
It not only projects the cash balance remaining at the end of the year but also
the cash balance for each month (wwwextensioniastateedu 2013) Some cash
flow budgets are constructed so that we can monitor the accuracy of our projections
These budgets allow us to make monthly cash flow projections for the coming year
and also enter actual inflows and outflows as we progress through the year This
will allow us to compare your projections to your actual cash flows and make
adjustments to the projections for the remainder of the year
Figure 28 Example of
Cash Flow Source
Gitman ampZitter 2012
Even though cash flow and profitability are closely related they are different
42
A cash flow statement lists cash inflows and cash outflows while the income
statement lists income and expenses A cash flow statement shows liquidity while an
income statement shows profitability
294 PAYBACK PERIOD
Payback periods are commonly used to evaluate proposed investments The
payback period is the amount of time required for the firm to recover its initial
investment in a project as calculated from cash inflows The payback period can be
found by dividing the initial investment by the annual cash inflow When the
payback period is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the following decision
criteria apply
If the payback period is less than the maximum acceptable payback
period accept the project
If the payback period is greater than the maximum acceptable payback
period reject the project
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 393) the length of the maximum
acceptable payback period is determined by management This value is set
subjectively on the basis of a number of factors including the type of project
(expansion replacement or renewal other) the perceived risk of the project and the
perceived relationship between the payback period and the share value It is simply a
value that management feels on average will result in value-creating investment
decisions
43
By measuring how quickly the firm recovers its initial investment the
payback period also gives implicit consideration to the timing of cash flows and
therefore to the time value of money Because it can be viewed as a measure of
risk exposure many firms use the payback period as a decision criterion or as a
supplement to other decision techniques The longer the firm must wait to recover
its invested funds the greater the possibility of a calamity Hence the shorter the
payback period the lower the firmrsquos risk exposure A second weakness is that this
approach fails to take fully into account the time factor in the value of money A
third weakness of payback is its failure to recognize cash flows that occur after the
payback period (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 394-396)
Figure 29 Calculation of
Payback Period Source
Gitman amp Zitter 2012
44
295 NET PRESENT VALUE (NPV)
The method used by most large companies to evaluate investment projects is
called net present value (NPV) The intuition behind the NPV method is simple
When firms make investments they are spending money that they obtained in one
form or another from investors Investors expect a return on the money that they give
to firms so a firm should undertake an investment only if the present value of the
cash flow that the investment generates is greater than the cost of making the
investment in the first place
Because the NPV method takes into account the time value of investorsrsquo
money it is a more sophisticated capital budgeting technique than the payback rule
The NPV method discounts the firmrsquos cash flows at the firmrsquos cost of capital This
rate is the minimum return that must be earned on a project to satisfy the firmrsquos
investors Projects with lower returns fail to meet investorsrsquo expectations and
therefore decrease firm value and projects with higher returns increase firm
value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
The net present value (NPV) is found by subtracting a projectrsquos initial
investment (CF0) from the present value of its cash inflows (CFt) discounted at a
rate equal to the firmrsquos cost of capital (r) as shown below
NPV = Present value of cash inflows - Initial investment
When NPV is used both inflows and outflows are measured in terms of
45
present dollars For a project that has cash outflows beyond the initial investment the
net present value of a project would be found by subtracting the present value of
outflows from the present value of inflows When NPV is used to make accept reject
decisions the decision criteria are as follows
If the NPV is greater than $0 accept the project
If the NPV is less than $0 reject the project
If the NPV is greater than $0 the firm will earn a return greater than its cost of
capital Such action should increase the market value of the firm and therefore the
wealth of its owners by an amount equal to the NPV (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
296 INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN (IRR)
The internal rate of return (IRR) is one of the most widely used capital
budgeting techniques The internal rate of return (IRR) is the discount rate that
equates the NPV of an investment opportunity with $0 (because the present value of
cash inflows equals the initial investment) It is the rate of return that the firm will
earn if it invests in the project and receives the given cash inflows (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 401)
When IRR is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the decision criteria are as
follows
If the IRR is greater than the cost of capital accept the project
46
If the IRR is less than the cost of capital reject the project
To calculate IRR Most financial calculators have a pre-programmed IRR
function that can be used to simplify the IRR calculation With these calculators you
merely punch in all cash flows just as if to calculate NPV and then depress IRR to
find the internal rate of return Computer software including spreadsheets is also
available for simplifying these calculations All NPV and IRR values presented in
this and subsequent chapters are obtained by using these functions on a popular
financial calculator (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 402)
297 COST OF GOOD SOLD (COGS)
Cost of goods sold is the direct costs attributable to the production of the
goods sold by a company This amount includes the cost of the materials used in
creating the good along with the direct labor costs used to produce the good It
excludes indirect expenses such as distribution costs and sales force costs
COGS is the costs that go into creating the products that a company sells
therefore the only costs included in the measure are those that are directly tied to the
production of the products For example the COGS for an automaker would include
the material costs for the parts that go into making the car along with the labor costs
used to put the car together The cost of sending the cars to dealerships and the cost of
the labor used to sell the car would be excluded
The exact costs included in the COGS calculation will differ from one type
of business to another The cost of goods attributed to a companys products are
47
expensed as the company sells these goods In summary for manufacturers COGS is
the cost of buying raw materials and manufacturing finished products For retailers
itrsquos the cost of obtaining or buying the products sold to customers If the company is
in a service industry COGS is the cost of the service it offers
48
49
50
37
Figure 25 The Service Design Process Source Rusell amp Taylor2011
From the service concept a service package is created to meet customer
needs The package consists of a mixture of physical items sensual
benefits and psychological benefits Effective service design recognizes and
defines all the components of a service package Finding the appropriate mix of
physical items and sensual and psychological benefits and designing them to be
consistent with each other and the service concept is also important (Rusell amp
Taylor 2011 194) From the service package service specifications are developed
for performance design and delivery Performance specifications outline
expectations and requirements for general and specific customers
Performance specifications are converted into design specifications and finally
delivery specifications Design specifications must describe the service in
sufficient detail for the desired service experience to be replicated for different
individuals at numerous locations The specifications typically consist of
38
activities to be performed skill requirements and guidelines for service
providers and cost and time estimates Facility size location and layoutas well
as equipment needs are also included
29 FINANCIAL THEORY 291 BALANCE SHEET
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 62) The balance sheet presents a
summary statement of the firmrsquos financial position at a given time The statement
balances the firmrsquos assets (what it owns) against its financing which can be either
debt (what it owes) or equity (what was provided by owners) Below is the example
of balance sheet from Bartlettrsquos Company
Figure 26 Bartlett Company Balance Sheets Source Gitman amp Zitter 2012
39
The assets are listed from the most liquid (cash) ndash down to the least liquid
Marketable securities are very liquid short-term investments held by the firm
Because they are highly liquid marketable securities are viewed as a form of cash
(ldquonear cashrdquo) Accounts receivable represent the total monies owed the firm by its
customers on credit sales Inventories include raw materials work in process
(partially finished goods) and finished goods held by the firm The entry for gross
fixed assets is the original cost of all fixed (long-term) assets owned by the firm Net
fixed assets represent the difference between gross fixed assets and accumulated
depreciation ndash the total expense recorded for the depreciation of fixed assets The net
value of fixed assets is called their book value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
The liabilities and equity accounts are listed from short-term to long-
term Current liabilities include accounts payable amounts owed for credit
purchases by the firm notes payable outstanding short-term loans typically
from commercial banks and accruals amounts owed for services for which a bill
may not or will not be received Examples of accruals include taxes due the
government and wages due employees Long-term debt represents debt for which
payment is not due in the current year Stockholdersrsquo equity represents the
ownersrsquo claims on the firm The preferred stock entry shows the historical
proceeds from the sale of preferred stock(Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
40
292 INCOME STATEMENT
The income statement provides a financial summary of the firmrsquos operating
results during a specified period Most common are income statements covering a 1-
year period ending at a specified date ordinarily December 31 of the calendar year
Many large firms however operate on a 12-month financial cycle or fiscal year that
ends at a time other than December 31 In addition monthly income statements are
typically prepared for use by management and quarterly statements must be made
available to the stockholders of publicly owned corporations (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 59-60) The example of income statement is shown below
Figure 27 Bartlett Company Income
Statement Source GitmanampZitter2012
293 CASH FLOW ANALYSIS
A cash flow statement is one of the most important financial statements for a
project or business The statement can be as simple as a one page analysis or may
41
involve several schedules that feed information into a central statement A cash flow
statement is a listing of the flows of cash into and out of the business or project
Many cash flows are constructed with multiple time periods
For example it may list monthly cash inflows and outflows over a yearrsquos time
It not only projects the cash balance remaining at the end of the year but also
the cash balance for each month (wwwextensioniastateedu 2013) Some cash
flow budgets are constructed so that we can monitor the accuracy of our projections
These budgets allow us to make monthly cash flow projections for the coming year
and also enter actual inflows and outflows as we progress through the year This
will allow us to compare your projections to your actual cash flows and make
adjustments to the projections for the remainder of the year
Figure 28 Example of
Cash Flow Source
Gitman ampZitter 2012
Even though cash flow and profitability are closely related they are different
42
A cash flow statement lists cash inflows and cash outflows while the income
statement lists income and expenses A cash flow statement shows liquidity while an
income statement shows profitability
294 PAYBACK PERIOD
Payback periods are commonly used to evaluate proposed investments The
payback period is the amount of time required for the firm to recover its initial
investment in a project as calculated from cash inflows The payback period can be
found by dividing the initial investment by the annual cash inflow When the
payback period is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the following decision
criteria apply
If the payback period is less than the maximum acceptable payback
period accept the project
If the payback period is greater than the maximum acceptable payback
period reject the project
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 393) the length of the maximum
acceptable payback period is determined by management This value is set
subjectively on the basis of a number of factors including the type of project
(expansion replacement or renewal other) the perceived risk of the project and the
perceived relationship between the payback period and the share value It is simply a
value that management feels on average will result in value-creating investment
decisions
43
By measuring how quickly the firm recovers its initial investment the
payback period also gives implicit consideration to the timing of cash flows and
therefore to the time value of money Because it can be viewed as a measure of
risk exposure many firms use the payback period as a decision criterion or as a
supplement to other decision techniques The longer the firm must wait to recover
its invested funds the greater the possibility of a calamity Hence the shorter the
payback period the lower the firmrsquos risk exposure A second weakness is that this
approach fails to take fully into account the time factor in the value of money A
third weakness of payback is its failure to recognize cash flows that occur after the
payback period (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 394-396)
Figure 29 Calculation of
Payback Period Source
Gitman amp Zitter 2012
44
295 NET PRESENT VALUE (NPV)
The method used by most large companies to evaluate investment projects is
called net present value (NPV) The intuition behind the NPV method is simple
When firms make investments they are spending money that they obtained in one
form or another from investors Investors expect a return on the money that they give
to firms so a firm should undertake an investment only if the present value of the
cash flow that the investment generates is greater than the cost of making the
investment in the first place
Because the NPV method takes into account the time value of investorsrsquo
money it is a more sophisticated capital budgeting technique than the payback rule
The NPV method discounts the firmrsquos cash flows at the firmrsquos cost of capital This
rate is the minimum return that must be earned on a project to satisfy the firmrsquos
investors Projects with lower returns fail to meet investorsrsquo expectations and
therefore decrease firm value and projects with higher returns increase firm
value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
The net present value (NPV) is found by subtracting a projectrsquos initial
investment (CF0) from the present value of its cash inflows (CFt) discounted at a
rate equal to the firmrsquos cost of capital (r) as shown below
NPV = Present value of cash inflows - Initial investment
When NPV is used both inflows and outflows are measured in terms of
45
present dollars For a project that has cash outflows beyond the initial investment the
net present value of a project would be found by subtracting the present value of
outflows from the present value of inflows When NPV is used to make accept reject
decisions the decision criteria are as follows
If the NPV is greater than $0 accept the project
If the NPV is less than $0 reject the project
If the NPV is greater than $0 the firm will earn a return greater than its cost of
capital Such action should increase the market value of the firm and therefore the
wealth of its owners by an amount equal to the NPV (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
296 INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN (IRR)
The internal rate of return (IRR) is one of the most widely used capital
budgeting techniques The internal rate of return (IRR) is the discount rate that
equates the NPV of an investment opportunity with $0 (because the present value of
cash inflows equals the initial investment) It is the rate of return that the firm will
earn if it invests in the project and receives the given cash inflows (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 401)
When IRR is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the decision criteria are as
follows
If the IRR is greater than the cost of capital accept the project
46
If the IRR is less than the cost of capital reject the project
To calculate IRR Most financial calculators have a pre-programmed IRR
function that can be used to simplify the IRR calculation With these calculators you
merely punch in all cash flows just as if to calculate NPV and then depress IRR to
find the internal rate of return Computer software including spreadsheets is also
available for simplifying these calculations All NPV and IRR values presented in
this and subsequent chapters are obtained by using these functions on a popular
financial calculator (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 402)
297 COST OF GOOD SOLD (COGS)
Cost of goods sold is the direct costs attributable to the production of the
goods sold by a company This amount includes the cost of the materials used in
creating the good along with the direct labor costs used to produce the good It
excludes indirect expenses such as distribution costs and sales force costs
COGS is the costs that go into creating the products that a company sells
therefore the only costs included in the measure are those that are directly tied to the
production of the products For example the COGS for an automaker would include
the material costs for the parts that go into making the car along with the labor costs
used to put the car together The cost of sending the cars to dealerships and the cost of
the labor used to sell the car would be excluded
The exact costs included in the COGS calculation will differ from one type
of business to another The cost of goods attributed to a companys products are
47
expensed as the company sells these goods In summary for manufacturers COGS is
the cost of buying raw materials and manufacturing finished products For retailers
itrsquos the cost of obtaining or buying the products sold to customers If the company is
in a service industry COGS is the cost of the service it offers
48
49
50
38
activities to be performed skill requirements and guidelines for service
providers and cost and time estimates Facility size location and layoutas well
as equipment needs are also included
29 FINANCIAL THEORY 291 BALANCE SHEET
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 62) The balance sheet presents a
summary statement of the firmrsquos financial position at a given time The statement
balances the firmrsquos assets (what it owns) against its financing which can be either
debt (what it owes) or equity (what was provided by owners) Below is the example
of balance sheet from Bartlettrsquos Company
Figure 26 Bartlett Company Balance Sheets Source Gitman amp Zitter 2012
39
The assets are listed from the most liquid (cash) ndash down to the least liquid
Marketable securities are very liquid short-term investments held by the firm
Because they are highly liquid marketable securities are viewed as a form of cash
(ldquonear cashrdquo) Accounts receivable represent the total monies owed the firm by its
customers on credit sales Inventories include raw materials work in process
(partially finished goods) and finished goods held by the firm The entry for gross
fixed assets is the original cost of all fixed (long-term) assets owned by the firm Net
fixed assets represent the difference between gross fixed assets and accumulated
depreciation ndash the total expense recorded for the depreciation of fixed assets The net
value of fixed assets is called their book value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
The liabilities and equity accounts are listed from short-term to long-
term Current liabilities include accounts payable amounts owed for credit
purchases by the firm notes payable outstanding short-term loans typically
from commercial banks and accruals amounts owed for services for which a bill
may not or will not be received Examples of accruals include taxes due the
government and wages due employees Long-term debt represents debt for which
payment is not due in the current year Stockholdersrsquo equity represents the
ownersrsquo claims on the firm The preferred stock entry shows the historical
proceeds from the sale of preferred stock(Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
40
292 INCOME STATEMENT
The income statement provides a financial summary of the firmrsquos operating
results during a specified period Most common are income statements covering a 1-
year period ending at a specified date ordinarily December 31 of the calendar year
Many large firms however operate on a 12-month financial cycle or fiscal year that
ends at a time other than December 31 In addition monthly income statements are
typically prepared for use by management and quarterly statements must be made
available to the stockholders of publicly owned corporations (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 59-60) The example of income statement is shown below
Figure 27 Bartlett Company Income
Statement Source GitmanampZitter2012
293 CASH FLOW ANALYSIS
A cash flow statement is one of the most important financial statements for a
project or business The statement can be as simple as a one page analysis or may
41
involve several schedules that feed information into a central statement A cash flow
statement is a listing of the flows of cash into and out of the business or project
Many cash flows are constructed with multiple time periods
For example it may list monthly cash inflows and outflows over a yearrsquos time
It not only projects the cash balance remaining at the end of the year but also
the cash balance for each month (wwwextensioniastateedu 2013) Some cash
flow budgets are constructed so that we can monitor the accuracy of our projections
These budgets allow us to make monthly cash flow projections for the coming year
and also enter actual inflows and outflows as we progress through the year This
will allow us to compare your projections to your actual cash flows and make
adjustments to the projections for the remainder of the year
Figure 28 Example of
Cash Flow Source
Gitman ampZitter 2012
Even though cash flow and profitability are closely related they are different
42
A cash flow statement lists cash inflows and cash outflows while the income
statement lists income and expenses A cash flow statement shows liquidity while an
income statement shows profitability
294 PAYBACK PERIOD
Payback periods are commonly used to evaluate proposed investments The
payback period is the amount of time required for the firm to recover its initial
investment in a project as calculated from cash inflows The payback period can be
found by dividing the initial investment by the annual cash inflow When the
payback period is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the following decision
criteria apply
If the payback period is less than the maximum acceptable payback
period accept the project
If the payback period is greater than the maximum acceptable payback
period reject the project
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 393) the length of the maximum
acceptable payback period is determined by management This value is set
subjectively on the basis of a number of factors including the type of project
(expansion replacement or renewal other) the perceived risk of the project and the
perceived relationship between the payback period and the share value It is simply a
value that management feels on average will result in value-creating investment
decisions
43
By measuring how quickly the firm recovers its initial investment the
payback period also gives implicit consideration to the timing of cash flows and
therefore to the time value of money Because it can be viewed as a measure of
risk exposure many firms use the payback period as a decision criterion or as a
supplement to other decision techniques The longer the firm must wait to recover
its invested funds the greater the possibility of a calamity Hence the shorter the
payback period the lower the firmrsquos risk exposure A second weakness is that this
approach fails to take fully into account the time factor in the value of money A
third weakness of payback is its failure to recognize cash flows that occur after the
payback period (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 394-396)
Figure 29 Calculation of
Payback Period Source
Gitman amp Zitter 2012
44
295 NET PRESENT VALUE (NPV)
The method used by most large companies to evaluate investment projects is
called net present value (NPV) The intuition behind the NPV method is simple
When firms make investments they are spending money that they obtained in one
form or another from investors Investors expect a return on the money that they give
to firms so a firm should undertake an investment only if the present value of the
cash flow that the investment generates is greater than the cost of making the
investment in the first place
Because the NPV method takes into account the time value of investorsrsquo
money it is a more sophisticated capital budgeting technique than the payback rule
The NPV method discounts the firmrsquos cash flows at the firmrsquos cost of capital This
rate is the minimum return that must be earned on a project to satisfy the firmrsquos
investors Projects with lower returns fail to meet investorsrsquo expectations and
therefore decrease firm value and projects with higher returns increase firm
value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
The net present value (NPV) is found by subtracting a projectrsquos initial
investment (CF0) from the present value of its cash inflows (CFt) discounted at a
rate equal to the firmrsquos cost of capital (r) as shown below
NPV = Present value of cash inflows - Initial investment
When NPV is used both inflows and outflows are measured in terms of
45
present dollars For a project that has cash outflows beyond the initial investment the
net present value of a project would be found by subtracting the present value of
outflows from the present value of inflows When NPV is used to make accept reject
decisions the decision criteria are as follows
If the NPV is greater than $0 accept the project
If the NPV is less than $0 reject the project
If the NPV is greater than $0 the firm will earn a return greater than its cost of
capital Such action should increase the market value of the firm and therefore the
wealth of its owners by an amount equal to the NPV (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
296 INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN (IRR)
The internal rate of return (IRR) is one of the most widely used capital
budgeting techniques The internal rate of return (IRR) is the discount rate that
equates the NPV of an investment opportunity with $0 (because the present value of
cash inflows equals the initial investment) It is the rate of return that the firm will
earn if it invests in the project and receives the given cash inflows (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 401)
When IRR is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the decision criteria are as
follows
If the IRR is greater than the cost of capital accept the project
46
If the IRR is less than the cost of capital reject the project
To calculate IRR Most financial calculators have a pre-programmed IRR
function that can be used to simplify the IRR calculation With these calculators you
merely punch in all cash flows just as if to calculate NPV and then depress IRR to
find the internal rate of return Computer software including spreadsheets is also
available for simplifying these calculations All NPV and IRR values presented in
this and subsequent chapters are obtained by using these functions on a popular
financial calculator (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 402)
297 COST OF GOOD SOLD (COGS)
Cost of goods sold is the direct costs attributable to the production of the
goods sold by a company This amount includes the cost of the materials used in
creating the good along with the direct labor costs used to produce the good It
excludes indirect expenses such as distribution costs and sales force costs
COGS is the costs that go into creating the products that a company sells
therefore the only costs included in the measure are those that are directly tied to the
production of the products For example the COGS for an automaker would include
the material costs for the parts that go into making the car along with the labor costs
used to put the car together The cost of sending the cars to dealerships and the cost of
the labor used to sell the car would be excluded
The exact costs included in the COGS calculation will differ from one type
of business to another The cost of goods attributed to a companys products are
47
expensed as the company sells these goods In summary for manufacturers COGS is
the cost of buying raw materials and manufacturing finished products For retailers
itrsquos the cost of obtaining or buying the products sold to customers If the company is
in a service industry COGS is the cost of the service it offers
48
49
50
39
The assets are listed from the most liquid (cash) ndash down to the least liquid
Marketable securities are very liquid short-term investments held by the firm
Because they are highly liquid marketable securities are viewed as a form of cash
(ldquonear cashrdquo) Accounts receivable represent the total monies owed the firm by its
customers on credit sales Inventories include raw materials work in process
(partially finished goods) and finished goods held by the firm The entry for gross
fixed assets is the original cost of all fixed (long-term) assets owned by the firm Net
fixed assets represent the difference between gross fixed assets and accumulated
depreciation ndash the total expense recorded for the depreciation of fixed assets The net
value of fixed assets is called their book value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
The liabilities and equity accounts are listed from short-term to long-
term Current liabilities include accounts payable amounts owed for credit
purchases by the firm notes payable outstanding short-term loans typically
from commercial banks and accruals amounts owed for services for which a bill
may not or will not be received Examples of accruals include taxes due the
government and wages due employees Long-term debt represents debt for which
payment is not due in the current year Stockholdersrsquo equity represents the
ownersrsquo claims on the firm The preferred stock entry shows the historical
proceeds from the sale of preferred stock(Gitman amp Zitter 2012 62)
40
292 INCOME STATEMENT
The income statement provides a financial summary of the firmrsquos operating
results during a specified period Most common are income statements covering a 1-
year period ending at a specified date ordinarily December 31 of the calendar year
Many large firms however operate on a 12-month financial cycle or fiscal year that
ends at a time other than December 31 In addition monthly income statements are
typically prepared for use by management and quarterly statements must be made
available to the stockholders of publicly owned corporations (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 59-60) The example of income statement is shown below
Figure 27 Bartlett Company Income
Statement Source GitmanampZitter2012
293 CASH FLOW ANALYSIS
A cash flow statement is one of the most important financial statements for a
project or business The statement can be as simple as a one page analysis or may
41
involve several schedules that feed information into a central statement A cash flow
statement is a listing of the flows of cash into and out of the business or project
Many cash flows are constructed with multiple time periods
For example it may list monthly cash inflows and outflows over a yearrsquos time
It not only projects the cash balance remaining at the end of the year but also
the cash balance for each month (wwwextensioniastateedu 2013) Some cash
flow budgets are constructed so that we can monitor the accuracy of our projections
These budgets allow us to make monthly cash flow projections for the coming year
and also enter actual inflows and outflows as we progress through the year This
will allow us to compare your projections to your actual cash flows and make
adjustments to the projections for the remainder of the year
Figure 28 Example of
Cash Flow Source
Gitman ampZitter 2012
Even though cash flow and profitability are closely related they are different
42
A cash flow statement lists cash inflows and cash outflows while the income
statement lists income and expenses A cash flow statement shows liquidity while an
income statement shows profitability
294 PAYBACK PERIOD
Payback periods are commonly used to evaluate proposed investments The
payback period is the amount of time required for the firm to recover its initial
investment in a project as calculated from cash inflows The payback period can be
found by dividing the initial investment by the annual cash inflow When the
payback period is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the following decision
criteria apply
If the payback period is less than the maximum acceptable payback
period accept the project
If the payback period is greater than the maximum acceptable payback
period reject the project
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 393) the length of the maximum
acceptable payback period is determined by management This value is set
subjectively on the basis of a number of factors including the type of project
(expansion replacement or renewal other) the perceived risk of the project and the
perceived relationship between the payback period and the share value It is simply a
value that management feels on average will result in value-creating investment
decisions
43
By measuring how quickly the firm recovers its initial investment the
payback period also gives implicit consideration to the timing of cash flows and
therefore to the time value of money Because it can be viewed as a measure of
risk exposure many firms use the payback period as a decision criterion or as a
supplement to other decision techniques The longer the firm must wait to recover
its invested funds the greater the possibility of a calamity Hence the shorter the
payback period the lower the firmrsquos risk exposure A second weakness is that this
approach fails to take fully into account the time factor in the value of money A
third weakness of payback is its failure to recognize cash flows that occur after the
payback period (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 394-396)
Figure 29 Calculation of
Payback Period Source
Gitman amp Zitter 2012
44
295 NET PRESENT VALUE (NPV)
The method used by most large companies to evaluate investment projects is
called net present value (NPV) The intuition behind the NPV method is simple
When firms make investments they are spending money that they obtained in one
form or another from investors Investors expect a return on the money that they give
to firms so a firm should undertake an investment only if the present value of the
cash flow that the investment generates is greater than the cost of making the
investment in the first place
Because the NPV method takes into account the time value of investorsrsquo
money it is a more sophisticated capital budgeting technique than the payback rule
The NPV method discounts the firmrsquos cash flows at the firmrsquos cost of capital This
rate is the minimum return that must be earned on a project to satisfy the firmrsquos
investors Projects with lower returns fail to meet investorsrsquo expectations and
therefore decrease firm value and projects with higher returns increase firm
value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
The net present value (NPV) is found by subtracting a projectrsquos initial
investment (CF0) from the present value of its cash inflows (CFt) discounted at a
rate equal to the firmrsquos cost of capital (r) as shown below
NPV = Present value of cash inflows - Initial investment
When NPV is used both inflows and outflows are measured in terms of
45
present dollars For a project that has cash outflows beyond the initial investment the
net present value of a project would be found by subtracting the present value of
outflows from the present value of inflows When NPV is used to make accept reject
decisions the decision criteria are as follows
If the NPV is greater than $0 accept the project
If the NPV is less than $0 reject the project
If the NPV is greater than $0 the firm will earn a return greater than its cost of
capital Such action should increase the market value of the firm and therefore the
wealth of its owners by an amount equal to the NPV (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
296 INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN (IRR)
The internal rate of return (IRR) is one of the most widely used capital
budgeting techniques The internal rate of return (IRR) is the discount rate that
equates the NPV of an investment opportunity with $0 (because the present value of
cash inflows equals the initial investment) It is the rate of return that the firm will
earn if it invests in the project and receives the given cash inflows (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 401)
When IRR is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the decision criteria are as
follows
If the IRR is greater than the cost of capital accept the project
46
If the IRR is less than the cost of capital reject the project
To calculate IRR Most financial calculators have a pre-programmed IRR
function that can be used to simplify the IRR calculation With these calculators you
merely punch in all cash flows just as if to calculate NPV and then depress IRR to
find the internal rate of return Computer software including spreadsheets is also
available for simplifying these calculations All NPV and IRR values presented in
this and subsequent chapters are obtained by using these functions on a popular
financial calculator (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 402)
297 COST OF GOOD SOLD (COGS)
Cost of goods sold is the direct costs attributable to the production of the
goods sold by a company This amount includes the cost of the materials used in
creating the good along with the direct labor costs used to produce the good It
excludes indirect expenses such as distribution costs and sales force costs
COGS is the costs that go into creating the products that a company sells
therefore the only costs included in the measure are those that are directly tied to the
production of the products For example the COGS for an automaker would include
the material costs for the parts that go into making the car along with the labor costs
used to put the car together The cost of sending the cars to dealerships and the cost of
the labor used to sell the car would be excluded
The exact costs included in the COGS calculation will differ from one type
of business to another The cost of goods attributed to a companys products are
47
expensed as the company sells these goods In summary for manufacturers COGS is
the cost of buying raw materials and manufacturing finished products For retailers
itrsquos the cost of obtaining or buying the products sold to customers If the company is
in a service industry COGS is the cost of the service it offers
48
49
50
40
292 INCOME STATEMENT
The income statement provides a financial summary of the firmrsquos operating
results during a specified period Most common are income statements covering a 1-
year period ending at a specified date ordinarily December 31 of the calendar year
Many large firms however operate on a 12-month financial cycle or fiscal year that
ends at a time other than December 31 In addition monthly income statements are
typically prepared for use by management and quarterly statements must be made
available to the stockholders of publicly owned corporations (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 59-60) The example of income statement is shown below
Figure 27 Bartlett Company Income
Statement Source GitmanampZitter2012
293 CASH FLOW ANALYSIS
A cash flow statement is one of the most important financial statements for a
project or business The statement can be as simple as a one page analysis or may
41
involve several schedules that feed information into a central statement A cash flow
statement is a listing of the flows of cash into and out of the business or project
Many cash flows are constructed with multiple time periods
For example it may list monthly cash inflows and outflows over a yearrsquos time
It not only projects the cash balance remaining at the end of the year but also
the cash balance for each month (wwwextensioniastateedu 2013) Some cash
flow budgets are constructed so that we can monitor the accuracy of our projections
These budgets allow us to make monthly cash flow projections for the coming year
and also enter actual inflows and outflows as we progress through the year This
will allow us to compare your projections to your actual cash flows and make
adjustments to the projections for the remainder of the year
Figure 28 Example of
Cash Flow Source
Gitman ampZitter 2012
Even though cash flow and profitability are closely related they are different
42
A cash flow statement lists cash inflows and cash outflows while the income
statement lists income and expenses A cash flow statement shows liquidity while an
income statement shows profitability
294 PAYBACK PERIOD
Payback periods are commonly used to evaluate proposed investments The
payback period is the amount of time required for the firm to recover its initial
investment in a project as calculated from cash inflows The payback period can be
found by dividing the initial investment by the annual cash inflow When the
payback period is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the following decision
criteria apply
If the payback period is less than the maximum acceptable payback
period accept the project
If the payback period is greater than the maximum acceptable payback
period reject the project
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 393) the length of the maximum
acceptable payback period is determined by management This value is set
subjectively on the basis of a number of factors including the type of project
(expansion replacement or renewal other) the perceived risk of the project and the
perceived relationship between the payback period and the share value It is simply a
value that management feels on average will result in value-creating investment
decisions
43
By measuring how quickly the firm recovers its initial investment the
payback period also gives implicit consideration to the timing of cash flows and
therefore to the time value of money Because it can be viewed as a measure of
risk exposure many firms use the payback period as a decision criterion or as a
supplement to other decision techniques The longer the firm must wait to recover
its invested funds the greater the possibility of a calamity Hence the shorter the
payback period the lower the firmrsquos risk exposure A second weakness is that this
approach fails to take fully into account the time factor in the value of money A
third weakness of payback is its failure to recognize cash flows that occur after the
payback period (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 394-396)
Figure 29 Calculation of
Payback Period Source
Gitman amp Zitter 2012
44
295 NET PRESENT VALUE (NPV)
The method used by most large companies to evaluate investment projects is
called net present value (NPV) The intuition behind the NPV method is simple
When firms make investments they are spending money that they obtained in one
form or another from investors Investors expect a return on the money that they give
to firms so a firm should undertake an investment only if the present value of the
cash flow that the investment generates is greater than the cost of making the
investment in the first place
Because the NPV method takes into account the time value of investorsrsquo
money it is a more sophisticated capital budgeting technique than the payback rule
The NPV method discounts the firmrsquos cash flows at the firmrsquos cost of capital This
rate is the minimum return that must be earned on a project to satisfy the firmrsquos
investors Projects with lower returns fail to meet investorsrsquo expectations and
therefore decrease firm value and projects with higher returns increase firm
value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
The net present value (NPV) is found by subtracting a projectrsquos initial
investment (CF0) from the present value of its cash inflows (CFt) discounted at a
rate equal to the firmrsquos cost of capital (r) as shown below
NPV = Present value of cash inflows - Initial investment
When NPV is used both inflows and outflows are measured in terms of
45
present dollars For a project that has cash outflows beyond the initial investment the
net present value of a project would be found by subtracting the present value of
outflows from the present value of inflows When NPV is used to make accept reject
decisions the decision criteria are as follows
If the NPV is greater than $0 accept the project
If the NPV is less than $0 reject the project
If the NPV is greater than $0 the firm will earn a return greater than its cost of
capital Such action should increase the market value of the firm and therefore the
wealth of its owners by an amount equal to the NPV (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
296 INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN (IRR)
The internal rate of return (IRR) is one of the most widely used capital
budgeting techniques The internal rate of return (IRR) is the discount rate that
equates the NPV of an investment opportunity with $0 (because the present value of
cash inflows equals the initial investment) It is the rate of return that the firm will
earn if it invests in the project and receives the given cash inflows (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 401)
When IRR is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the decision criteria are as
follows
If the IRR is greater than the cost of capital accept the project
46
If the IRR is less than the cost of capital reject the project
To calculate IRR Most financial calculators have a pre-programmed IRR
function that can be used to simplify the IRR calculation With these calculators you
merely punch in all cash flows just as if to calculate NPV and then depress IRR to
find the internal rate of return Computer software including spreadsheets is also
available for simplifying these calculations All NPV and IRR values presented in
this and subsequent chapters are obtained by using these functions on a popular
financial calculator (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 402)
297 COST OF GOOD SOLD (COGS)
Cost of goods sold is the direct costs attributable to the production of the
goods sold by a company This amount includes the cost of the materials used in
creating the good along with the direct labor costs used to produce the good It
excludes indirect expenses such as distribution costs and sales force costs
COGS is the costs that go into creating the products that a company sells
therefore the only costs included in the measure are those that are directly tied to the
production of the products For example the COGS for an automaker would include
the material costs for the parts that go into making the car along with the labor costs
used to put the car together The cost of sending the cars to dealerships and the cost of
the labor used to sell the car would be excluded
The exact costs included in the COGS calculation will differ from one type
of business to another The cost of goods attributed to a companys products are
47
expensed as the company sells these goods In summary for manufacturers COGS is
the cost of buying raw materials and manufacturing finished products For retailers
itrsquos the cost of obtaining or buying the products sold to customers If the company is
in a service industry COGS is the cost of the service it offers
48
49
50
41
involve several schedules that feed information into a central statement A cash flow
statement is a listing of the flows of cash into and out of the business or project
Many cash flows are constructed with multiple time periods
For example it may list monthly cash inflows and outflows over a yearrsquos time
It not only projects the cash balance remaining at the end of the year but also
the cash balance for each month (wwwextensioniastateedu 2013) Some cash
flow budgets are constructed so that we can monitor the accuracy of our projections
These budgets allow us to make monthly cash flow projections for the coming year
and also enter actual inflows and outflows as we progress through the year This
will allow us to compare your projections to your actual cash flows and make
adjustments to the projections for the remainder of the year
Figure 28 Example of
Cash Flow Source
Gitman ampZitter 2012
Even though cash flow and profitability are closely related they are different
42
A cash flow statement lists cash inflows and cash outflows while the income
statement lists income and expenses A cash flow statement shows liquidity while an
income statement shows profitability
294 PAYBACK PERIOD
Payback periods are commonly used to evaluate proposed investments The
payback period is the amount of time required for the firm to recover its initial
investment in a project as calculated from cash inflows The payback period can be
found by dividing the initial investment by the annual cash inflow When the
payback period is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the following decision
criteria apply
If the payback period is less than the maximum acceptable payback
period accept the project
If the payback period is greater than the maximum acceptable payback
period reject the project
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 393) the length of the maximum
acceptable payback period is determined by management This value is set
subjectively on the basis of a number of factors including the type of project
(expansion replacement or renewal other) the perceived risk of the project and the
perceived relationship between the payback period and the share value It is simply a
value that management feels on average will result in value-creating investment
decisions
43
By measuring how quickly the firm recovers its initial investment the
payback period also gives implicit consideration to the timing of cash flows and
therefore to the time value of money Because it can be viewed as a measure of
risk exposure many firms use the payback period as a decision criterion or as a
supplement to other decision techniques The longer the firm must wait to recover
its invested funds the greater the possibility of a calamity Hence the shorter the
payback period the lower the firmrsquos risk exposure A second weakness is that this
approach fails to take fully into account the time factor in the value of money A
third weakness of payback is its failure to recognize cash flows that occur after the
payback period (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 394-396)
Figure 29 Calculation of
Payback Period Source
Gitman amp Zitter 2012
44
295 NET PRESENT VALUE (NPV)
The method used by most large companies to evaluate investment projects is
called net present value (NPV) The intuition behind the NPV method is simple
When firms make investments they are spending money that they obtained in one
form or another from investors Investors expect a return on the money that they give
to firms so a firm should undertake an investment only if the present value of the
cash flow that the investment generates is greater than the cost of making the
investment in the first place
Because the NPV method takes into account the time value of investorsrsquo
money it is a more sophisticated capital budgeting technique than the payback rule
The NPV method discounts the firmrsquos cash flows at the firmrsquos cost of capital This
rate is the minimum return that must be earned on a project to satisfy the firmrsquos
investors Projects with lower returns fail to meet investorsrsquo expectations and
therefore decrease firm value and projects with higher returns increase firm
value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
The net present value (NPV) is found by subtracting a projectrsquos initial
investment (CF0) from the present value of its cash inflows (CFt) discounted at a
rate equal to the firmrsquos cost of capital (r) as shown below
NPV = Present value of cash inflows - Initial investment
When NPV is used both inflows and outflows are measured in terms of
45
present dollars For a project that has cash outflows beyond the initial investment the
net present value of a project would be found by subtracting the present value of
outflows from the present value of inflows When NPV is used to make accept reject
decisions the decision criteria are as follows
If the NPV is greater than $0 accept the project
If the NPV is less than $0 reject the project
If the NPV is greater than $0 the firm will earn a return greater than its cost of
capital Such action should increase the market value of the firm and therefore the
wealth of its owners by an amount equal to the NPV (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
296 INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN (IRR)
The internal rate of return (IRR) is one of the most widely used capital
budgeting techniques The internal rate of return (IRR) is the discount rate that
equates the NPV of an investment opportunity with $0 (because the present value of
cash inflows equals the initial investment) It is the rate of return that the firm will
earn if it invests in the project and receives the given cash inflows (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 401)
When IRR is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the decision criteria are as
follows
If the IRR is greater than the cost of capital accept the project
46
If the IRR is less than the cost of capital reject the project
To calculate IRR Most financial calculators have a pre-programmed IRR
function that can be used to simplify the IRR calculation With these calculators you
merely punch in all cash flows just as if to calculate NPV and then depress IRR to
find the internal rate of return Computer software including spreadsheets is also
available for simplifying these calculations All NPV and IRR values presented in
this and subsequent chapters are obtained by using these functions on a popular
financial calculator (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 402)
297 COST OF GOOD SOLD (COGS)
Cost of goods sold is the direct costs attributable to the production of the
goods sold by a company This amount includes the cost of the materials used in
creating the good along with the direct labor costs used to produce the good It
excludes indirect expenses such as distribution costs and sales force costs
COGS is the costs that go into creating the products that a company sells
therefore the only costs included in the measure are those that are directly tied to the
production of the products For example the COGS for an automaker would include
the material costs for the parts that go into making the car along with the labor costs
used to put the car together The cost of sending the cars to dealerships and the cost of
the labor used to sell the car would be excluded
The exact costs included in the COGS calculation will differ from one type
of business to another The cost of goods attributed to a companys products are
47
expensed as the company sells these goods In summary for manufacturers COGS is
the cost of buying raw materials and manufacturing finished products For retailers
itrsquos the cost of obtaining or buying the products sold to customers If the company is
in a service industry COGS is the cost of the service it offers
48
49
50
42
A cash flow statement lists cash inflows and cash outflows while the income
statement lists income and expenses A cash flow statement shows liquidity while an
income statement shows profitability
294 PAYBACK PERIOD
Payback periods are commonly used to evaluate proposed investments The
payback period is the amount of time required for the firm to recover its initial
investment in a project as calculated from cash inflows The payback period can be
found by dividing the initial investment by the annual cash inflow When the
payback period is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the following decision
criteria apply
If the payback period is less than the maximum acceptable payback
period accept the project
If the payback period is greater than the maximum acceptable payback
period reject the project
According to Gitman amp Zitter (2012 393) the length of the maximum
acceptable payback period is determined by management This value is set
subjectively on the basis of a number of factors including the type of project
(expansion replacement or renewal other) the perceived risk of the project and the
perceived relationship between the payback period and the share value It is simply a
value that management feels on average will result in value-creating investment
decisions
43
By measuring how quickly the firm recovers its initial investment the
payback period also gives implicit consideration to the timing of cash flows and
therefore to the time value of money Because it can be viewed as a measure of
risk exposure many firms use the payback period as a decision criterion or as a
supplement to other decision techniques The longer the firm must wait to recover
its invested funds the greater the possibility of a calamity Hence the shorter the
payback period the lower the firmrsquos risk exposure A second weakness is that this
approach fails to take fully into account the time factor in the value of money A
third weakness of payback is its failure to recognize cash flows that occur after the
payback period (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 394-396)
Figure 29 Calculation of
Payback Period Source
Gitman amp Zitter 2012
44
295 NET PRESENT VALUE (NPV)
The method used by most large companies to evaluate investment projects is
called net present value (NPV) The intuition behind the NPV method is simple
When firms make investments they are spending money that they obtained in one
form or another from investors Investors expect a return on the money that they give
to firms so a firm should undertake an investment only if the present value of the
cash flow that the investment generates is greater than the cost of making the
investment in the first place
Because the NPV method takes into account the time value of investorsrsquo
money it is a more sophisticated capital budgeting technique than the payback rule
The NPV method discounts the firmrsquos cash flows at the firmrsquos cost of capital This
rate is the minimum return that must be earned on a project to satisfy the firmrsquos
investors Projects with lower returns fail to meet investorsrsquo expectations and
therefore decrease firm value and projects with higher returns increase firm
value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
The net present value (NPV) is found by subtracting a projectrsquos initial
investment (CF0) from the present value of its cash inflows (CFt) discounted at a
rate equal to the firmrsquos cost of capital (r) as shown below
NPV = Present value of cash inflows - Initial investment
When NPV is used both inflows and outflows are measured in terms of
45
present dollars For a project that has cash outflows beyond the initial investment the
net present value of a project would be found by subtracting the present value of
outflows from the present value of inflows When NPV is used to make accept reject
decisions the decision criteria are as follows
If the NPV is greater than $0 accept the project
If the NPV is less than $0 reject the project
If the NPV is greater than $0 the firm will earn a return greater than its cost of
capital Such action should increase the market value of the firm and therefore the
wealth of its owners by an amount equal to the NPV (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
296 INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN (IRR)
The internal rate of return (IRR) is one of the most widely used capital
budgeting techniques The internal rate of return (IRR) is the discount rate that
equates the NPV of an investment opportunity with $0 (because the present value of
cash inflows equals the initial investment) It is the rate of return that the firm will
earn if it invests in the project and receives the given cash inflows (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 401)
When IRR is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the decision criteria are as
follows
If the IRR is greater than the cost of capital accept the project
46
If the IRR is less than the cost of capital reject the project
To calculate IRR Most financial calculators have a pre-programmed IRR
function that can be used to simplify the IRR calculation With these calculators you
merely punch in all cash flows just as if to calculate NPV and then depress IRR to
find the internal rate of return Computer software including spreadsheets is also
available for simplifying these calculations All NPV and IRR values presented in
this and subsequent chapters are obtained by using these functions on a popular
financial calculator (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 402)
297 COST OF GOOD SOLD (COGS)
Cost of goods sold is the direct costs attributable to the production of the
goods sold by a company This amount includes the cost of the materials used in
creating the good along with the direct labor costs used to produce the good It
excludes indirect expenses such as distribution costs and sales force costs
COGS is the costs that go into creating the products that a company sells
therefore the only costs included in the measure are those that are directly tied to the
production of the products For example the COGS for an automaker would include
the material costs for the parts that go into making the car along with the labor costs
used to put the car together The cost of sending the cars to dealerships and the cost of
the labor used to sell the car would be excluded
The exact costs included in the COGS calculation will differ from one type
of business to another The cost of goods attributed to a companys products are
47
expensed as the company sells these goods In summary for manufacturers COGS is
the cost of buying raw materials and manufacturing finished products For retailers
itrsquos the cost of obtaining or buying the products sold to customers If the company is
in a service industry COGS is the cost of the service it offers
48
49
50
43
By measuring how quickly the firm recovers its initial investment the
payback period also gives implicit consideration to the timing of cash flows and
therefore to the time value of money Because it can be viewed as a measure of
risk exposure many firms use the payback period as a decision criterion or as a
supplement to other decision techniques The longer the firm must wait to recover
its invested funds the greater the possibility of a calamity Hence the shorter the
payback period the lower the firmrsquos risk exposure A second weakness is that this
approach fails to take fully into account the time factor in the value of money A
third weakness of payback is its failure to recognize cash flows that occur after the
payback period (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 394-396)
Figure 29 Calculation of
Payback Period Source
Gitman amp Zitter 2012
44
295 NET PRESENT VALUE (NPV)
The method used by most large companies to evaluate investment projects is
called net present value (NPV) The intuition behind the NPV method is simple
When firms make investments they are spending money that they obtained in one
form or another from investors Investors expect a return on the money that they give
to firms so a firm should undertake an investment only if the present value of the
cash flow that the investment generates is greater than the cost of making the
investment in the first place
Because the NPV method takes into account the time value of investorsrsquo
money it is a more sophisticated capital budgeting technique than the payback rule
The NPV method discounts the firmrsquos cash flows at the firmrsquos cost of capital This
rate is the minimum return that must be earned on a project to satisfy the firmrsquos
investors Projects with lower returns fail to meet investorsrsquo expectations and
therefore decrease firm value and projects with higher returns increase firm
value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
The net present value (NPV) is found by subtracting a projectrsquos initial
investment (CF0) from the present value of its cash inflows (CFt) discounted at a
rate equal to the firmrsquos cost of capital (r) as shown below
NPV = Present value of cash inflows - Initial investment
When NPV is used both inflows and outflows are measured in terms of
45
present dollars For a project that has cash outflows beyond the initial investment the
net present value of a project would be found by subtracting the present value of
outflows from the present value of inflows When NPV is used to make accept reject
decisions the decision criteria are as follows
If the NPV is greater than $0 accept the project
If the NPV is less than $0 reject the project
If the NPV is greater than $0 the firm will earn a return greater than its cost of
capital Such action should increase the market value of the firm and therefore the
wealth of its owners by an amount equal to the NPV (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
296 INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN (IRR)
The internal rate of return (IRR) is one of the most widely used capital
budgeting techniques The internal rate of return (IRR) is the discount rate that
equates the NPV of an investment opportunity with $0 (because the present value of
cash inflows equals the initial investment) It is the rate of return that the firm will
earn if it invests in the project and receives the given cash inflows (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 401)
When IRR is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the decision criteria are as
follows
If the IRR is greater than the cost of capital accept the project
46
If the IRR is less than the cost of capital reject the project
To calculate IRR Most financial calculators have a pre-programmed IRR
function that can be used to simplify the IRR calculation With these calculators you
merely punch in all cash flows just as if to calculate NPV and then depress IRR to
find the internal rate of return Computer software including spreadsheets is also
available for simplifying these calculations All NPV and IRR values presented in
this and subsequent chapters are obtained by using these functions on a popular
financial calculator (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 402)
297 COST OF GOOD SOLD (COGS)
Cost of goods sold is the direct costs attributable to the production of the
goods sold by a company This amount includes the cost of the materials used in
creating the good along with the direct labor costs used to produce the good It
excludes indirect expenses such as distribution costs and sales force costs
COGS is the costs that go into creating the products that a company sells
therefore the only costs included in the measure are those that are directly tied to the
production of the products For example the COGS for an automaker would include
the material costs for the parts that go into making the car along with the labor costs
used to put the car together The cost of sending the cars to dealerships and the cost of
the labor used to sell the car would be excluded
The exact costs included in the COGS calculation will differ from one type
of business to another The cost of goods attributed to a companys products are
47
expensed as the company sells these goods In summary for manufacturers COGS is
the cost of buying raw materials and manufacturing finished products For retailers
itrsquos the cost of obtaining or buying the products sold to customers If the company is
in a service industry COGS is the cost of the service it offers
48
49
50
44
295 NET PRESENT VALUE (NPV)
The method used by most large companies to evaluate investment projects is
called net present value (NPV) The intuition behind the NPV method is simple
When firms make investments they are spending money that they obtained in one
form or another from investors Investors expect a return on the money that they give
to firms so a firm should undertake an investment only if the present value of the
cash flow that the investment generates is greater than the cost of making the
investment in the first place
Because the NPV method takes into account the time value of investorsrsquo
money it is a more sophisticated capital budgeting technique than the payback rule
The NPV method discounts the firmrsquos cash flows at the firmrsquos cost of capital This
rate is the minimum return that must be earned on a project to satisfy the firmrsquos
investors Projects with lower returns fail to meet investorsrsquo expectations and
therefore decrease firm value and projects with higher returns increase firm
value (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
The net present value (NPV) is found by subtracting a projectrsquos initial
investment (CF0) from the present value of its cash inflows (CFt) discounted at a
rate equal to the firmrsquos cost of capital (r) as shown below
NPV = Present value of cash inflows - Initial investment
When NPV is used both inflows and outflows are measured in terms of
45
present dollars For a project that has cash outflows beyond the initial investment the
net present value of a project would be found by subtracting the present value of
outflows from the present value of inflows When NPV is used to make accept reject
decisions the decision criteria are as follows
If the NPV is greater than $0 accept the project
If the NPV is less than $0 reject the project
If the NPV is greater than $0 the firm will earn a return greater than its cost of
capital Such action should increase the market value of the firm and therefore the
wealth of its owners by an amount equal to the NPV (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
296 INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN (IRR)
The internal rate of return (IRR) is one of the most widely used capital
budgeting techniques The internal rate of return (IRR) is the discount rate that
equates the NPV of an investment opportunity with $0 (because the present value of
cash inflows equals the initial investment) It is the rate of return that the firm will
earn if it invests in the project and receives the given cash inflows (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 401)
When IRR is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the decision criteria are as
follows
If the IRR is greater than the cost of capital accept the project
46
If the IRR is less than the cost of capital reject the project
To calculate IRR Most financial calculators have a pre-programmed IRR
function that can be used to simplify the IRR calculation With these calculators you
merely punch in all cash flows just as if to calculate NPV and then depress IRR to
find the internal rate of return Computer software including spreadsheets is also
available for simplifying these calculations All NPV and IRR values presented in
this and subsequent chapters are obtained by using these functions on a popular
financial calculator (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 402)
297 COST OF GOOD SOLD (COGS)
Cost of goods sold is the direct costs attributable to the production of the
goods sold by a company This amount includes the cost of the materials used in
creating the good along with the direct labor costs used to produce the good It
excludes indirect expenses such as distribution costs and sales force costs
COGS is the costs that go into creating the products that a company sells
therefore the only costs included in the measure are those that are directly tied to the
production of the products For example the COGS for an automaker would include
the material costs for the parts that go into making the car along with the labor costs
used to put the car together The cost of sending the cars to dealerships and the cost of
the labor used to sell the car would be excluded
The exact costs included in the COGS calculation will differ from one type
of business to another The cost of goods attributed to a companys products are
47
expensed as the company sells these goods In summary for manufacturers COGS is
the cost of buying raw materials and manufacturing finished products For retailers
itrsquos the cost of obtaining or buying the products sold to customers If the company is
in a service industry COGS is the cost of the service it offers
48
49
50
45
present dollars For a project that has cash outflows beyond the initial investment the
net present value of a project would be found by subtracting the present value of
outflows from the present value of inflows When NPV is used to make accept reject
decisions the decision criteria are as follows
If the NPV is greater than $0 accept the project
If the NPV is less than $0 reject the project
If the NPV is greater than $0 the firm will earn a return greater than its cost of
capital Such action should increase the market value of the firm and therefore the
wealth of its owners by an amount equal to the NPV (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 397)
296 INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN (IRR)
The internal rate of return (IRR) is one of the most widely used capital
budgeting techniques The internal rate of return (IRR) is the discount rate that
equates the NPV of an investment opportunity with $0 (because the present value of
cash inflows equals the initial investment) It is the rate of return that the firm will
earn if it invests in the project and receives the given cash inflows (Gitman amp Zitter
2012 401)
When IRR is used to make acceptndashreject decisions the decision criteria are as
follows
If the IRR is greater than the cost of capital accept the project
46
If the IRR is less than the cost of capital reject the project
To calculate IRR Most financial calculators have a pre-programmed IRR
function that can be used to simplify the IRR calculation With these calculators you
merely punch in all cash flows just as if to calculate NPV and then depress IRR to
find the internal rate of return Computer software including spreadsheets is also
available for simplifying these calculations All NPV and IRR values presented in
this and subsequent chapters are obtained by using these functions on a popular
financial calculator (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 402)
297 COST OF GOOD SOLD (COGS)
Cost of goods sold is the direct costs attributable to the production of the
goods sold by a company This amount includes the cost of the materials used in
creating the good along with the direct labor costs used to produce the good It
excludes indirect expenses such as distribution costs and sales force costs
COGS is the costs that go into creating the products that a company sells
therefore the only costs included in the measure are those that are directly tied to the
production of the products For example the COGS for an automaker would include
the material costs for the parts that go into making the car along with the labor costs
used to put the car together The cost of sending the cars to dealerships and the cost of
the labor used to sell the car would be excluded
The exact costs included in the COGS calculation will differ from one type
of business to another The cost of goods attributed to a companys products are
47
expensed as the company sells these goods In summary for manufacturers COGS is
the cost of buying raw materials and manufacturing finished products For retailers
itrsquos the cost of obtaining or buying the products sold to customers If the company is
in a service industry COGS is the cost of the service it offers
48
49
50
46
If the IRR is less than the cost of capital reject the project
To calculate IRR Most financial calculators have a pre-programmed IRR
function that can be used to simplify the IRR calculation With these calculators you
merely punch in all cash flows just as if to calculate NPV and then depress IRR to
find the internal rate of return Computer software including spreadsheets is also
available for simplifying these calculations All NPV and IRR values presented in
this and subsequent chapters are obtained by using these functions on a popular
financial calculator (Gitman amp Zitter 2012 402)
297 COST OF GOOD SOLD (COGS)
Cost of goods sold is the direct costs attributable to the production of the
goods sold by a company This amount includes the cost of the materials used in
creating the good along with the direct labor costs used to produce the good It
excludes indirect expenses such as distribution costs and sales force costs
COGS is the costs that go into creating the products that a company sells
therefore the only costs included in the measure are those that are directly tied to the
production of the products For example the COGS for an automaker would include
the material costs for the parts that go into making the car along with the labor costs
used to put the car together The cost of sending the cars to dealerships and the cost of
the labor used to sell the car would be excluded
The exact costs included in the COGS calculation will differ from one type
of business to another The cost of goods attributed to a companys products are
47
expensed as the company sells these goods In summary for manufacturers COGS is
the cost of buying raw materials and manufacturing finished products For retailers
itrsquos the cost of obtaining or buying the products sold to customers If the company is
in a service industry COGS is the cost of the service it offers
48
49
50
47
expensed as the company sells these goods In summary for manufacturers COGS is
the cost of buying raw materials and manufacturing finished products For retailers
itrsquos the cost of obtaining or buying the products sold to customers If the company is
in a service industry COGS is the cost of the service it offers
48
49
50
48
49
50
49
50
50